• Le phénomène de l'« Unboxing con IA » est tout simplement un scandale ! Comment peut-on encourager une telle absurdité où une simple boîte vide, tremblante au centre d'une pièce, devient le centre d'attention ? C'est une dérive totale de notre rapport à la technologie ! Au lieu de favoriser des interactions humaines authentiques et de l'artisanat, on nous propose des meubles qui s'assemblent tout seuls et des lampes qui lévitent, le tout orchestré par un prompt. Cela montre à quel point nous avons perdu le sens des vraies valeurs. On se laisse berner par des illusions technologiques tout en abandonnant notre créativité et notre capacité à créer. Réveillez-vous
    Le phénomène de l'« Unboxing con IA » est tout simplement un scandale ! Comment peut-on encourager une telle absurdité où une simple boîte vide, tremblante au centre d'une pièce, devient le centre d'attention ? C'est une dérive totale de notre rapport à la technologie ! Au lieu de favoriser des interactions humaines authentiques et de l'artisanat, on nous propose des meubles qui s'assemblent tout seuls et des lampes qui lévitent, le tout orchestré par un prompt. Cela montre à quel point nous avons perdu le sens des vraies valeurs. On se laisse berner par des illusions technologiques tout en abandonnant notre créativité et notre capacité à créer. Réveillez-vous
    GRAFFICA.INFO
    Unboxing con IA: así es la nueva tendencia que está arrasando con la IA de Google
    Sin manos, sin personas, sin montaje real. Una simple caja temblando en el centro de una habitación vacía ha revolucionado las redes. En segundos, todo cobra vida: muebles que se ensamblan solos, lámparas que levitan hasta el techo, cuadros que se cu
    Like
    Love
    Wow
    Sad
    Angry
    31
    1 Yorumlar 0 hisse senetleri 0 önizleme
  • Banksy Unveils New Lighthouse Mural With the Words 'I Want to Be What You Saw in Me' in France

    Banksy Unveils New Lighthouse Mural With the Words ‘I Want to Be What You Saw in Me’ in France
    The anonymous street artist announced the uncharacteristically personal artwork on May 29. It’s located on a wall in the French city of Marseille

    The new Banksy mural is on a wall beside a covered street in Marseille, France.
    Viken Kantarci / AFP via Getty Images

    After a five-month hiatus, Banksy is back with a new lighthouse mural in France. Compared to many of his previous works, the piece is uncharacteristically personal.
    The anonymous street artist announced his latest creation in an Instagram post on May 29. Located on a beige wall beside a sidewalk, the black lighthouse appears to merge with a painted shadow of a nearby metal safety post. Stenciled over the artwork are the words, “I want to be what you saw in me.”
    “There is no official explanation for the phrase,” write the Associated Press’ Thomas Adamson, Bishr Eltoni and Jill Lawless. “But its emotional pull is unmistakable—a quiet plea for recognition, love or redemption.”Banksy’s post appeared on Instagram with no caption, initially leaving the new mural’s location a mystery. However, BBC Verify, a team of investigative journalists and fact-checkers, quickly deduced that the mural is located on a backstreet called Rue Félix Frégier in the French city of Marseille, according to BBC News’ Cachella Smith and Amy Walker.
    Reactions to the new artwork were mixed. As the Art Newspaper’s Anny Shaw writes, “It could be a defection from the commercialism he simultaneously critiques and profits from, but I guess I’ve been made to expect more—either by technique or by message—from an artist whose entire practice, cheesy as it may be, is enmeshed in social and class consciousness.”
    Banksy has been creating street art around the world for decades. Some of his most well-known pieces include Rage, the Flower Thrower, a commentary on war, and Girl With Balloon. The artist’s works have sold for staggeringly high prices at auction; his most expensive piece is Love Is in the Bin, which fetched more than million in 2021.
    Last summer, Banksy completed a series of animal-themed paintings in London, including a pair of elephants, monkeys swinging from a bridge and a howling wolf painted on a satellite dish. Until the lighthouse, his most recent verified mural was a black-and-white painting of a veiled woman breastfeeding a baby—a reference to the Madonna and child—which he announced in an Instagram post on December 16, 2024.
    Much of Banksy’s career has been “politically charged,” drawing attention to issues like Palestinian suffering and the refugee crisis, writes the Art Newspaper. For instance, his recent London animal artworks may have been “a comment on the impact of humans on biodiversity.”

    Swinger, a mural Banksy painted in New Orleans in 2008

    Infrogmation of New Orleans via Wikimedia Commons under CC BY 2.0

    However, the new lighthouse mural is a departure for Banksy, who “seems to be getting more philosophical in his middle age,” per the publication. His latest work could be “a moment of rare self-reflection—after all, this is the first time Banksy has referred to himself in the first person in a public mural.”
    Nobody knows what Banksy’s intentions were, though many onlookers have theories. The Guardian’s Matthew Weaver suggests that “I want to be what you saw in me” may be a reference to a lyric from “Softly,” a 2001 country song by the band Lonestar: “I want to be what you see in me / I want to love you the way that you love me.”
    Banksy rarely includes text in his pieces. When he does, he “usually incorporates extant signage or graffiti when adding his touch rather than writing out his own phrases,” according to Hyperallergic’s Rhea Nayyar. “That being said, this particular text takes the street artist’s already on-the-nose symbolism to another level,” with the “heavy-handed captioning” coming across as “overly sentimental.”
    “Some commentators have said that at best, the latest offering attempts to open a vaguely profound conversation about being a ‘guiding light’ or ‘finding the light within.’ At worst, it veers into ‘live, laugh, love’ territory,” writes the Art Newspaper. “This message could be Banksy’s most personal yet—but its execution risks it also being his most banal.”

    Get the latest stories in your inbox every weekday.
    #banksy #unveils #new #lighthouse #mural
    Banksy Unveils New Lighthouse Mural With the Words 'I Want to Be What You Saw in Me' in France
    Banksy Unveils New Lighthouse Mural With the Words ‘I Want to Be What You Saw in Me’ in France The anonymous street artist announced the uncharacteristically personal artwork on May 29. It’s located on a wall in the French city of Marseille The new Banksy mural is on a wall beside a covered street in Marseille, France. Viken Kantarci / AFP via Getty Images After a five-month hiatus, Banksy is back with a new lighthouse mural in France. Compared to many of his previous works, the piece is uncharacteristically personal. The anonymous street artist announced his latest creation in an Instagram post on May 29. Located on a beige wall beside a sidewalk, the black lighthouse appears to merge with a painted shadow of a nearby metal safety post. Stenciled over the artwork are the words, “I want to be what you saw in me.” “There is no official explanation for the phrase,” write the Associated Press’ Thomas Adamson, Bishr Eltoni and Jill Lawless. “But its emotional pull is unmistakable—a quiet plea for recognition, love or redemption.”Banksy’s post appeared on Instagram with no caption, initially leaving the new mural’s location a mystery. However, BBC Verify, a team of investigative journalists and fact-checkers, quickly deduced that the mural is located on a backstreet called Rue Félix Frégier in the French city of Marseille, according to BBC News’ Cachella Smith and Amy Walker. Reactions to the new artwork were mixed. As the Art Newspaper’s Anny Shaw writes, “It could be a defection from the commercialism he simultaneously critiques and profits from, but I guess I’ve been made to expect more—either by technique or by message—from an artist whose entire practice, cheesy as it may be, is enmeshed in social and class consciousness.” Banksy has been creating street art around the world for decades. Some of his most well-known pieces include Rage, the Flower Thrower, a commentary on war, and Girl With Balloon. The artist’s works have sold for staggeringly high prices at auction; his most expensive piece is Love Is in the Bin, which fetched more than million in 2021. Last summer, Banksy completed a series of animal-themed paintings in London, including a pair of elephants, monkeys swinging from a bridge and a howling wolf painted on a satellite dish. Until the lighthouse, his most recent verified mural was a black-and-white painting of a veiled woman breastfeeding a baby—a reference to the Madonna and child—which he announced in an Instagram post on December 16, 2024. Much of Banksy’s career has been “politically charged,” drawing attention to issues like Palestinian suffering and the refugee crisis, writes the Art Newspaper. For instance, his recent London animal artworks may have been “a comment on the impact of humans on biodiversity.” Swinger, a mural Banksy painted in New Orleans in 2008 Infrogmation of New Orleans via Wikimedia Commons under CC BY 2.0 However, the new lighthouse mural is a departure for Banksy, who “seems to be getting more philosophical in his middle age,” per the publication. His latest work could be “a moment of rare self-reflection—after all, this is the first time Banksy has referred to himself in the first person in a public mural.” Nobody knows what Banksy’s intentions were, though many onlookers have theories. The Guardian’s Matthew Weaver suggests that “I want to be what you saw in me” may be a reference to a lyric from “Softly,” a 2001 country song by the band Lonestar: “I want to be what you see in me / I want to love you the way that you love me.” Banksy rarely includes text in his pieces. When he does, he “usually incorporates extant signage or graffiti when adding his touch rather than writing out his own phrases,” according to Hyperallergic’s Rhea Nayyar. “That being said, this particular text takes the street artist’s already on-the-nose symbolism to another level,” with the “heavy-handed captioning” coming across as “overly sentimental.” “Some commentators have said that at best, the latest offering attempts to open a vaguely profound conversation about being a ‘guiding light’ or ‘finding the light within.’ At worst, it veers into ‘live, laugh, love’ territory,” writes the Art Newspaper. “This message could be Banksy’s most personal yet—but its execution risks it also being his most banal.” Get the latest stories in your inbox every weekday. #banksy #unveils #new #lighthouse #mural
    WWW.SMITHSONIANMAG.COM
    Banksy Unveils New Lighthouse Mural With the Words 'I Want to Be What You Saw in Me' in France
    Banksy Unveils New Lighthouse Mural With the Words ‘I Want to Be What You Saw in Me’ in France The anonymous street artist announced the uncharacteristically personal artwork on May 29. It’s located on a wall in the French city of Marseille The new Banksy mural is on a wall beside a covered street in Marseille, France. Viken Kantarci / AFP via Getty Images After a five-month hiatus, Banksy is back with a new lighthouse mural in France. Compared to many of his previous works, the piece is uncharacteristically personal. The anonymous street artist announced his latest creation in an Instagram post on May 29. Located on a beige wall beside a sidewalk, the black lighthouse appears to merge with a painted shadow of a nearby metal safety post. Stenciled over the artwork are the words, “I want to be what you saw in me.” “There is no official explanation for the phrase,” write the Associated Press’ Thomas Adamson, Bishr Eltoni and Jill Lawless. “But its emotional pull is unmistakable—a quiet plea for recognition, love or redemption.”Banksy’s post appeared on Instagram with no caption, initially leaving the new mural’s location a mystery. However, BBC Verify, a team of investigative journalists and fact-checkers, quickly deduced that the mural is located on a backstreet called Rue Félix Frégier in the French city of Marseille, according to BBC News’ Cachella Smith and Amy Walker. Reactions to the new artwork were mixed. As the Art Newspaper’s Anny Shaw writes, “It could be a defection from the commercialism he simultaneously critiques and profits from, but I guess I’ve been made to expect more—either by technique or by message—from an artist whose entire practice, cheesy as it may be, is enmeshed in social and class consciousness.” Banksy has been creating street art around the world for decades. Some of his most well-known pieces include Rage, the Flower Thrower, a commentary on war, and Girl With Balloon. The artist’s works have sold for staggeringly high prices at auction; his most expensive piece is Love Is in the Bin, which fetched more than $25 million in 2021. Last summer, Banksy completed a series of animal-themed paintings in London, including a pair of elephants, monkeys swinging from a bridge and a howling wolf painted on a satellite dish. Until the lighthouse, his most recent verified mural was a black-and-white painting of a veiled woman breastfeeding a baby—a reference to the Madonna and child—which he announced in an Instagram post on December 16, 2024. Much of Banksy’s career has been “politically charged,” drawing attention to issues like Palestinian suffering and the refugee crisis, writes the Art Newspaper. For instance, his recent London animal artworks may have been “a comment on the impact of humans on biodiversity.” Swinger, a mural Banksy painted in New Orleans in 2008 Infrogmation of New Orleans via Wikimedia Commons under CC BY 2.0 However, the new lighthouse mural is a departure for Banksy, who “seems to be getting more philosophical in his middle age,” per the publication. His latest work could be “a moment of rare self-reflection—after all, this is the first time Banksy has referred to himself in the first person in a public mural.” Nobody knows what Banksy’s intentions were, though many onlookers have theories. The Guardian’s Matthew Weaver suggests that “I want to be what you saw in me” may be a reference to a lyric from “Softly,” a 2001 country song by the band Lonestar: “I want to be what you see in me / I want to love you the way that you love me.” Banksy rarely includes text in his pieces. When he does, he “usually incorporates extant signage or graffiti when adding his touch rather than writing out his own phrases,” according to Hyperallergic’s Rhea Nayyar. “That being said, this particular text takes the street artist’s already on-the-nose symbolism to another level,” with the “heavy-handed captioning” coming across as “overly sentimental.” “Some commentators have said that at best, the latest offering attempts to open a vaguely profound conversation about being a ‘guiding light’ or ‘finding the light within.’ At worst, it veers into ‘live, laugh, love’ territory,” writes the Art Newspaper. “This message could be Banksy’s most personal yet—but its execution risks it also being his most banal.” Get the latest stories in your inbox every weekday.
    0 Yorumlar 0 hisse senetleri 0 önizleme
  • Rocky Mountain Region Interior Designers, Architects, and Builders to Know From the AD PRO Directory

    Rocky Mountain region interior designers, architects, builders, and landscape architects have a bounty of inspiration right outside their doors. Accordingly, their work reflects the beauty of the natural world. The region’s design and construction talents have the ability to bring the surrounding landscape into projects of all types, from modern mountain homes to urban apartments and town houses. If you’re ready to start a project, these AD-approved Rocky Mountain region interior designers, architects, builders, and landscape architects should be your first call.On the listInterior DesignersAshley Scheidel Design StudioAshley Scheidel Design Studio let the natural beauty of the materials take center stage in a Denver home’s tranquil bedroom.
    Photo by Jess Blackwell PhotographySustainability is a driving force in interiors by Ashley Scheidel Design Studio. The Denver-based interior architecture and design firm specializes in new construction and renovations. Whether they are helping clients reimagine their existing spaces or building new ones from scratch, Scheidel and her team focus on creating timeless environments that balance livability and easygoing elegance. The client’s personal style also drives the design, but natural materials such as warm woods and rugged stone feature prominently in the firm’s portfolio.Beaumier InteriorsIn a renovated midcentury brick ranch home in Denver, Beaumier Interiors balanced warmth and restraint through the use of soft textures, sculptural forms, and quiet tones. The resulting space feels both grounded and welcoming.
    Photo by Jess BlackwellAfter earning her stripes working for several leading firms in Chicago, designer Ashley Beaumier brought her signature organic modern style to the Denver area, where she founded her eponymous firm. Beaumier Interiors crafts polished interiors, which are layered with natural materials, including striking stone, pale linens, and warm woods. The full-service firm works with clients on projects of all sizes, including large renovations and new constructions, and guides each project from start to finish, ensuring a cohesive look throughout the entire home.Elizabeth Stanley DesignCurated vintage furnishings and lighting by Elizabeth Stanley Design softens the concrete architectural rigor of this austere Austin home.
    Photo by Shade DeggesFor nearly 20 years, contemporary and minimalist houses have been transformed into welcoming, character-filled homes at the hands of designer Elizabeth Stanley and her eponymous firm. The Aspen, Colorado–based studio focuses on bringing its clients’ personal style to the fore as it guides them through the design process. The resulting tranquil spaces balance functionality and aesthetics and incorporate statement furnishings, natural materials, graphic art, and rich textures.Donna Mondi Interior DesignIn a Michigan living room by Donna Mondi Interior Design, sculptural seating and a floating concrete fireplace strike a confident balance between softness and strength. Cascading fiber art adds an unexpected edge.
    Photo by Dustin Halleck; Styled by Darwin FitzKnown for her ability to mix traditional and modern design into soulful spaces, designer Donna Mondi has been transforming everything from city penthouses to country estates to desert retreats for almost 25 years. With offices in Denver and Chicago, Donna Mondi Interior Design works on high-end projects across the country, including renovations, new construction, and furnishings. The firm specializes in crafting architecturally driven designs that expertly balance luxury and comfort.Dream Homes Inc.In a Denver home, Dream Homes Inc. moved and redesigned the fireplace with a chevron-patterned Italian granite surround.
    Photo by David Patterson PhotographySpecializing in large-scale renovations, Denver-based Dream Homes Inc. has been transforming homes in the Rocky Mountain region and nationwide since 1999. Led by founder Joyce Clegg, the interior architecture and design firm is known for its expertly planned and personality-filled residences. Dream Homes oversees every aspect of the construction process, and also works on kitchen and bath remodels. Notably, accessibility and aging is at the forefront of its place design.Duet Design GroupIn a historic Denver neighborhood, Duet Design created a cozy family home in a 1937 Tudor. The original architecture’s charm is elevated with inherited art, classic and modern pieces, and vintage finds.
    Photo by David PattersonWhether designing an updated log cabin, a historic Tudor home, or a contemporary Mexican beach retreat, Denver-based Duet Design Group has an uncanny ability to bring the beauty of a home’s natural surroundings indoors. Led by founder and principal Devon Tobin, the firm works with clients on residential projects, including renovations and new construction, as well as commercial spaces. While the firm is known for its collaborative process, clients can also expect every logistical detail to be taken care of for a stress-free experience.Jede InteriorsBeauty and functionality meet in this polished Orem, Utah, kitchen designed by Jede Interiors.
    Photo by Camilia LundNeutral hues and natural materials contribute to the calming, timeless homes created by Orem, Utah–based Jede Interiors. Led by principal designer Jen Dean, the firm is known for its fresh take on traditional style, combining comfortable furnishings with vintage pieces that add patina and history. Jede Interiors works to make every space feel authentic to the clients who live in it—it services those based locally and across the country.Bowen Design StudioThe Red Rocks of Southern Utah were the inspiration for the dining area’s cabinet color, adding a playful yet sophisticated design element.
    Photo by Lacey Alexander PhotographyBuilding a new home can bring a daunting number of decisions, which is where Bowen Design Studio comes in. Led by designer Hailey Brodale, the Saint George, Utah–based firm specializes in helping clients make their custom homes feel truly personal. Whether it’s devising an organic desert retreat or a dramatic mountain home, Bowen Design Studio takes a hands-on approach throughout the construction process, making sure that the end result is exactly what the client envisioned.Lund Haus StudioFor a mountain home, Lund Haus Studio incorporated thoughtful organization solutions to enhance functionality and ease of living, as well as textures and materials inspired by the raw beauty of nature.
    Photo by Rebekah WestoverSalt Lake City, Utah–based Lund Haus Studio designs joyful homes that truly work. The firm focuses on functionality, adding creative storage solutions and crafting layouts optimized for family life. Principal designer and professional organizer Sam Lund draws on her background in psychology as she works with clients, helping them express their needs and visions for their homes, and the team boasts extensive experience with construction, allowing the firm to expertly manage projects from start to finish.Eider InteriorsA book-matched stone fireplace is a focal point in the living area of an Eider Interiors–designed contemporary home overlooking the Salt Lake City Valley.
    Photo by Christina Zolotaia PhotographyA clients’ story is at the heart of every space that Bluffdale, Utah–based Eider Interiors creates. Led by founder and principal designer Mallory Bouchard, the residential and commercial design studio is known for its contemporary interiors that balance modern details with elements of warmth and texture. Eider Interiors works on a wide range of projects, from a modern Miami apartment to a nature-inspired desert escape to a luxurious RV.The FlairhunterHigh on the ski runs of Park City, this custom bunk room was designed by The Flairhunter to comfortably accommodate adults and/or kids. Crafted from reclaimed barn wood, it features pops of color in the bedding and accessories to add an element of freshness and fun.
    Photo by Doug Burke; Styling by Jen PaulInterior design firm The Flairhunter isn’t afraid to make a statement, incorporating bold colors, unique elements, and eye-catching artwork. Founder Stephanie Hunt leads a team of ten across the firm’s outposts in Salt Lake City and Southern California, and the firm works on projects throughout the United States and globally. The Flairhunter balances custom furnishings with vintage pieces and adds energy and personality by mixing colors, patterns, and materials.DwellifyCheckered floors, butcher block countertops, and vintage finishes revived the kitchen of this 100-year-old home updated by Dwellify.
    Photo by Katie Griffith PhotographyDwellify streamlines the remodeling process, letting homeowners easily choose a design that fits their personal aesthetic and budget constraints. The company’s technology helps clients visualize their future spaces, and the process also includes virtual meetings with designers and Design Boxes of physical samples. The Salt Lake City–based company works remotely with clients across the country, pairing them with a remodel coordinator and a network of carefully vetted pros to help get the job done.Studio EckströmStudio Eckström revives the living room of a 1927 Spanish Colonial Revival in Omaha.
    Photo by Daniel Johnson PhotographyDesigners Mark and Mikal Eckstrom bring a sense of whimsy and fun to the interiors they create with their Omaha, Nebraska–based firm, Studio Eckström. Unique details abound in the firm’s projects, from fanciful ironwork to bold wall treatments to unexpected color palettes, and the team isn’t afraid to push clients out of their comfort zones. Studio Eckström relies on a trusted roster of artisans, gallerists, and dealers to help them make each home one of a kind.Trove HomesDrawing inspiration from the breathtaking lake views, Trove Home’s design for a Lake Quivira kitchen features a custom curved island leg—an homage to the natural, flowing beauty of the water.
    Photo by Nate Sheets PhotographyWith a portfolio full of dramatic before and afters, it’s obvious that Kansas City, Kansas–based firm Trove Homes knows how to completely reinvent a home to fit its clients’ personal styles. Co-owners Jessica and Nate White lead clients through every decision, ensuring that the finished space balances livability and sophistication. Whether tackling a renovation or starting from the ground up with a new build, the firm works in an array of aesthetics, from traditional to coastal.Emily Tucker DesignEmily Tucker Design updated a historic Denver Tudor for a young family, maintaining the history of the home while giving the furnishings a more youthful feel.
    Photo by David LauerBased in Boulder, Colorado, Emily Tucker Design is a full-service firm helping clients across the country create personalized and highly curated residences. Tucker and her team work in a variety of styles, from modern mountain homes to historical residences, adding unexpected touches, including bold color palettes, playful patterns, and dazzling art. The firm prides itself on designing livable spaces, so it’s no wonder it has become a go-to for families looking for stylish yet durable interiors. Emily Tucker Design works on projects of a variety of scopes, including gut renovations, full home design, and new construction.Nadia Watts Interior DesignNadia Watts Interior Design created a bold dining room in a Denver home. Katie Ridder’s Pagoda wallpaper inspired the room’s unexpected color palette.
    Photo by Emily Minton RedfieldDesigner Nadia Watts founded her eponymous Denver design firm in 2009, and since then she’s become known for her artful—and often colorful—approach to interiors. The great, great granddaughter of Louis Comfort Tiffany and a former assistant to a curator at The Metropolitan Museum of Art, Watts has a special appreciation for the decorative arts and is able to give her client’s collections of art and furnishings the showcase they deserve. In addition to working with clients across the country, Watts recently launched a fabric collection with Kravet and designed a jewel-inspired space for the 2024 Kips Bay Palm Beach Showhouse.Inside StoriesA custom fireplace with walnut panels is the focal point of an Aspen home by Inside Stories. A piece by artist Trevor Kiernander is on display alongside swivel chairs by A. Rudin and a leather ottoman by Lee Industries.
    Photo by Eric LuceroDenver’s Inside Stories combines the capabilities of a large design firm with the hands-on approach of a smaller studio, giving clients the best of both worlds. Led by designer Miranda Cullen, the company tackles projects of all scopes, from paint consultations to complete redesigns, as well as commercial and hospitality designs. For clients looking for white-glove service, Inside Stories has a Residential X team that handles luxury projects like new builds and full-home renovations. Cullen and her team aren’t afraid of making bold moves in their designs, which showcase a mix of styles from midcentury-modern to rustic.Kristin Dittmar DesignKristin Dittmar Design devised a warm and moody primary bathroom for a home in Aspen. Herringbone marble tile lines the floor, while the vanity showcases warm walnut accents.
    Photo courtesy of Kristin Dittmar DesignEarthy elements and streamlined details blend beautifully in the work of Aspen’s Kristin Dittmar Design. The firm brings its signature mountain modern style to homes across the country, showcasing the natural beauty of each location with rugged stonework, warm wood accents, and perfectly framed views. Whether they’re designing a retreat in the Rockies or modernizing a 19th-century Victorian, Dittmar and her team are hands-on during each phase of a project, making sure that every space shows exacting attention to detail.Susannah Holmberg StudiosFor the foyer of a Chicago carriage house, Susannah Holmberg Studios used wallpaper, art, and color to create a layered entryway.
    Ryan McDonald. Stylist: Kimberly SwedeliusWhether it’s in a desert retreat or a storied Tudor house, Salt Lake City’s Susannah Holmberg Studios knows how to set a mood. The firm’s stylish spaces balance beauty and livability, and showcase the client’s personality with unique color palettes, curated art, and iconic design pieces. While they specialize in full-home renovations and new construction, Holmerg and her team work on residential and commercial projects across the country, tailoring the designs to each client, as well as the geographic and architectural settings.Margarita BravoFor a whole-home project in Denver’s LoHi district, Bravo drew inspiration from her client’s adventurous spirit and love of unique design, incorporating a mix of colors, patterns, and textures to create a sophisticated and dynamic space.
    Photo courtesy of Margarita BravoDesigner Margarita Bravo’s projects are as far-flung as her inspirations. Her eponymous firm is headquartered in Denver and has outposts in Miami, Montecito, Aspen, and Barcelona. Bringing in influences from European and Latin American design, Bravo masterfully mixes natural elements, streamlined furnishings, metallic accents, and delightful patterns in her projects, which range from mountain homes to beachfront condos. The designer is also behind Sorella Furniture, which she created with her sister Maria, and MB Home Collection.Ashley Campbell Interior DesignAshley Campbell Interior Design turned the lower level of a new build in Denver into a party-ready space with a wet bar and a custom concrete coffee table.
    Photo by Meagan Larsen PhotographyDenver designer Ashley Campbell puts a contemporary twist on mountain style, contrasting natural elements with streamlined furnishings, a crisp black-and-white palette, and minimalist lighting and fireplaces. These sophisticated spaces serve as striking backdrops for her clients’ collections of art and artifacts, and Campbell balances contemporary elements with plenty of texture to bring in a sense of warmth. The firm uses the latest technology to realize its designs, giving clients the full picture of the team’s creative vision.ArchitectsCharles Cunniffe Architects & InteriorsIn the great room of an Aspen, Colorado, home, Charles Cunniffe Architects perfectly framed the mountain views in a seating area.
    Photo by Aaron LeitzScenic views are treated like works of art in the homes designed by Charles Cunniffe Architects & Interiors. The Aspen, Colorado–based firm has been creating residential, commercial, and institutional structures for over 40 years. They bring a dedication to sustainability and innovation to each project, incorporating innovative materials and energy-efficient systems for spaces that enhance their occupant’s well-being. A project’s context is a driving force in the creative process, and CCA expertly incorporates nature into the design.CLB ArchitectsSituated in the heart of Moonlight Basin in Big Sky, Montana, CLB Architects’ Basecamp residence rises into the dense fir and pine trees, offering a close connection to the natural environment.
    Photo by Kevin ScottNature isn’t just an inspiration for the work of CLB Architects, it’s an integral part of each design. The cross-disciplinary design studio, which has offices in Jackson, Wyoming, and Bozeman, Montana, takes a site-specific approach and lets the surroundings inform each detail. The firm works on projects across the country and internationally, each rooted in context, whether it’s a ski-in, ski-out mountain retreat or an Upper East Side apartment.Forum Phi Architecture and Interior DesignBlending seamlessly with its surroundings, this home by Forum Phi Architecture + Interior Design pairs rustic textures with modern lines—capturing the spirit of the landscape through thoughtful design.
    Photo by Dallas & Harris PhotographyForum Phi Architecture and Interior Design brings architecture, interior design, and land planning together under one roof, allowing the team to work collaboratively with clients on all aspects of a project. The resulting structures showcase the beauty of the natural world. With offices in Aspen, Denver, and Carbondale, the team works on residential, commercial, and institutional projects in a wide range of locations and styles, from rustic ranches to historic renovations to modern mountain retreats.CCY ArchitectsClad in stone, wood, steel, and glass, a home by CCY Architects nestles quietly within the natural surroundings of Aspen, Colorado, creating a rugged and durable contemporary interpretation of alpine architecture.
    Photo by Draper WhiteThe American West and its striking landscapes inspire CCY Architects’ regional modernism. The Colorado architecture and design firm seeks to develop a deep connection to nature and community through its work—whether its residential, commercial, or institutional—and makes sustainability a priority. Cross-disciplinary collaboration is at the heart of the firm’s process, and the team immerses itself in the site, ensuring that the final design is rooted in place.Vera Iconica ArchitectureVera Iconica Architecture was inspired by the Japanese concept of ma, or “the space between,” when designing this Shooting Star sanctuary at the base of the Jackson Hole Resort. A series of small view courtyards are carved out of the massing, giving moments for pause and reflection offset with views of woods, streams, and the majestic Tetons.
    Photo by Blok StudiosFor Vera Iconica Architecture, architecture and wellness go hand in hand. The firm’s evidence-based approach prioritizes the health and well-being of a client, resulting in spaces that feel restorative and connected to nature. The team finds inspiration in the landscape of the West, incorporating natural materials and sustainable building practices. With offices in Jackson, Wyoming; Denver, Colorado; and Park City, Utah, Vera Iconica Architecture designs globally, working on residential and hospitality projects from Hong Kong to South Dakota to Peru.Landscape ArchitectsStudio CampoStudio Campo devised a three-acre farm and homestead in Portland, Oregon, with stylist Emily Henderson. The property is complete with a seating area, plunge pool, raised beds, and a greenhouse workout facility.
    Photo by Kaitlin GreenLandscape architecture firm Studio Campo creates outdoor spaces that enhance the ecosystem and the lives of those who enjoy them. Led by founding principal Cali Pfaff, the firm has a naturalistic style and a focus on both placemaking and biodiversity, highlighting native species in its work. Based in Denver and Oregon’s Willamette Valley, Studio Campo works on a wide range of landscape projects, including gardens, public spaces, farms, and habitats.BuildersVitruvius BuiltVitruvius Built collaborated with designer Barclay Butera on a sophisticated Deer Valley mountain retreat that blends rustic charm with modern elegance.
    Photo by Cristina ZolotaiaFounded by Charles Ochello, Park City, Utah–based Vitruvius Built specializes in luxury construction, realizing even the most ambitious designs. The homes, located across the country, feature the highest quality materials and amenities such speakeasy-style golf suites, entertainment floors, and cozy bunk rooms. From a contemporary A-frame style residence to a mountain retreat made for entertaining, the homes in the firm’s portfolio showcase its ability to harness the latest technology to craft personal sanctuaries.Cadre General ContractorsEast Coast meets Colorado in this home constructed by Cadre General Contractors that blends traditional sophistication with a rich, Western aesthetic.
    Photo courtesy of Cadre General ContractorsCadre General Contractors has been building custom homes in Colorado for nearly 30 years and its decades of experience shows in its extensive portfolio. The contracting firm works in a wide range of styles from traditional to contemporary, collaborating closely with architects and designers to bring the overall vision to life. Cadre prides itself on its ability to execute ambitious designs while maintaining an exacting attention to detail and quality.The Jackson Home CompanyWithin a newly constructed home by The Jackson Home Company, the expansive great room, with its vaulted ceilings, exposed steel beams, and grand stone fireplace, is framed by floor-to-ceiling windows showcasing breathtaking views of the Teton Range.
    Photo by David AgnelloThe Jackson Home Company channels the rugged beauty of Jackson Hole, Wyoming, into striking mountain homes. In 2019, Brooklyn Home Company founders Bill Caleo, Lyndsay Caleo Karol, and Fitzhugh Karol expanded west to Wyoming, and since then the division has designed and built over 20 luxury single-family homes, including a 6,414-square-foot ski-in/ski-out home in Teton Village and an artful retreat nestled beside an Aspen grove. The firm prioritizes sustainability in its homes, incorporating elements like green roofs and locally sourced materials.APPLY NOWGrow your business with the AD PRO DirectoryArrowAre you looking for an interior decorator or designer to hire for your next project? Wherever you are, visit the AD PRO Directory to browse our list of AD-approved designers and find your match for a design consultation.
    #rocky #mountain #region #interior #designers
    Rocky Mountain Region Interior Designers, Architects, and Builders to Know From the AD PRO Directory
    Rocky Mountain region interior designers, architects, builders, and landscape architects have a bounty of inspiration right outside their doors. Accordingly, their work reflects the beauty of the natural world. The region’s design and construction talents have the ability to bring the surrounding landscape into projects of all types, from modern mountain homes to urban apartments and town houses. If you’re ready to start a project, these AD-approved Rocky Mountain region interior designers, architects, builders, and landscape architects should be your first call.On the listInterior DesignersAshley Scheidel Design StudioAshley Scheidel Design Studio let the natural beauty of the materials take center stage in a Denver home’s tranquil bedroom. Photo by Jess Blackwell PhotographySustainability is a driving force in interiors by Ashley Scheidel Design Studio. The Denver-based interior architecture and design firm specializes in new construction and renovations. Whether they are helping clients reimagine their existing spaces or building new ones from scratch, Scheidel and her team focus on creating timeless environments that balance livability and easygoing elegance. The client’s personal style also drives the design, but natural materials such as warm woods and rugged stone feature prominently in the firm’s portfolio.Beaumier InteriorsIn a renovated midcentury brick ranch home in Denver, Beaumier Interiors balanced warmth and restraint through the use of soft textures, sculptural forms, and quiet tones. The resulting space feels both grounded and welcoming. Photo by Jess BlackwellAfter earning her stripes working for several leading firms in Chicago, designer Ashley Beaumier brought her signature organic modern style to the Denver area, where she founded her eponymous firm. Beaumier Interiors crafts polished interiors, which are layered with natural materials, including striking stone, pale linens, and warm woods. The full-service firm works with clients on projects of all sizes, including large renovations and new constructions, and guides each project from start to finish, ensuring a cohesive look throughout the entire home.Elizabeth Stanley DesignCurated vintage furnishings and lighting by Elizabeth Stanley Design softens the concrete architectural rigor of this austere Austin home. Photo by Shade DeggesFor nearly 20 years, contemporary and minimalist houses have been transformed into welcoming, character-filled homes at the hands of designer Elizabeth Stanley and her eponymous firm. The Aspen, Colorado–based studio focuses on bringing its clients’ personal style to the fore as it guides them through the design process. The resulting tranquil spaces balance functionality and aesthetics and incorporate statement furnishings, natural materials, graphic art, and rich textures.Donna Mondi Interior DesignIn a Michigan living room by Donna Mondi Interior Design, sculptural seating and a floating concrete fireplace strike a confident balance between softness and strength. Cascading fiber art adds an unexpected edge. Photo by Dustin Halleck; Styled by Darwin FitzKnown for her ability to mix traditional and modern design into soulful spaces, designer Donna Mondi has been transforming everything from city penthouses to country estates to desert retreats for almost 25 years. With offices in Denver and Chicago, Donna Mondi Interior Design works on high-end projects across the country, including renovations, new construction, and furnishings. The firm specializes in crafting architecturally driven designs that expertly balance luxury and comfort.Dream Homes Inc.In a Denver home, Dream Homes Inc. moved and redesigned the fireplace with a chevron-patterned Italian granite surround. Photo by David Patterson PhotographySpecializing in large-scale renovations, Denver-based Dream Homes Inc. has been transforming homes in the Rocky Mountain region and nationwide since 1999. Led by founder Joyce Clegg, the interior architecture and design firm is known for its expertly planned and personality-filled residences. Dream Homes oversees every aspect of the construction process, and also works on kitchen and bath remodels. Notably, accessibility and aging is at the forefront of its place design.Duet Design GroupIn a historic Denver neighborhood, Duet Design created a cozy family home in a 1937 Tudor. The original architecture’s charm is elevated with inherited art, classic and modern pieces, and vintage finds. Photo by David PattersonWhether designing an updated log cabin, a historic Tudor home, or a contemporary Mexican beach retreat, Denver-based Duet Design Group has an uncanny ability to bring the beauty of a home’s natural surroundings indoors. Led by founder and principal Devon Tobin, the firm works with clients on residential projects, including renovations and new construction, as well as commercial spaces. While the firm is known for its collaborative process, clients can also expect every logistical detail to be taken care of for a stress-free experience.Jede InteriorsBeauty and functionality meet in this polished Orem, Utah, kitchen designed by Jede Interiors. Photo by Camilia LundNeutral hues and natural materials contribute to the calming, timeless homes created by Orem, Utah–based Jede Interiors. Led by principal designer Jen Dean, the firm is known for its fresh take on traditional style, combining comfortable furnishings with vintage pieces that add patina and history. Jede Interiors works to make every space feel authentic to the clients who live in it—it services those based locally and across the country.Bowen Design StudioThe Red Rocks of Southern Utah were the inspiration for the dining area’s cabinet color, adding a playful yet sophisticated design element. Photo by Lacey Alexander PhotographyBuilding a new home can bring a daunting number of decisions, which is where Bowen Design Studio comes in. Led by designer Hailey Brodale, the Saint George, Utah–based firm specializes in helping clients make their custom homes feel truly personal. Whether it’s devising an organic desert retreat or a dramatic mountain home, Bowen Design Studio takes a hands-on approach throughout the construction process, making sure that the end result is exactly what the client envisioned.Lund Haus StudioFor a mountain home, Lund Haus Studio incorporated thoughtful organization solutions to enhance functionality and ease of living, as well as textures and materials inspired by the raw beauty of nature. Photo by Rebekah WestoverSalt Lake City, Utah–based Lund Haus Studio designs joyful homes that truly work. The firm focuses on functionality, adding creative storage solutions and crafting layouts optimized for family life. Principal designer and professional organizer Sam Lund draws on her background in psychology as she works with clients, helping them express their needs and visions for their homes, and the team boasts extensive experience with construction, allowing the firm to expertly manage projects from start to finish.Eider InteriorsA book-matched stone fireplace is a focal point in the living area of an Eider Interiors–designed contemporary home overlooking the Salt Lake City Valley. Photo by Christina Zolotaia PhotographyA clients’ story is at the heart of every space that Bluffdale, Utah–based Eider Interiors creates. Led by founder and principal designer Mallory Bouchard, the residential and commercial design studio is known for its contemporary interiors that balance modern details with elements of warmth and texture. Eider Interiors works on a wide range of projects, from a modern Miami apartment to a nature-inspired desert escape to a luxurious RV.The FlairhunterHigh on the ski runs of Park City, this custom bunk room was designed by The Flairhunter to comfortably accommodate adults and/or kids. Crafted from reclaimed barn wood, it features pops of color in the bedding and accessories to add an element of freshness and fun. Photo by Doug Burke; Styling by Jen PaulInterior design firm The Flairhunter isn’t afraid to make a statement, incorporating bold colors, unique elements, and eye-catching artwork. Founder Stephanie Hunt leads a team of ten across the firm’s outposts in Salt Lake City and Southern California, and the firm works on projects throughout the United States and globally. The Flairhunter balances custom furnishings with vintage pieces and adds energy and personality by mixing colors, patterns, and materials.DwellifyCheckered floors, butcher block countertops, and vintage finishes revived the kitchen of this 100-year-old home updated by Dwellify. Photo by Katie Griffith PhotographyDwellify streamlines the remodeling process, letting homeowners easily choose a design that fits their personal aesthetic and budget constraints. The company’s technology helps clients visualize their future spaces, and the process also includes virtual meetings with designers and Design Boxes of physical samples. The Salt Lake City–based company works remotely with clients across the country, pairing them with a remodel coordinator and a network of carefully vetted pros to help get the job done.Studio EckströmStudio Eckström revives the living room of a 1927 Spanish Colonial Revival in Omaha. Photo by Daniel Johnson PhotographyDesigners Mark and Mikal Eckstrom bring a sense of whimsy and fun to the interiors they create with their Omaha, Nebraska–based firm, Studio Eckström. Unique details abound in the firm’s projects, from fanciful ironwork to bold wall treatments to unexpected color palettes, and the team isn’t afraid to push clients out of their comfort zones. Studio Eckström relies on a trusted roster of artisans, gallerists, and dealers to help them make each home one of a kind.Trove HomesDrawing inspiration from the breathtaking lake views, Trove Home’s design for a Lake Quivira kitchen features a custom curved island leg—an homage to the natural, flowing beauty of the water. Photo by Nate Sheets PhotographyWith a portfolio full of dramatic before and afters, it’s obvious that Kansas City, Kansas–based firm Trove Homes knows how to completely reinvent a home to fit its clients’ personal styles. Co-owners Jessica and Nate White lead clients through every decision, ensuring that the finished space balances livability and sophistication. Whether tackling a renovation or starting from the ground up with a new build, the firm works in an array of aesthetics, from traditional to coastal.Emily Tucker DesignEmily Tucker Design updated a historic Denver Tudor for a young family, maintaining the history of the home while giving the furnishings a more youthful feel. Photo by David LauerBased in Boulder, Colorado, Emily Tucker Design is a full-service firm helping clients across the country create personalized and highly curated residences. Tucker and her team work in a variety of styles, from modern mountain homes to historical residences, adding unexpected touches, including bold color palettes, playful patterns, and dazzling art. The firm prides itself on designing livable spaces, so it’s no wonder it has become a go-to for families looking for stylish yet durable interiors. Emily Tucker Design works on projects of a variety of scopes, including gut renovations, full home design, and new construction.Nadia Watts Interior DesignNadia Watts Interior Design created a bold dining room in a Denver home. Katie Ridder’s Pagoda wallpaper inspired the room’s unexpected color palette. Photo by Emily Minton RedfieldDesigner Nadia Watts founded her eponymous Denver design firm in 2009, and since then she’s become known for her artful—and often colorful—approach to interiors. The great, great granddaughter of Louis Comfort Tiffany and a former assistant to a curator at The Metropolitan Museum of Art, Watts has a special appreciation for the decorative arts and is able to give her client’s collections of art and furnishings the showcase they deserve. In addition to working with clients across the country, Watts recently launched a fabric collection with Kravet and designed a jewel-inspired space for the 2024 Kips Bay Palm Beach Showhouse.Inside StoriesA custom fireplace with walnut panels is the focal point of an Aspen home by Inside Stories. A piece by artist Trevor Kiernander is on display alongside swivel chairs by A. Rudin and a leather ottoman by Lee Industries. Photo by Eric LuceroDenver’s Inside Stories combines the capabilities of a large design firm with the hands-on approach of a smaller studio, giving clients the best of both worlds. Led by designer Miranda Cullen, the company tackles projects of all scopes, from paint consultations to complete redesigns, as well as commercial and hospitality designs. For clients looking for white-glove service, Inside Stories has a Residential X team that handles luxury projects like new builds and full-home renovations. Cullen and her team aren’t afraid of making bold moves in their designs, which showcase a mix of styles from midcentury-modern to rustic.Kristin Dittmar DesignKristin Dittmar Design devised a warm and moody primary bathroom for a home in Aspen. Herringbone marble tile lines the floor, while the vanity showcases warm walnut accents. Photo courtesy of Kristin Dittmar DesignEarthy elements and streamlined details blend beautifully in the work of Aspen’s Kristin Dittmar Design. The firm brings its signature mountain modern style to homes across the country, showcasing the natural beauty of each location with rugged stonework, warm wood accents, and perfectly framed views. Whether they’re designing a retreat in the Rockies or modernizing a 19th-century Victorian, Dittmar and her team are hands-on during each phase of a project, making sure that every space shows exacting attention to detail.Susannah Holmberg StudiosFor the foyer of a Chicago carriage house, Susannah Holmberg Studios used wallpaper, art, and color to create a layered entryway. Ryan McDonald. Stylist: Kimberly SwedeliusWhether it’s in a desert retreat or a storied Tudor house, Salt Lake City’s Susannah Holmberg Studios knows how to set a mood. The firm’s stylish spaces balance beauty and livability, and showcase the client’s personality with unique color palettes, curated art, and iconic design pieces. While they specialize in full-home renovations and new construction, Holmerg and her team work on residential and commercial projects across the country, tailoring the designs to each client, as well as the geographic and architectural settings.Margarita BravoFor a whole-home project in Denver’s LoHi district, Bravo drew inspiration from her client’s adventurous spirit and love of unique design, incorporating a mix of colors, patterns, and textures to create a sophisticated and dynamic space. Photo courtesy of Margarita BravoDesigner Margarita Bravo’s projects are as far-flung as her inspirations. Her eponymous firm is headquartered in Denver and has outposts in Miami, Montecito, Aspen, and Barcelona. Bringing in influences from European and Latin American design, Bravo masterfully mixes natural elements, streamlined furnishings, metallic accents, and delightful patterns in her projects, which range from mountain homes to beachfront condos. The designer is also behind Sorella Furniture, which she created with her sister Maria, and MB Home Collection.Ashley Campbell Interior DesignAshley Campbell Interior Design turned the lower level of a new build in Denver into a party-ready space with a wet bar and a custom concrete coffee table. Photo by Meagan Larsen PhotographyDenver designer Ashley Campbell puts a contemporary twist on mountain style, contrasting natural elements with streamlined furnishings, a crisp black-and-white palette, and minimalist lighting and fireplaces. These sophisticated spaces serve as striking backdrops for her clients’ collections of art and artifacts, and Campbell balances contemporary elements with plenty of texture to bring in a sense of warmth. The firm uses the latest technology to realize its designs, giving clients the full picture of the team’s creative vision.ArchitectsCharles Cunniffe Architects & InteriorsIn the great room of an Aspen, Colorado, home, Charles Cunniffe Architects perfectly framed the mountain views in a seating area. Photo by Aaron LeitzScenic views are treated like works of art in the homes designed by Charles Cunniffe Architects & Interiors. The Aspen, Colorado–based firm has been creating residential, commercial, and institutional structures for over 40 years. They bring a dedication to sustainability and innovation to each project, incorporating innovative materials and energy-efficient systems for spaces that enhance their occupant’s well-being. A project’s context is a driving force in the creative process, and CCA expertly incorporates nature into the design.CLB ArchitectsSituated in the heart of Moonlight Basin in Big Sky, Montana, CLB Architects’ Basecamp residence rises into the dense fir and pine trees, offering a close connection to the natural environment. Photo by Kevin ScottNature isn’t just an inspiration for the work of CLB Architects, it’s an integral part of each design. The cross-disciplinary design studio, which has offices in Jackson, Wyoming, and Bozeman, Montana, takes a site-specific approach and lets the surroundings inform each detail. The firm works on projects across the country and internationally, each rooted in context, whether it’s a ski-in, ski-out mountain retreat or an Upper East Side apartment.Forum Phi Architecture and Interior DesignBlending seamlessly with its surroundings, this home by Forum Phi Architecture + Interior Design pairs rustic textures with modern lines—capturing the spirit of the landscape through thoughtful design. Photo by Dallas & Harris PhotographyForum Phi Architecture and Interior Design brings architecture, interior design, and land planning together under one roof, allowing the team to work collaboratively with clients on all aspects of a project. The resulting structures showcase the beauty of the natural world. With offices in Aspen, Denver, and Carbondale, the team works on residential, commercial, and institutional projects in a wide range of locations and styles, from rustic ranches to historic renovations to modern mountain retreats.CCY ArchitectsClad in stone, wood, steel, and glass, a home by CCY Architects nestles quietly within the natural surroundings of Aspen, Colorado, creating a rugged and durable contemporary interpretation of alpine architecture. Photo by Draper WhiteThe American West and its striking landscapes inspire CCY Architects’ regional modernism. The Colorado architecture and design firm seeks to develop a deep connection to nature and community through its work—whether its residential, commercial, or institutional—and makes sustainability a priority. Cross-disciplinary collaboration is at the heart of the firm’s process, and the team immerses itself in the site, ensuring that the final design is rooted in place.Vera Iconica ArchitectureVera Iconica Architecture was inspired by the Japanese concept of ma, or “the space between,” when designing this Shooting Star sanctuary at the base of the Jackson Hole Resort. A series of small view courtyards are carved out of the massing, giving moments for pause and reflection offset with views of woods, streams, and the majestic Tetons. Photo by Blok StudiosFor Vera Iconica Architecture, architecture and wellness go hand in hand. The firm’s evidence-based approach prioritizes the health and well-being of a client, resulting in spaces that feel restorative and connected to nature. The team finds inspiration in the landscape of the West, incorporating natural materials and sustainable building practices. With offices in Jackson, Wyoming; Denver, Colorado; and Park City, Utah, Vera Iconica Architecture designs globally, working on residential and hospitality projects from Hong Kong to South Dakota to Peru.Landscape ArchitectsStudio CampoStudio Campo devised a three-acre farm and homestead in Portland, Oregon, with stylist Emily Henderson. The property is complete with a seating area, plunge pool, raised beds, and a greenhouse workout facility. Photo by Kaitlin GreenLandscape architecture firm Studio Campo creates outdoor spaces that enhance the ecosystem and the lives of those who enjoy them. Led by founding principal Cali Pfaff, the firm has a naturalistic style and a focus on both placemaking and biodiversity, highlighting native species in its work. Based in Denver and Oregon’s Willamette Valley, Studio Campo works on a wide range of landscape projects, including gardens, public spaces, farms, and habitats.BuildersVitruvius BuiltVitruvius Built collaborated with designer Barclay Butera on a sophisticated Deer Valley mountain retreat that blends rustic charm with modern elegance. Photo by Cristina ZolotaiaFounded by Charles Ochello, Park City, Utah–based Vitruvius Built specializes in luxury construction, realizing even the most ambitious designs. The homes, located across the country, feature the highest quality materials and amenities such speakeasy-style golf suites, entertainment floors, and cozy bunk rooms. From a contemporary A-frame style residence to a mountain retreat made for entertaining, the homes in the firm’s portfolio showcase its ability to harness the latest technology to craft personal sanctuaries.Cadre General ContractorsEast Coast meets Colorado in this home constructed by Cadre General Contractors that blends traditional sophistication with a rich, Western aesthetic. Photo courtesy of Cadre General ContractorsCadre General Contractors has been building custom homes in Colorado for nearly 30 years and its decades of experience shows in its extensive portfolio. The contracting firm works in a wide range of styles from traditional to contemporary, collaborating closely with architects and designers to bring the overall vision to life. Cadre prides itself on its ability to execute ambitious designs while maintaining an exacting attention to detail and quality.The Jackson Home CompanyWithin a newly constructed home by The Jackson Home Company, the expansive great room, with its vaulted ceilings, exposed steel beams, and grand stone fireplace, is framed by floor-to-ceiling windows showcasing breathtaking views of the Teton Range. Photo by David AgnelloThe Jackson Home Company channels the rugged beauty of Jackson Hole, Wyoming, into striking mountain homes. In 2019, Brooklyn Home Company founders Bill Caleo, Lyndsay Caleo Karol, and Fitzhugh Karol expanded west to Wyoming, and since then the division has designed and built over 20 luxury single-family homes, including a 6,414-square-foot ski-in/ski-out home in Teton Village and an artful retreat nestled beside an Aspen grove. The firm prioritizes sustainability in its homes, incorporating elements like green roofs and locally sourced materials.APPLY NOWGrow your business with the AD PRO DirectoryArrowAre you looking for an interior decorator or designer to hire for your next project? Wherever you are, visit the AD PRO Directory to browse our list of AD-approved designers and find your match for a design consultation. #rocky #mountain #region #interior #designers
    WWW.ARCHITECTURALDIGEST.COM
    Rocky Mountain Region Interior Designers, Architects, and Builders to Know From the AD PRO Directory
    Rocky Mountain region interior designers, architects, builders, and landscape architects have a bounty of inspiration right outside their doors. Accordingly, their work reflects the beauty of the natural world. The region’s design and construction talents have the ability to bring the surrounding landscape into projects of all types, from modern mountain homes to urban apartments and town houses. If you’re ready to start a project, these AD-approved Rocky Mountain region interior designers, architects, builders, and landscape architects should be your first call.On the listInterior DesignersAshley Scheidel Design StudioAshley Scheidel Design Studio let the natural beauty of the materials take center stage in a Denver home’s tranquil bedroom. Photo by Jess Blackwell PhotographySustainability is a driving force in interiors by Ashley Scheidel Design Studio. The Denver-based interior architecture and design firm specializes in new construction and renovations. Whether they are helping clients reimagine their existing spaces or building new ones from scratch, Scheidel and her team focus on creating timeless environments that balance livability and easygoing elegance. The client’s personal style also drives the design, but natural materials such as warm woods and rugged stone feature prominently in the firm’s portfolio.Beaumier InteriorsIn a renovated midcentury brick ranch home in Denver, Beaumier Interiors balanced warmth and restraint through the use of soft textures, sculptural forms, and quiet tones. The resulting space feels both grounded and welcoming. Photo by Jess BlackwellAfter earning her stripes working for several leading firms in Chicago, designer Ashley Beaumier brought her signature organic modern style to the Denver area, where she founded her eponymous firm. Beaumier Interiors crafts polished interiors, which are layered with natural materials, including striking stone, pale linens, and warm woods. The full-service firm works with clients on projects of all sizes, including large renovations and new constructions, and guides each project from start to finish, ensuring a cohesive look throughout the entire home.Elizabeth Stanley DesignCurated vintage furnishings and lighting by Elizabeth Stanley Design softens the concrete architectural rigor of this austere Austin home. Photo by Shade DeggesFor nearly 20 years, contemporary and minimalist houses have been transformed into welcoming, character-filled homes at the hands of designer Elizabeth Stanley and her eponymous firm. The Aspen, Colorado–based studio focuses on bringing its clients’ personal style to the fore as it guides them through the design process. The resulting tranquil spaces balance functionality and aesthetics and incorporate statement furnishings, natural materials, graphic art, and rich textures.Donna Mondi Interior DesignIn a Michigan living room by Donna Mondi Interior Design, sculptural seating and a floating concrete fireplace strike a confident balance between softness and strength. Cascading fiber art adds an unexpected edge. Photo by Dustin Halleck; Styled by Darwin FitzKnown for her ability to mix traditional and modern design into soulful spaces, designer Donna Mondi has been transforming everything from city penthouses to country estates to desert retreats for almost 25 years. With offices in Denver and Chicago, Donna Mondi Interior Design works on high-end projects across the country, including renovations, new construction, and furnishings. The firm specializes in crafting architecturally driven designs that expertly balance luxury and comfort.Dream Homes Inc.In a Denver home, Dream Homes Inc. moved and redesigned the fireplace with a chevron-patterned Italian granite surround. Photo by David Patterson PhotographySpecializing in large-scale renovations, Denver-based Dream Homes Inc. has been transforming homes in the Rocky Mountain region and nationwide since 1999. Led by founder Joyce Clegg, the interior architecture and design firm is known for its expertly planned and personality-filled residences. Dream Homes oversees every aspect of the construction process, and also works on kitchen and bath remodels. Notably, accessibility and aging is at the forefront of its place design.Duet Design GroupIn a historic Denver neighborhood, Duet Design created a cozy family home in a 1937 Tudor. The original architecture’s charm is elevated with inherited art, classic and modern pieces, and vintage finds. Photo by David PattersonWhether designing an updated log cabin, a historic Tudor home, or a contemporary Mexican beach retreat, Denver-based Duet Design Group has an uncanny ability to bring the beauty of a home’s natural surroundings indoors. Led by founder and principal Devon Tobin, the firm works with clients on residential projects, including renovations and new construction, as well as commercial spaces. While the firm is known for its collaborative process, clients can also expect every logistical detail to be taken care of for a stress-free experience.Jede InteriorsBeauty and functionality meet in this polished Orem, Utah, kitchen designed by Jede Interiors. Photo by Camilia LundNeutral hues and natural materials contribute to the calming, timeless homes created by Orem, Utah–based Jede Interiors. Led by principal designer Jen Dean, the firm is known for its fresh take on traditional style, combining comfortable furnishings with vintage pieces that add patina and history. Jede Interiors works to make every space feel authentic to the clients who live in it—it services those based locally and across the country.Bowen Design StudioThe Red Rocks of Southern Utah were the inspiration for the dining area’s cabinet color, adding a playful yet sophisticated design element. Photo by Lacey Alexander PhotographyBuilding a new home can bring a daunting number of decisions, which is where Bowen Design Studio comes in. Led by designer Hailey Brodale, the Saint George, Utah–based firm specializes in helping clients make their custom homes feel truly personal. Whether it’s devising an organic desert retreat or a dramatic mountain home, Bowen Design Studio takes a hands-on approach throughout the construction process, making sure that the end result is exactly what the client envisioned.Lund Haus StudioFor a mountain home, Lund Haus Studio incorporated thoughtful organization solutions to enhance functionality and ease of living, as well as textures and materials inspired by the raw beauty of nature. Photo by Rebekah WestoverSalt Lake City, Utah–based Lund Haus Studio designs joyful homes that truly work. The firm focuses on functionality, adding creative storage solutions and crafting layouts optimized for family life. Principal designer and professional organizer Sam Lund draws on her background in psychology as she works with clients, helping them express their needs and visions for their homes, and the team boasts extensive experience with construction, allowing the firm to expertly manage projects from start to finish.Eider InteriorsA book-matched stone fireplace is a focal point in the living area of an Eider Interiors–designed contemporary home overlooking the Salt Lake City Valley. Photo by Christina Zolotaia PhotographyA clients’ story is at the heart of every space that Bluffdale, Utah–based Eider Interiors creates. Led by founder and principal designer Mallory Bouchard, the residential and commercial design studio is known for its contemporary interiors that balance modern details with elements of warmth and texture. Eider Interiors works on a wide range of projects, from a modern Miami apartment to a nature-inspired desert escape to a luxurious RV.The FlairhunterHigh on the ski runs of Park City, this custom bunk room was designed by The Flairhunter to comfortably accommodate adults and/or kids. Crafted from reclaimed barn wood, it features pops of color in the bedding and accessories to add an element of freshness and fun. Photo by Doug Burke; Styling by Jen PaulInterior design firm The Flairhunter isn’t afraid to make a statement, incorporating bold colors, unique elements, and eye-catching artwork. Founder Stephanie Hunt leads a team of ten across the firm’s outposts in Salt Lake City and Southern California, and the firm works on projects throughout the United States and globally. The Flairhunter balances custom furnishings with vintage pieces and adds energy and personality by mixing colors, patterns, and materials.DwellifyCheckered floors, butcher block countertops, and vintage finishes revived the kitchen of this 100-year-old home updated by Dwellify. Photo by Katie Griffith PhotographyDwellify streamlines the remodeling process, letting homeowners easily choose a design that fits their personal aesthetic and budget constraints. The company’s technology helps clients visualize their future spaces, and the process also includes virtual meetings with designers and Design Boxes of physical samples. The Salt Lake City–based company works remotely with clients across the country, pairing them with a remodel coordinator and a network of carefully vetted pros to help get the job done.Studio EckströmStudio Eckström revives the living room of a 1927 Spanish Colonial Revival in Omaha. Photo by Daniel Johnson PhotographyDesigners Mark and Mikal Eckstrom bring a sense of whimsy and fun to the interiors they create with their Omaha, Nebraska–based firm, Studio Eckström. Unique details abound in the firm’s projects, from fanciful ironwork to bold wall treatments to unexpected color palettes, and the team isn’t afraid to push clients out of their comfort zones. Studio Eckström relies on a trusted roster of artisans, gallerists, and dealers to help them make each home one of a kind.Trove HomesDrawing inspiration from the breathtaking lake views, Trove Home’s design for a Lake Quivira kitchen features a custom curved island leg—an homage to the natural, flowing beauty of the water. Photo by Nate Sheets PhotographyWith a portfolio full of dramatic before and afters, it’s obvious that Kansas City, Kansas–based firm Trove Homes knows how to completely reinvent a home to fit its clients’ personal styles. Co-owners Jessica and Nate White lead clients through every decision, ensuring that the finished space balances livability and sophistication. Whether tackling a renovation or starting from the ground up with a new build, the firm works in an array of aesthetics, from traditional to coastal.Emily Tucker DesignEmily Tucker Design updated a historic Denver Tudor for a young family, maintaining the history of the home while giving the furnishings a more youthful feel. Photo by David LauerBased in Boulder, Colorado, Emily Tucker Design is a full-service firm helping clients across the country create personalized and highly curated residences. Tucker and her team work in a variety of styles, from modern mountain homes to historical residences, adding unexpected touches, including bold color palettes, playful patterns, and dazzling art. The firm prides itself on designing livable spaces, so it’s no wonder it has become a go-to for families looking for stylish yet durable interiors. Emily Tucker Design works on projects of a variety of scopes, including gut renovations, full home design, and new construction.Nadia Watts Interior DesignNadia Watts Interior Design created a bold dining room in a Denver home. Katie Ridder’s Pagoda wallpaper inspired the room’s unexpected color palette. Photo by Emily Minton RedfieldDesigner Nadia Watts founded her eponymous Denver design firm in 2009, and since then she’s become known for her artful—and often colorful—approach to interiors. The great, great granddaughter of Louis Comfort Tiffany and a former assistant to a curator at The Metropolitan Museum of Art, Watts has a special appreciation for the decorative arts and is able to give her client’s collections of art and furnishings the showcase they deserve. In addition to working with clients across the country, Watts recently launched a fabric collection with Kravet and designed a jewel-inspired space for the 2024 Kips Bay Palm Beach Showhouse.Inside StoriesA custom fireplace with walnut panels is the focal point of an Aspen home by Inside Stories. A piece by artist Trevor Kiernander is on display alongside swivel chairs by A. Rudin and a leather ottoman by Lee Industries. Photo by Eric LuceroDenver’s Inside Stories combines the capabilities of a large design firm with the hands-on approach of a smaller studio, giving clients the best of both worlds. Led by designer Miranda Cullen, the company tackles projects of all scopes, from paint consultations to complete redesigns, as well as commercial and hospitality designs. For clients looking for white-glove service, Inside Stories has a Residential X team that handles luxury projects like new builds and full-home renovations. Cullen and her team aren’t afraid of making bold moves in their designs, which showcase a mix of styles from midcentury-modern to rustic.Kristin Dittmar DesignKristin Dittmar Design devised a warm and moody primary bathroom for a home in Aspen. Herringbone marble tile lines the floor, while the vanity showcases warm walnut accents. Photo courtesy of Kristin Dittmar DesignEarthy elements and streamlined details blend beautifully in the work of Aspen’s Kristin Dittmar Design. The firm brings its signature mountain modern style to homes across the country, showcasing the natural beauty of each location with rugged stonework, warm wood accents, and perfectly framed views. Whether they’re designing a retreat in the Rockies or modernizing a 19th-century Victorian, Dittmar and her team are hands-on during each phase of a project, making sure that every space shows exacting attention to detail.Susannah Holmberg StudiosFor the foyer of a Chicago carriage house, Susannah Holmberg Studios used wallpaper, art, and color to create a layered entryway. Ryan McDonald. Stylist: Kimberly SwedeliusWhether it’s in a desert retreat or a storied Tudor house, Salt Lake City’s Susannah Holmberg Studios knows how to set a mood. The firm’s stylish spaces balance beauty and livability, and showcase the client’s personality with unique color palettes, curated art, and iconic design pieces. While they specialize in full-home renovations and new construction, Holmerg and her team work on residential and commercial projects across the country, tailoring the designs to each client, as well as the geographic and architectural settings.Margarita BravoFor a whole-home project in Denver’s LoHi district, Bravo drew inspiration from her client’s adventurous spirit and love of unique design, incorporating a mix of colors, patterns, and textures to create a sophisticated and dynamic space. Photo courtesy of Margarita BravoDesigner Margarita Bravo’s projects are as far-flung as her inspirations. Her eponymous firm is headquartered in Denver and has outposts in Miami, Montecito, Aspen, and Barcelona. Bringing in influences from European and Latin American design, Bravo masterfully mixes natural elements, streamlined furnishings, metallic accents, and delightful patterns in her projects, which range from mountain homes to beachfront condos. The designer is also behind Sorella Furniture, which she created with her sister Maria, and MB Home Collection.Ashley Campbell Interior DesignAshley Campbell Interior Design turned the lower level of a new build in Denver into a party-ready space with a wet bar and a custom concrete coffee table. Photo by Meagan Larsen PhotographyDenver designer Ashley Campbell puts a contemporary twist on mountain style, contrasting natural elements with streamlined furnishings, a crisp black-and-white palette, and minimalist lighting and fireplaces. These sophisticated spaces serve as striking backdrops for her clients’ collections of art and artifacts, and Campbell balances contemporary elements with plenty of texture to bring in a sense of warmth. The firm uses the latest technology to realize its designs, giving clients the full picture of the team’s creative vision.ArchitectsCharles Cunniffe Architects & InteriorsIn the great room of an Aspen, Colorado, home, Charles Cunniffe Architects perfectly framed the mountain views in a seating area. Photo by Aaron LeitzScenic views are treated like works of art in the homes designed by Charles Cunniffe Architects & Interiors. The Aspen, Colorado–based firm has been creating residential, commercial, and institutional structures for over 40 years. They bring a dedication to sustainability and innovation to each project, incorporating innovative materials and energy-efficient systems for spaces that enhance their occupant’s well-being. A project’s context is a driving force in the creative process, and CCA expertly incorporates nature into the design.CLB ArchitectsSituated in the heart of Moonlight Basin in Big Sky, Montana, CLB Architects’ Basecamp residence rises into the dense fir and pine trees, offering a close connection to the natural environment. Photo by Kevin ScottNature isn’t just an inspiration for the work of CLB Architects, it’s an integral part of each design. The cross-disciplinary design studio, which has offices in Jackson, Wyoming, and Bozeman, Montana, takes a site-specific approach and lets the surroundings inform each detail. The firm works on projects across the country and internationally, each rooted in context, whether it’s a ski-in, ski-out mountain retreat or an Upper East Side apartment.Forum Phi Architecture and Interior DesignBlending seamlessly with its surroundings, this home by Forum Phi Architecture + Interior Design pairs rustic textures with modern lines—capturing the spirit of the landscape through thoughtful design. Photo by Dallas & Harris PhotographyForum Phi Architecture and Interior Design brings architecture, interior design, and land planning together under one roof, allowing the team to work collaboratively with clients on all aspects of a project. The resulting structures showcase the beauty of the natural world. With offices in Aspen, Denver, and Carbondale, the team works on residential, commercial, and institutional projects in a wide range of locations and styles, from rustic ranches to historic renovations to modern mountain retreats.CCY ArchitectsClad in stone, wood, steel, and glass, a home by CCY Architects nestles quietly within the natural surroundings of Aspen, Colorado, creating a rugged and durable contemporary interpretation of alpine architecture. Photo by Draper WhiteThe American West and its striking landscapes inspire CCY Architects’ regional modernism. The Colorado architecture and design firm seeks to develop a deep connection to nature and community through its work—whether its residential, commercial, or institutional—and makes sustainability a priority. Cross-disciplinary collaboration is at the heart of the firm’s process, and the team immerses itself in the site, ensuring that the final design is rooted in place.Vera Iconica ArchitectureVera Iconica Architecture was inspired by the Japanese concept of ma, or “the space between,” when designing this Shooting Star sanctuary at the base of the Jackson Hole Resort. A series of small view courtyards are carved out of the massing, giving moments for pause and reflection offset with views of woods, streams, and the majestic Tetons. Photo by Blok StudiosFor Vera Iconica Architecture, architecture and wellness go hand in hand. The firm’s evidence-based approach prioritizes the health and well-being of a client, resulting in spaces that feel restorative and connected to nature. The team finds inspiration in the landscape of the West, incorporating natural materials and sustainable building practices. With offices in Jackson, Wyoming; Denver, Colorado; and Park City, Utah, Vera Iconica Architecture designs globally, working on residential and hospitality projects from Hong Kong to South Dakota to Peru.Landscape ArchitectsStudio CampoStudio Campo devised a three-acre farm and homestead in Portland, Oregon, with stylist Emily Henderson. The property is complete with a seating area, plunge pool, raised beds, and a greenhouse workout facility. Photo by Kaitlin GreenLandscape architecture firm Studio Campo creates outdoor spaces that enhance the ecosystem and the lives of those who enjoy them. Led by founding principal Cali Pfaff, the firm has a naturalistic style and a focus on both placemaking and biodiversity, highlighting native species in its work. Based in Denver and Oregon’s Willamette Valley, Studio Campo works on a wide range of landscape projects, including gardens, public spaces, farms, and habitats.BuildersVitruvius BuiltVitruvius Built collaborated with designer Barclay Butera on a sophisticated Deer Valley mountain retreat that blends rustic charm with modern elegance. Photo by Cristina ZolotaiaFounded by Charles Ochello, Park City, Utah–based Vitruvius Built specializes in luxury construction, realizing even the most ambitious designs. The homes, located across the country, feature the highest quality materials and amenities such speakeasy-style golf suites, entertainment floors, and cozy bunk rooms. From a contemporary A-frame style residence to a mountain retreat made for entertaining, the homes in the firm’s portfolio showcase its ability to harness the latest technology to craft personal sanctuaries.Cadre General ContractorsEast Coast meets Colorado in this home constructed by Cadre General Contractors that blends traditional sophistication with a rich, Western aesthetic. Photo courtesy of Cadre General ContractorsCadre General Contractors has been building custom homes in Colorado for nearly 30 years and its decades of experience shows in its extensive portfolio. The contracting firm works in a wide range of styles from traditional to contemporary, collaborating closely with architects and designers to bring the overall vision to life. Cadre prides itself on its ability to execute ambitious designs while maintaining an exacting attention to detail and quality.The Jackson Home CompanyWithin a newly constructed home by The Jackson Home Company, the expansive great room, with its vaulted ceilings, exposed steel beams, and grand stone fireplace, is framed by floor-to-ceiling windows showcasing breathtaking views of the Teton Range. Photo by David AgnelloThe Jackson Home Company channels the rugged beauty of Jackson Hole, Wyoming, into striking mountain homes. In 2019, Brooklyn Home Company founders Bill Caleo, Lyndsay Caleo Karol, and Fitzhugh Karol expanded west to Wyoming, and since then the division has designed and built over 20 luxury single-family homes, including a 6,414-square-foot ski-in/ski-out home in Teton Village and an artful retreat nestled beside an Aspen grove. The firm prioritizes sustainability in its homes, incorporating elements like green roofs and locally sourced materials.APPLY NOWGrow your business with the AD PRO DirectoryArrowAre you looking for an interior decorator or designer to hire for your next project? Wherever you are, visit the AD PRO Directory to browse our list of AD-approved designers and find your match for a design consultation.
    0 Yorumlar 0 hisse senetleri 0 önizleme
  • 12 famous women who served in the military

    Women have been an important part of the armed services since the beginning, with icons like Harriet Tubman participating in the Civil War. While being female in a traditionally male-dominated space hasn't always been easy, these women have still served their countries.In 2023, the US Department of Defense reported that the percentage of women serving in active and reserve capacities was growing. In 2022, 17.5% of active-duty roles and 21.6% of the National Guard and reserves were women, up slightly from the year before, it reported, citing the 2022 Demographics Profile of the Military Community.On Memorial Day this year, here are 12 famous women who have served in the military around the world, including Bea Arthur, Queen Elizabeth, and more.

    Harriet Tubman was a military leader and Union spy during the Civil War.

    Harriet Tubman.

    MPI/Getty Images

    Most know Harriet Tubman for her groundbreaking work with the Underground Railroad and, later, as an abolitionist, but as National Geographic reported, Tubman was also an integral part of the Civil War.In 1863, Tubman and Colonel James Montgomery led a group of soldiers in freeing slaves from plantations in South Carolina, making Tubman the first woman in US history to lead a military expedition, according to National Geographic.Her work continued as a spy and recruiter for the Union Army. This operation was so covert that only President Lincoln knew about it.Tubman received compensation for her military contributions decades later, in 1899. Thomas B. Allen, the author of "Harriet Tubman, Secret Agent," called Tubman "one of the great heroines of the Civil War."

    Queen Elizabeth was a military truck driver during World War II.

    Queen Elizabeth outside a first aid truck during World War II.

    Keystone/Getty Images

    Queen Elizabeth was only 18 years old when she begged her father, King George VI, to take part in helping out during World War II. She joined the Women's Auxiliary Territorial Service in England that same year and was known as "Second Subaltern Elizabeth Windsor," according to the National Archives.While serving, the young queen drove military trucks and trained as a mechanic, making her, to this day, the only female member of the Royal Family to enter the armed forces. 

    NASA's Eileen Collins was one of the first female pilots in the Air Force and in space.

    Eileen Collins.

    NASA

    Eileen Collins broke several barriers during her career: Not only was she NASA's first female shuttle commander, but at 23, she became the Air Force's first female flight instructor, according to the agency.She joined the Air Force in 1978, becoming one of the first four women to go through pilot training at Vance Air Force Base in Enid, Oklahoma. She wrote in Time, "The Air Force was testing whether women could succeed as military pilots. We obviously were living in a fishbowl — everyone knew who we were, our personal business, our test scores and our flight performance. My philosophy was to be the best pilot I could be."Her military training directly led her to test-pilot school, where she "knew" she would go on to be the first female space shuttle pilot — and succeeded in doing so.  

    "Golden Girl" Bea Arthur was one of the first members of the Marine Corps Women's Reserve.

    Bea Arthur.

    Lennox McLendon/AP Photo

    Before she was Dorothy Zbornak on "The Golden Girls," Emmy Award-winning actor Bea Arthur was a Marine.As reported by The Daily Beast, Arthur enlisted in the Women's Reserve when she was 21 years old. She first served as a typist and truck driver. She worked her way up to staff sergeant and was honorably discharged in 1945. Official documents show that Arthur's supervisors thought she was "argumentative," which is not a far cry from the feisty persona she became known for on both "The Golden Girls" and "Maude."

    "Stranger Things" actor Jennifer Marshall served in the US Navy for five years.

    Jennifer Marshall as Susan Hargrove on "Stranger Things."

    Netflix

    Before Jennifer Marshall scored the role of Susan Hargrove on Netflix's hit show "Stranger Things," she served in the United States Navy from ages 17 to 22. According to Marshall's website, during her service, she was a forklift operator, aircraft handler, and logistics specialist. She also worked for the USS Theodore Roosevelt's Sexual Assault Victim Interventionprogram. Marshall was awarded many honors and medals for her time in the Navy. Now, in addition to acting, she works with Pin-Ups For Vets, a nonprofit organization that aids hospitalized veterans and deployed troops.

    Food Network star Sunny Anderson was in the Air Force.

    Sunny Anderson.

    Jim Spellman/Getty Images

    Anderson, who hosts "The Kitchen," "Cooking for Real," and "Home Made in America," grew up around the military because of her parents. As an adult, she enlisted in the US Air Force as a radio broadcaster and journalist, working in Seoul, South Korea, and in San Antonio. "I knew that there were radio stations, television stations, newspapers, and magazines, for the military, by the military, and I wanted to be a part of that," Anderson told ABC News in 2013.She also wanted to train in something that would be useful when she left the military."My transition from the Air Force started before I even got in the Air Force," she said.

    Radio talk show host Robin Quivers was a captain in the Air Force.

    Robin Quivers.

    Walter McBride/WireImage via Getty Images

    Robin Quivers has co-hosted "The Howard Stern Show" for over 30 years, but before that, she served as a captain in the US Air Force.Quivers got her degree in nursing from the University of Maryland and put it to use by joining the military as a second lieutenant after college. She quickly climbed the ranks, and when she was discharged in 1978, her official title was captain, according to Biography.com.She served as a reserve in the Air Force until 1990, per military records, after which she fully pivoted to her career in radio. But Howard Stern hired her for his show in 1981, which means that Quivers — though she was "inactive" — was still technically serving while she was on the air.

    Actor Zulay Henao served in the US Army for three years.

    Zulay Henao.

    JB Lacroix/ Getty Images

    Colombian-American actor Zulay Henao has appeared on the show "Army Wives," but few know that she herself served in the US Army before becoming an actor.Henao enlisted after completing high school and, after three years of serving, went on to enroll at the New York Conservatory for Dramatic Arts.She previously spoke to the paparazzi about her time in the military, saying: "I wouldn't be doing what I'm doing, and I wouldn't have the perspective I have of the world, if it weren't for the Army."

    Olympic medalist Shauna Rohbock was in the National Guard.

    Shauna Rohbock.

    Harry How/Getty Images

    Shauna Rohbock is an Olympic bobsledder and won the silver medal at the 2006 Winter Olympics in Torino, Italy. But before that, according to Team USA, Rohbock joined the Utah Army National Guard and was part of the National Guard Outstanding Athlete Program.

    Olympian Amber English competed while still in the military. She won gold in women's skeet shooting at the 2020 Olympics in Tokyo.

    Amber English at the 2020 Olympics.

    Kevin C. Cox/Getty Images

    At her first Olympics, First Lt. Amber English took gold with an Olympic record score of 56, NBC reported. Technically not yet a veteran, she's a logistics officer and member of the Army Marksmanship Unit, according to Military.com.After English's win, Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin congratulated her on Twitter, now known as X."Your country is extremely proud of you today, and I'm so glad you're representing us," he wrote.She joins an illustrious list of medal winners, both male and female, with military backgrounds.

    "Wonder Woman" Gal Gadot served in the Israel Defense Forces for two years.

    Gal Gadot.

    Dia Dipasupil/Getty Images

    After Gal Gadot was crowned Miss Israel in 2004 and before she became Wonder Woman in 2017, she served her mandatory two years in the IDF. During her assignment, she worked as a "physical fitness specialist," teaching gymnastics and calisthenics to the soldiers, PopSugar reported.Pro-Palestine groups have criticized her service, as well as her support of the Israeli military and cause in social media posts."I think much of it comes from ignorance and people not understanding what most people do in the army in Israel or what I did in the army during my service in the military," she told The Jakarta Post in May 2021. She added, "Being an Israeli and going to the army is an integral thing. It's something you have to do. It's mandatory."

    Ruth Westheimer, better known as the sex therapist Dr. Ruth, trained as a sniper in the IDF.

    Dr. Ruth.

    Donna Svennevik/Walt Disney Television/Getty Images

    Dr. Ruth was a Holocaust survivor, and after World War II ended, she moved as a teenager to what would become Israel. During her time there, she trained as a sniper due to her small size.She told The New Yorker in 2013, "I have no idea what the experience would be if I had to show it. But I was a very good sniper."Melina Glusac contributed to an earlier version of this story.
    #famous #women #who #served #military
    12 famous women who served in the military
    Women have been an important part of the armed services since the beginning, with icons like Harriet Tubman participating in the Civil War. While being female in a traditionally male-dominated space hasn't always been easy, these women have still served their countries.In 2023, the US Department of Defense reported that the percentage of women serving in active and reserve capacities was growing. In 2022, 17.5% of active-duty roles and 21.6% of the National Guard and reserves were women, up slightly from the year before, it reported, citing the 2022 Demographics Profile of the Military Community.On Memorial Day this year, here are 12 famous women who have served in the military around the world, including Bea Arthur, Queen Elizabeth, and more. Harriet Tubman was a military leader and Union spy during the Civil War. Harriet Tubman. MPI/Getty Images Most know Harriet Tubman for her groundbreaking work with the Underground Railroad and, later, as an abolitionist, but as National Geographic reported, Tubman was also an integral part of the Civil War.In 1863, Tubman and Colonel James Montgomery led a group of soldiers in freeing slaves from plantations in South Carolina, making Tubman the first woman in US history to lead a military expedition, according to National Geographic.Her work continued as a spy and recruiter for the Union Army. This operation was so covert that only President Lincoln knew about it.Tubman received compensation for her military contributions decades later, in 1899. Thomas B. Allen, the author of "Harriet Tubman, Secret Agent," called Tubman "one of the great heroines of the Civil War." Queen Elizabeth was a military truck driver during World War II. Queen Elizabeth outside a first aid truck during World War II. Keystone/Getty Images Queen Elizabeth was only 18 years old when she begged her father, King George VI, to take part in helping out during World War II. She joined the Women's Auxiliary Territorial Service in England that same year and was known as "Second Subaltern Elizabeth Windsor," according to the National Archives.While serving, the young queen drove military trucks and trained as a mechanic, making her, to this day, the only female member of the Royal Family to enter the armed forces.  NASA's Eileen Collins was one of the first female pilots in the Air Force and in space. Eileen Collins. NASA Eileen Collins broke several barriers during her career: Not only was she NASA's first female shuttle commander, but at 23, she became the Air Force's first female flight instructor, according to the agency.She joined the Air Force in 1978, becoming one of the first four women to go through pilot training at Vance Air Force Base in Enid, Oklahoma. She wrote in Time, "The Air Force was testing whether women could succeed as military pilots. We obviously were living in a fishbowl — everyone knew who we were, our personal business, our test scores and our flight performance. My philosophy was to be the best pilot I could be."Her military training directly led her to test-pilot school, where she "knew" she would go on to be the first female space shuttle pilot — and succeeded in doing so.   "Golden Girl" Bea Arthur was one of the first members of the Marine Corps Women's Reserve. Bea Arthur. Lennox McLendon/AP Photo Before she was Dorothy Zbornak on "The Golden Girls," Emmy Award-winning actor Bea Arthur was a Marine.As reported by The Daily Beast, Arthur enlisted in the Women's Reserve when she was 21 years old. She first served as a typist and truck driver. She worked her way up to staff sergeant and was honorably discharged in 1945. Official documents show that Arthur's supervisors thought she was "argumentative," which is not a far cry from the feisty persona she became known for on both "The Golden Girls" and "Maude." "Stranger Things" actor Jennifer Marshall served in the US Navy for five years. Jennifer Marshall as Susan Hargrove on "Stranger Things." Netflix Before Jennifer Marshall scored the role of Susan Hargrove on Netflix's hit show "Stranger Things," she served in the United States Navy from ages 17 to 22. According to Marshall's website, during her service, she was a forklift operator, aircraft handler, and logistics specialist. She also worked for the USS Theodore Roosevelt's Sexual Assault Victim Interventionprogram. Marshall was awarded many honors and medals for her time in the Navy. Now, in addition to acting, she works with Pin-Ups For Vets, a nonprofit organization that aids hospitalized veterans and deployed troops. Food Network star Sunny Anderson was in the Air Force. Sunny Anderson. Jim Spellman/Getty Images Anderson, who hosts "The Kitchen," "Cooking for Real," and "Home Made in America," grew up around the military because of her parents. As an adult, she enlisted in the US Air Force as a radio broadcaster and journalist, working in Seoul, South Korea, and in San Antonio. "I knew that there were radio stations, television stations, newspapers, and magazines, for the military, by the military, and I wanted to be a part of that," Anderson told ABC News in 2013.She also wanted to train in something that would be useful when she left the military."My transition from the Air Force started before I even got in the Air Force," she said. Radio talk show host Robin Quivers was a captain in the Air Force. Robin Quivers. Walter McBride/WireImage via Getty Images Robin Quivers has co-hosted "The Howard Stern Show" for over 30 years, but before that, she served as a captain in the US Air Force.Quivers got her degree in nursing from the University of Maryland and put it to use by joining the military as a second lieutenant after college. She quickly climbed the ranks, and when she was discharged in 1978, her official title was captain, according to Biography.com.She served as a reserve in the Air Force until 1990, per military records, after which she fully pivoted to her career in radio. But Howard Stern hired her for his show in 1981, which means that Quivers — though she was "inactive" — was still technically serving while she was on the air. Actor Zulay Henao served in the US Army for three years. Zulay Henao. JB Lacroix/ Getty Images Colombian-American actor Zulay Henao has appeared on the show "Army Wives," but few know that she herself served in the US Army before becoming an actor.Henao enlisted after completing high school and, after three years of serving, went on to enroll at the New York Conservatory for Dramatic Arts.She previously spoke to the paparazzi about her time in the military, saying: "I wouldn't be doing what I'm doing, and I wouldn't have the perspective I have of the world, if it weren't for the Army." Olympic medalist Shauna Rohbock was in the National Guard. Shauna Rohbock. Harry How/Getty Images Shauna Rohbock is an Olympic bobsledder and won the silver medal at the 2006 Winter Olympics in Torino, Italy. But before that, according to Team USA, Rohbock joined the Utah Army National Guard and was part of the National Guard Outstanding Athlete Program. Olympian Amber English competed while still in the military. She won gold in women's skeet shooting at the 2020 Olympics in Tokyo. Amber English at the 2020 Olympics. Kevin C. Cox/Getty Images At her first Olympics, First Lt. Amber English took gold with an Olympic record score of 56, NBC reported. Technically not yet a veteran, she's a logistics officer and member of the Army Marksmanship Unit, according to Military.com.After English's win, Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin congratulated her on Twitter, now known as X."Your country is extremely proud of you today, and I'm so glad you're representing us," he wrote.She joins an illustrious list of medal winners, both male and female, with military backgrounds. "Wonder Woman" Gal Gadot served in the Israel Defense Forces for two years. Gal Gadot. Dia Dipasupil/Getty Images After Gal Gadot was crowned Miss Israel in 2004 and before she became Wonder Woman in 2017, she served her mandatory two years in the IDF. During her assignment, she worked as a "physical fitness specialist," teaching gymnastics and calisthenics to the soldiers, PopSugar reported.Pro-Palestine groups have criticized her service, as well as her support of the Israeli military and cause in social media posts."I think much of it comes from ignorance and people not understanding what most people do in the army in Israel or what I did in the army during my service in the military," she told The Jakarta Post in May 2021. She added, "Being an Israeli and going to the army is an integral thing. It's something you have to do. It's mandatory." Ruth Westheimer, better known as the sex therapist Dr. Ruth, trained as a sniper in the IDF. Dr. Ruth. Donna Svennevik/Walt Disney Television/Getty Images Dr. Ruth was a Holocaust survivor, and after World War II ended, she moved as a teenager to what would become Israel. During her time there, she trained as a sniper due to her small size.She told The New Yorker in 2013, "I have no idea what the experience would be if I had to show it. But I was a very good sniper."Melina Glusac contributed to an earlier version of this story. #famous #women #who #served #military
    WWW.BUSINESSINSIDER.COM
    12 famous women who served in the military
    Women have been an important part of the armed services since the beginning, with icons like Harriet Tubman participating in the Civil War. While being female in a traditionally male-dominated space hasn't always been easy, these women have still served their countries.In 2023, the US Department of Defense reported that the percentage of women serving in active and reserve capacities was growing. In 2022, 17.5% of active-duty roles and 21.6% of the National Guard and reserves were women, up slightly from the year before, it reported, citing the 2022 Demographics Profile of the Military Community.On Memorial Day this year, here are 12 famous women who have served in the military around the world, including Bea Arthur, Queen Elizabeth, and more. Harriet Tubman was a military leader and Union spy during the Civil War. Harriet Tubman. MPI/Getty Images Most know Harriet Tubman for her groundbreaking work with the Underground Railroad and, later, as an abolitionist, but as National Geographic reported, Tubman was also an integral part of the Civil War.In 1863, Tubman and Colonel James Montgomery led a group of soldiers in freeing slaves from plantations in South Carolina, making Tubman the first woman in US history to lead a military expedition, according to National Geographic.Her work continued as a spy and recruiter for the Union Army. This operation was so covert that only President Lincoln knew about it.Tubman received compensation for her military contributions decades later, in 1899. Thomas B. Allen, the author of "Harriet Tubman, Secret Agent," called Tubman "one of the great heroines of the Civil War." Queen Elizabeth was a military truck driver during World War II. Queen Elizabeth outside a first aid truck during World War II. Keystone/Getty Images Queen Elizabeth was only 18 years old when she begged her father, King George VI, to take part in helping out during World War II. She joined the Women's Auxiliary Territorial Service in England that same year and was known as "Second Subaltern Elizabeth Windsor," according to the National Archives.While serving, the young queen drove military trucks and trained as a mechanic, making her, to this day, the only female member of the Royal Family to enter the armed forces.  NASA's Eileen Collins was one of the first female pilots in the Air Force and in space. Eileen Collins. NASA Eileen Collins broke several barriers during her career: Not only was she NASA's first female shuttle commander, but at 23, she became the Air Force's first female flight instructor, according to the agency.She joined the Air Force in 1978, becoming one of the first four women to go through pilot training at Vance Air Force Base in Enid, Oklahoma. She wrote in Time, "The Air Force was testing whether women could succeed as military pilots. We obviously were living in a fishbowl — everyone knew who we were, our personal business, our test scores and our flight performance. My philosophy was to be the best pilot I could be."Her military training directly led her to test-pilot school, where she "knew" she would go on to be the first female space shuttle pilot — and succeeded in doing so.   "Golden Girl" Bea Arthur was one of the first members of the Marine Corps Women's Reserve. Bea Arthur. Lennox McLendon/AP Photo Before she was Dorothy Zbornak on "The Golden Girls," Emmy Award-winning actor Bea Arthur was a Marine.As reported by The Daily Beast, Arthur enlisted in the Women's Reserve when she was 21 years old. She first served as a typist and truck driver. She worked her way up to staff sergeant and was honorably discharged in 1945. Official documents show that Arthur's supervisors thought she was "argumentative," which is not a far cry from the feisty persona she became known for on both "The Golden Girls" and "Maude." "Stranger Things" actor Jennifer Marshall served in the US Navy for five years. Jennifer Marshall as Susan Hargrove on "Stranger Things." Netflix Before Jennifer Marshall scored the role of Susan Hargrove on Netflix's hit show "Stranger Things," she served in the United States Navy from ages 17 to 22. According to Marshall's website, during her service, she was a forklift operator, aircraft handler, and logistics specialist. She also worked for the USS Theodore Roosevelt's Sexual Assault Victim Intervention (SAVI) program. Marshall was awarded many honors and medals for her time in the Navy. Now, in addition to acting, she works with Pin-Ups For Vets, a nonprofit organization that aids hospitalized veterans and deployed troops. Food Network star Sunny Anderson was in the Air Force. Sunny Anderson. Jim Spellman/Getty Images Anderson, who hosts "The Kitchen," "Cooking for Real," and "Home Made in America," grew up around the military because of her parents. As an adult, she enlisted in the US Air Force as a radio broadcaster and journalist, working in Seoul, South Korea, and in San Antonio. "I knew that there were radio stations, television stations, newspapers, and magazines, for the military, by the military, and I wanted to be a part of that," Anderson told ABC News in 2013.She also wanted to train in something that would be useful when she left the military."My transition from the Air Force started before I even got in the Air Force," she said. Radio talk show host Robin Quivers was a captain in the Air Force. Robin Quivers. Walter McBride/WireImage via Getty Images Robin Quivers has co-hosted "The Howard Stern Show" for over 30 years, but before that, she served as a captain in the US Air Force.Quivers got her degree in nursing from the University of Maryland and put it to use by joining the military as a second lieutenant after college. She quickly climbed the ranks, and when she was discharged in 1978, her official title was captain, according to Biography.com.She served as a reserve in the Air Force until 1990, per military records, after which she fully pivoted to her career in radio. But Howard Stern hired her for his show in 1981, which means that Quivers — though she was "inactive" — was still technically serving while she was on the air. Actor Zulay Henao served in the US Army for three years. Zulay Henao. JB Lacroix/ Getty Images Colombian-American actor Zulay Henao has appeared on the show "Army Wives," but few know that she herself served in the US Army before becoming an actor.Henao enlisted after completing high school and, after three years of serving, went on to enroll at the New York Conservatory for Dramatic Arts.She previously spoke to the paparazzi about her time in the military, saying: "I wouldn't be doing what I'm doing, and I wouldn't have the perspective I have of the world, if it weren't for the Army." Olympic medalist Shauna Rohbock was in the National Guard. Shauna Rohbock. Harry How/Getty Images Shauna Rohbock is an Olympic bobsledder and won the silver medal at the 2006 Winter Olympics in Torino, Italy. But before that, according to Team USA, Rohbock joined the Utah Army National Guard and was part of the National Guard Outstanding Athlete Program. Olympian Amber English competed while still in the military. She won gold in women's skeet shooting at the 2020 Olympics in Tokyo. Amber English at the 2020 Olympics. Kevin C. Cox/Getty Images At her first Olympics, First Lt. Amber English took gold with an Olympic record score of 56, NBC reported. Technically not yet a veteran, she's a logistics officer and member of the Army Marksmanship Unit, according to Military.com.After English's win, Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin congratulated her on Twitter, now known as X."Your country is extremely proud of you today, and I'm so glad you're representing us," he wrote.She joins an illustrious list of medal winners, both male and female, with military backgrounds. "Wonder Woman" Gal Gadot served in the Israel Defense Forces for two years. Gal Gadot. Dia Dipasupil/Getty Images After Gal Gadot was crowned Miss Israel in 2004 and before she became Wonder Woman in 2017, she served her mandatory two years in the IDF. During her assignment, she worked as a "physical fitness specialist," teaching gymnastics and calisthenics to the soldiers, PopSugar reported.Pro-Palestine groups have criticized her service, as well as her support of the Israeli military and cause in social media posts."I think much of it comes from ignorance and people not understanding what most people do in the army in Israel or what I did in the army during my service in the military," she told The Jakarta Post in May 2021. She added, "Being an Israeli and going to the army is an integral thing. It's something you have to do. It's mandatory." Ruth Westheimer, better known as the sex therapist Dr. Ruth, trained as a sniper in the IDF. Dr. Ruth. Donna Svennevik/Walt Disney Television/Getty Images Dr. Ruth was a Holocaust survivor, and after World War II ended, she moved as a teenager to what would become Israel. During her time there, she trained as a sniper due to her small size.She told The New Yorker in 2013, "I have no idea what the experience would be if I had to show it. But I was a very good sniper."Melina Glusac contributed to an earlier version of this story.
    0 Yorumlar 0 hisse senetleri 0 önizleme
  • Call of Duty: Black Ops 6 and Warzone Season 04: Full Intel Revealed!

    Old Enemies, New Alliances:
    Black Ops 6 Season 04 is Here!
    Though he once had the chance to end Vikhor “Stitch” Kuzmin’s reign of terror, Adler spared his nemesis after they met at the culmination of Black Ops Cold War. Latest intel reveals Kuzmin was later captured and locked up in an Icelandic CIA black site until he might prove useful. Following the events and evidence uncovered by the deceased CIA Agent Jason Hudson, that day has come, and in an unlikely team up, Adler and team have broken Stitch out from his confinement, seeking his help to crack the codenames needed to find the Pantheon moles.

    With Verdansk once again an area of operations for deployment, what other plans might Stitch have in store? For now, Adler needs him to complete the mission at hand. 

    To succeed, the two must put their past behind them in pursuit of a new goal. Get in on the action when this stacked offering of free and premium content comes to Call of Duty®: Black Ops 6, launching in Season 04 on Thursday, May 29 at 9AM PT across all platforms.
    Nomenclature Note: Throughout the blog, you’ll see references to when gameplay content launches. Here are what these various suffixes mean:

    “Launch”: Expect to access this content immediately at the Season launch
    “Launch Window”: Expect to access this content between launch and up to 72 hours after launch. 
    “In Season”: Expect to access this content during the season, but before either the mid-season or next season arrives.
    “Mid-Season”: Expect to access this content at Mid-Season or later.

    All content timing may be subject to change.

    Multiplayer Content Summary

    Five MP Maps: Drop into Icelandic AOs with three new maps at launch including the Shutdown and Fugitive 6v6 Core maps and the Blitz Strike map. In the mid-season, party it up in Eclipse and play a reimagined Fringe.

    New and Returning Modes: Pick up dog tags to drain the enemy’s reserves in Team Elimination, a fun new twist on the Kill Confirmed formula. Make every bullet count with the return of One in the Chamber and get festive in the Party Ops Limited-Time Mode.

    Additional Equipment: The Grim Reaper Scorestreak returns from the original Black Ops, offering an explosive payload that’s guaranteed to blow the competition sky high.

    Season 04 Ranked Play: Challenge the best of the best, get those wins, and climb the Ranks in a new season of Multiplayer Ranked Play, with all-new rewards and bragging rights.

    ShutdownBrand-New, Core, 6v6, Small-Sized

    Before breaking out Stitch, Adler and team first need to cut off the power to the black site prison, bringing them to a hydroelectric plant built on the rugged volcanic terrain of Iceland. Fight in and around the central building housing the now wrecked Turbine or dive down the Sluice into the Lake, its waters hugging the plant’s south end by the Transformers. Jump up by the red container to target enemies from far out or swim back onshore to reach the Atrium and Parking.
    Head to the north side to fight in the rugged Yard, away from the shoreline and bookended by the Pumphouse and Canteen. It’s a quick run to the Turbine from here, giving you good map coverage down the middle. If things get too hot, you can always drop down the Chute and swim your way to safety. 

    FugitiveBrand-New, Core, 6v6, Medium-Sized

    Deploy to a secret CIA black site in a remote part of Iceland, the very location where Stitch has been imprisoned until Adler brings him in as an unlikely ally for an urgent operation. With the power out, Adler and his crew seize their chance to infiltrate the prison, climbing, zipping, and battling their way through the frozen compound.

    Upon reaching their target, Adler and Stitch strike a deal. Following the jailbreak, the alarms are blaring and warnings of a power failure light up the Cell Block.

    Though the area may appear smaller than expected when first glancing at the minimap, the prison’s intricate layout presents multiple levels and shortcuts to the various outside areas including the Checkpoint, Courtyard, and Recreation Yard. In the upper Cell Block, newly opened cells present the danger of ambush. Be on guard and look for ziplines for quick access to your next target.

    BlitzBrand-New, Strike, 6v6/2v2, Small-Sized

    Traffic comes to a halt as Pantheon reinforcements race toward the prison but get ambushed by the Rogue team. Leave the road and seek out targets over the rugged terrain of the Cliffside or move inland, ambushing enemies at the Waterfall.

    To approach the battle head on, move down the central Bridge, using the scattered convoy for cover. Jump down from the center to move underneath the Bridge, a great means of pivoting to a new location. Though a small map overall, Blitz’s long lanes leave room for marksmen to shine.

    EclipseBrand-New, Strike, 6v6/2v2, Small-Sized

    Stitch and the team arrive in Avalon, slipping into the shadows of an underground nightclub to discuss business. The neon lights flicker as they form a plan to break the Pantheon codenames, but the meeting is cut short when Pantheon agents storm in.
    Show off your best moves on the dance floor, dodging shots and flanking targets down the sides where seating offers party goers a chance to rest and order a drink from the bar. Ambush passing enemies from the DJ booth and then break through the broken façades on the walls, escaping into the halls.

    FringeRemaster, Core, 6v6, Medium-Sized

    Revisit Fringe from Call of Duty: Black Ops 3, reimagined for the first time ever in Black Ops 6. Attend the grand opening of the Rolling Hills distillery, established in an idyllic setting with several navigable buildings and the surrounding grounds. Battle along the main Road or dive into the Bar for a closer fight. Watch for sharpshooters in the upper Barn and along the Bridge and relive the thrill of trying to make it out alive through the narrow Loading route.

    The first half of Season 04 brings two exciting Multiplayer modes: Team Elimination and One in the Chamber. In the mid-season, loosen up in the Party Ops Limited Time Mode.

    Team EliminationIn this twist on Kill Confirmed, two teams are given a limited amount of lives each round as they fight to be the last surviving team. Players drop a dog tag on death that can be picked up by the enemy to confirm the kill or by a teammate to deny the opposing team. Survive longer than the other team or hold the most remaining lives when the timer ends to win the round.
    Balance aggression and defense as you seek out enemy dog tags while preserving your life. Dig in with your teammates to counter enemy attacks and then ask for cover while you collect the droppings. Picking up tags is a great way to earn your next Scorestreak, so stay aggressive and keep up the momentum. Once your team’s life pool is drained, your remaining teammates can still revive you where you were last killed in a last-ditch effort to snatch victory from the jaws of defeat.

    One in the ChamberAnother Black Ops fan-favorite mode returns as One in the Chamber shows up in Season 04! In this free-for-all mode, each Operator is given one pistol, one bullet, a knife, and three lives. Precision is king, as bullets always eliminate on impact and the only way to earn another bullet is to get an elimination.

    Stay cool, aim true, and preserve your lives while aiming for the highest score. UAV scans keep the action moving, so don’t try to hide. At the end of the match, the top three scoring Operators will step up to the Winner’s Circle.

    Party OpsGet the party started with a new Limited-Time Mode arriving later in the season: Compete in a randomized set of party themed minigames. The player with the highest score at the end of the match wins it all.
    The devastating Grim Reaper Scorestreak is back from the original Black Ops, unleashing massive hits on other Operators and Scorestreaks alike.
    New Scorestreak
    Scorestreak: Grim ReaperType: Lethal
    Score: 725
    Mastery Badges: Yes

    Powerful semi-automatic launcher that can fire up to four rockets in one load.
    Wield the Grim Reaper, a quad tube loaded Launcher capable of inflicting heavy damage on enemies. Whether targeting Operators or locking on to enemy Scorestreaks, the Grim Reaper’s payload delivers a huge explosion. The weapon is lost if you’re taken out, so save it for the right moment and bring backup to ensure you have the protection needed to unleash havoc. 
    Season 04 Ranked Play Overview

    Prove you’re the very best by dedicating your Multiplayer match time to Ranked Play, using the same settings, maps, modes, and weapon restrictions used by the Call of Duty League™. Win matches to earn SRand progress through the Ranks while earning career rewards like Rank Skins and Win Challenge rewards.
    As usual, match wins ensure you progress through the Ranks throughout Season 04 to earn new seasonal rewards like a new Pro Issue Weapon Blueprint, Rank-themed Calling Cards, Ranked Charms, and more:
    Season 04 Ranked Play Rewards

    Get 10 Wins: “Pro Reissue AMES 85” AMES 85 Weapon Blueprint
    Get 100 Wins: “Ranked Season 4 – 100 Wins” Large Decal
    Silver: “Ranked Season 4 – Silver” Calling Card
    Gold: “Ranked Season 4 – Gold” Calling Card and Charm
    Platinum: “Ranked Season 4 – Platinum” Calling Card and Charm
    Diamond: “Ranked Season 4 – Diamond” Calling Card and Charm
    Crimson: “Ranked Season 4 – Crimson” Calling Card and Charm
    Iridescent: “Ranked Season 4 – Iridescent” Calling Card and Charm
    Top 250: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250” Calling Card and Charm
    Season 04 Champion: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250 Champion” Calling Card

    Note: Multiplayer Events: Check the General section later in this blog to uncover the full complement of events for this mode across Season 04.

    Zombies Content Summary

    Grief Returns! Drop into this epic 4v4 competitive battle on all maps, outlasting the opposition while securing Capture Zones to debuff and Grief your opponents. The last team still standing wins!

    Additional Gameplay Content: Crack open the armored undead and create area-of-effect explosions with the Shatter Blast Ammo Mod, chew over the impressive effects of three new GobbleGums, and create even bigger explosions with the Grim Reaper Support launcher.

    New Modes and More: Unlock hidden rewards with more Dark Ops Challenges, then prepare to face down a powered-up Abomination, survive as long as you can in the Starting Room LTM, and prove your Leaderboard worth by zombie slaying for bragging rights and rewards!

    4v4 competitive mode where two teams outwit and outlast each other. Capture zones to debuff enemies. No damage against other players. Respawns every third round.
    Available Maps: Liberty Falls, Terminus, Citadelle des Morts, The Tomb, Shattered Veil.
    Restricted: Wonder Weapons, GobbleGums: Exit Strategy, Idle Eyes, Wonderbar!, Time Out, and Flavor Hex. 
    Not seen since Black Ops 2, Grief returns to Zombies! This fan-favorite mode pits two teams of four against each other, with both sides vying to out-survive the other. As the battlelines are drawn between S.A.M. and Director Richtofen, each team pledges their support to one of these rivals at the start of a match, subsequently receiving handler comms support from one of them throughout the ensuing chaos.
    Indirect PvP Combat
    The action is almost immediate as both teams drop into either side of the same Grief Arena within the chosen Zombies map, and indirect PvP combat comes into effect: The two teams of four players can’t outright kill members of the enemy team, but can interact with them by body-blocking, or slowing them  by using melee, bullet-based weapons, or projectiles. 
    Victory Conditions: The winning team is the one that manages to “Grief” their rivals into being killed or entering a downed state. As long as one or more team members are upright, the match continues!
    Grief Arena Features

    The action is constant and can get incredibly chaotic, due in part to your proximity to your opponents and the hordes of undead encroaching on your team, thanks to the Arena being a sub-section of the main Zombies map. These are known as “Grief Arenas.” Within a Grief Arena are a variety of features:
    An Open Environment: Grief Arenas are clearly defined areas where any critical doors have already been opened, and the power will already have been turned on. All other Door Buys are inactive. Both teams spawn on opposite sides of the Arena, each in a group of four.
    Player Respawning: Any team members that are downed – provided one or more of their team are still alive – can be revived at any time, though rival teams, undead enemies, and Shock Charges can hamper this action! Additionally, a Wave Respawner triggers every third round, automatically reviving any eliminated teammates from both teams.
    Join In Progress: Any player not in the game can join up until Round 10 has been completed and has a small grace period to orient themselves before they’re swarmed by zombies. Additionally, if a team has won back-to-back Capture Zones, join-in-progress is not available.
    Essence and Salvage: Unlike in Standard playlists, Salvage pickups in Grief are worth 100 Salvage, visible to all players, and can only be picked up by the first player to grab it.
    Zombies: Rounds will progress faster than usual and the amount of zombies per round has been increased to account for 8 players! All undead entities – except for bosses – are to be expected. If players fail to kill zombies, the round will turn.
    Core Mechanics: The Arsenal, Pack-a-Punch, Mystery Box, Crafting Tables, Perk machines, GobbleGum machine, Armor Wall Buys, and Der Wunderfizz machine are available in a Grief Arena where they normally reside, or in a new location if they don’t normally exist in this portion of their respective maps. Note: While the current GobbleGum restrictions are in place to keep matches dynamic yet balanced, additional restrictions may be made in the future as the developers keep an eye on game balance, similar to Ranked Play.
    Capture Zones: Appearing at a regular cadence during a match, these are smaller areas within a Grief Arena where players are required to stand and earn specific types of kills to trigger a Grief  on the opposing team.
    Plan A: Survive! Plan B: Capture Zones!

    Keeping your team upright and focused on undead slaying for longer than your rivals is the main plan in this mode. However, there’s an important secondary focus you need to plan for: Capturing zones and “Griefing” your rival team!
    Capture Zones appear at regular intervals throughout a match, and after stepping through the glowing perimeter, you and your team can secure the Zone by staying inside it and dispatching zombies. Beckon your crew into a Zone to quicken the zombie slaying, and once your kill count meets the requirement, a Grief is triggered on the opposition. Note that if neither team reaches this requirement within the countdown inside a Capture Zone, the Grief is applied to both teams.

    What is a Grief? It’s a temporary debuff, penalty, or negative gameplay mechanic that you can inflict on your rival team at a Capture Zone.
    The type of Grief is shown at the objective tracker within a Capture Zone. Here are the possible Griefs you’re aiming to inflict on your foes:

    Weapon Nerf: The affected players inflict considerably reduced damage to zombie enemies.
    Ammo Drain: All ammo-based weapons, including those stowed, receive an ammo drain with bullets or shells being removed constantly while the Grief is active.
    Zombie Ambush: An Elite zombie is summoned, and it solely focuses its killing power on the enemy team until either the Elite or the team are defeated, or the timer runs out.
    Weapon Carousel: The rival players’ weapons are randomly swapped every few seconds.
    Frozen: This Grief reduces the enemy players’ movement, along with frost and ice coating the characters.

    Griefs and Capture Zones also introduce new score types, including:

    Capture Zone Kill: Awarded to a player who defeated a zombie type during a successful Capture Zone completion.
    Capture Zone Win: Awarded to all players on a team who successfully commandeer a Capture Zone.
    Capture Zone Elite Kill: Awarded to a player who slays an Elite spawned in a Capture Zone.

    Available Grief ArenasA total of 11 different Grief Arenas are available in this mode. Here’s a list along with a brief description of the points of interest within each one:

    Liberty Falls Arena 1: Pump & Pay, Motor Lodge, and Fuller’s Liberty Lanes
    Liberty Falls Arena 2: Dark Aether Church, Cemetery, Hilltop
    Terminus Arena 1: Bio Lab
    Terminus Arena 2: Crab Island 
    Citadelle des Morts Arena: Courtyard, Ramparts, and Entrance Hall
    The Tomb Arena 1: Dig Site, Mausoleum
    The Tomb Arena 2: Dark Aether Nexus
    Shattered Veil Arena 1: Garden Pond, Lower Terrace
    Shattered Veil Arena 2: Upper Terrace, Shem’s Henge, Motor Court
    Shattered Veil Arena 3: Mansion Foyer, Overlook, East Foyer, Library
    Shattered Veil Arena 4: West Hallways, Southwest Balcony, Bottlery

    Access the following new content within all five Zombies Mapsthroughout Season 04:
    Dark Ops ChallengesA mysterious new set of hidden Calling Cards and bounteous amounts of XP are available at the start of Season 04, thanks to a fresh drop of Zombies Dark Ops Challenges. Who knows... maybe there’s even one for Grief. All further information is].
    New LTM: Starting RoomInspired by the starting room in the classic “Moon” Zombies map, drop in with up to three of your Zombies crew into a more straightforward but challenging experience where you’re locked into the first zone of a map. Raptor One is gone, and those undead hordes are only getting stronger, but all doors in the initial zone are locked. Survive to the highest round you can!
    New LTM: Abomination ChallengeEnter a warped version of Liberty Falls during this new Mid-Season Event, and hunt down an ultra-powered-up Abomination. Perhaps it’s wise to bring backup.

    Wreck even the most battle-hardened undead threat with the explosive power of the Shatter Blast Ammo Mod, then drop even more devastating firepower on the hordes with the Grim Reaper Support launcher. There’s three new chewables, too!
    Ammo Mod: Shatter BlastAvailable: Augments Menu, and In-Game“Bullets deal explosive damage. Each bullet has a chance to create an explosion that destroys armor.”
    Modify your ammunition to explode the toughened armor of certain normal and Special undead enemies. This mod also has a second benefit, creating an area-of-effect blast radius at the same time, whether any armor is shattered or not. 
    Due to the somewhat chaotic nature of this modification, there is a random chance of the Shatter Blast effect triggering, and it won’t happen every time you fire. Also expect a cooldown period after the effect. Note that Shatter Blast doesn’t directly affect Elite enemies, but area-of-effect explosions can still damage them.
    You are wise to wrangle your undead into hordes so they’re near each other, to really inflict some damage!
    Shatter Blast: Major Augments

    Research the following Augments to further customize this Ammo Mod.
    Big Game
    Shatter Blast can be used against Elite enemies. Expect an impressively sized explosion.

    Blast Chain
    On explosion, three additional explosions occur in rapid succession.

    Blast Repair
    For every enemy that has its armor destroyed by Shatter Blast, armor health will be restored for the player.
    Shatter Blast: Minor Augments
    Blast Zone
    Increase the size of the explosion.
    Blast Boost
    Increase the explosion damage.
    Blast Wave
    Normal enemies are knocked down by the explosion.
    New GobbleGumsCrack your teeth on three new GobbleGums, available across all maps once you earn or unlock them and equip them in your GobbleGum Loadout Pack.
    Explosive Flourish: Reloading your weapon creates an explosion around you. GobbleGum lasts 2 minutes.
    Flavor Hex: Activates a random Ultra GobbleGum.
    Rainburps: Zombies killed belch sparkly rainbow bubbles. Lasts 3 minutes.
    Additional Support Weapon: Grim ReaperAvailable: Rivals Event reward

    Salvage: 2000
    Hammer away at the Crafting Table and assemble a powerful semi-automatic launcher known as the Grim Reaper, which deals out lethal damage to the undead with up to a quartet of missiles fired in one load. With a capacity to carry up to a dozen rockets, and the ability to fire them individually or as a quartet of devastation, this can level a courtyard of undead with a single launch! Unlock this Support weapon once you’ve earned it via the Rivals Event.
    Note: Zombies Events: Check the General section later in this blog to uncover a first look at events for this mode across Season 04, including the King of the Dead Leaderboard challenge!

    Call of Duty: Warzone Content Summary

    New Point of Interest: The towering skyscraper known as The Overlook comes to Downtown Verdansk, with ziplines, cranes, and an impressive interior to explore.

    New and Limited Time Modes: Clash mode – the massive 52v52 Verdansk Deathmatch – is back! Join 51 other Operators in a chaotic firefight to claim domination points and defeat foes. Then compete in a specially themed area of Verdansk in a match with rule-bending modifiers in Havoc Royale. And drop into Rebirth Island for a spot of Resurgence Casual human and bot combat.

    Doubling Down on Ranked Play: Call of Duty: Warzone doubles down – literally – with two separate Ranked Play modes; Battle Royale: Rankedat launch running throughout the entire season, and the return of Ranked Play to Rebirth Island at Mid-season.

    New Features: Cranes and horizontal ziplines Downtown. Lobby Lockdown in The Overlook.

    Look up and look out! 

    Dominate foes with a gigantic new skyscraper point of interest, available to Operators within the vicinity of Downtown! The old tenement blocks, Burger Town, and SKN Comm tower have been demolished, and construction crews are finalizing a sprawling skyscraper that dominates the landscape! Look for a full recon tour below.
    Recon Tour: The Overlook

    As construction nears completion on this behemoth of a skyscraper, it’s worth gaining a tactical advantage on this monolithic new point of interest.
    The Overlook Footprint: The “Diamond” and Perimeter Security Checkpoints

    Drop into the grounds of The Overlook, and you’ll immediately see the grounds of the new skyscraper under construction stretch in a rough diamond shape around the location of the old SKN Comm Tower. Flanked by two massive cranes, the building plot perimeter runs from the corner of the main bank, clockwise past the Post Office, passing the Rothwynn Donna building, northeast to the Museum/Art Gallery, and follows the road around to City Hall. 

    All the older structureshave been bulldozed in the name of progress!
    Perimeter Security Checkpoints

    Military-style security checkpoints have been set up on the corners and roads of the plot of land within the footprint of the structure. Most aren’t secure enough to impede vehicular progress, and some have ramps to allow airborne access. These serve as helpful visual cues that you’re entering the new POI, The Overlook. 
    Ground Level: Construction Sites

    Most of the groundwork around the skyscraper is in its final stages of completion, but there are plenty of barriers, fencing, canopies, and containers to use as cover in the area below each of the two giant cranes north and south of the structure.
    Ground Level: Restaurants

    Burger Town: Fans of the famous Burger Town Double Cheeseburger will be thrilled to know the fast-food chain has relocated a few meters further down the road from its previous location and is contained within the massive footprint of The Overlook. This outlet also serves as a lower entrance into the grand foyer interior of the building.
    Sushi Bar: Diagonally opposite the Burger Town, on the northwest side of the POI, is a small Sushi bar, within the footprint of the tower itself. Nestled in the stepped courtyard, you can quickly advance to the north crane or main lobby entrance. It’s also worth pointing out that the sight lines around this POI have significantly changed since Season 03, with much greater visibility across familiar POIs within Downtown and the surrounding districts.
    North and South Cranes

    Two huge cranes flank the north and south side of the monolith and are another way to traverse into The Overlook at great height. With five separate platforms attached to the mast to land on, use the vertical Ascender built into the crane’s mast and take an eight-second ascent to a platform just below the jib that extends out to the main winch, and the hoist allowing a jump to The Overlook roof. Operators who aren’t challenged by vertigo will have wild and panoramic views that extend to all of Verdansk’s POIs!

    Both cranes are also functional, and providing you’ve found the necessary controls in the vicinity, cargo on the hook block and hoist can be summoned and moved to various locations around the tower and nearby Downtown buildings, in case you or your team needs a daring lift!
    Zip Lines and Additional Rooftop Cover

    Increasing the ways you can quickly traverse and gaingreat height in your tactical positioning near The Overlook exterior, zip-lines provide a diagonal route to and from the surrounding Downtown building rooftops. 

    Each also has a small billboard or other protective cover as you reach the zipline mechanism. Access to and from Overlook at the following locations:

    South: Post Office rooftop to Skydeck.
    West: Rothwynn Donna building rooftop to Skydeck.
    Northeast: Art Gallery/Museum rooftop to Skydeck.
    East: City Hall dome rooftop to Skydeck. 

    The Overlook: Entrance and Lobby Lockdown

    The Overlook has a substantial exterior and interior presence, mainly tiered fountains, planting, and stairs up to forecourts and shuttered entrances to the north, east, south, and west, all leading to a central interior lobby. If you find the main entrances shuttered, it means the lobby is experiencing a lockdown. Perhaps there’s a way to breach this security? Are there other ways to get in?

    The interior lobby has a coffee shop, mezzanine office, stairs, a variety of cover options, and other areas to investigate, not least the marginally terrifying 18-storey elevator ascenders to the northeast and southwest, and even those only get you halfway up the inside of the tower.
    The Overlook: Atrium and SkydeckJust above the midway point within The Overlook tower is a five-floor interior with exterior Skydeck. Depending on your use of ziplines, you’re able to access a large Atrium with concrete tile and planters and an abundance of plant life. Around the perimeter are rooms, stairwells, and two new elevator shafts, all enabling you to reach the exterior Skydeck.

    Known by some locals as the “cyclops” tower, due to this large central upper opening you can fly a helicopter through, the Skydeck features a small glass pyramid, some windswept seating, and infiltration to the floors above. 

    The large, rectangular holes on all four sides provide zipline access around Downtown, as well as daring helicopter maneuvers through the gaps. The ascent doesn’t end here; enter any of the four pillars holding up the roof of the skyscraper for another elevator ascender ride.
    The Overlook: Penthouse, RoofThe remaining upper floors of The Overlook are nearing completion, meaning health and safety rules aren’t being observed as stringently as you’d like. Top floors up from the Skydeck is the roof. Missing windows, exterior gantries without railings, and exposed exterior ladders mean you’ll be thankful for your parachute. 

    Depending on which of the tower corners you’re fighting through, this offers another five floors to investigate, including rooms that are fully furnished. 

    These include a security and server room, a two-floor penthouse level with opulent bedroom, kitchen, and games area, and that’s before the more perturbed of Operators learn the secrets of the] room! 

    As well as the usual Battle Royale and Resurgence playlists across Verdansk and Rebirth Island, major modes – Clash and Battle Royale: Ranked Play – return to the game, with the intriguing Havoc Royale and the arrival of Resurgence: Ranked Play on Rebirth Island at mid-season!

    Clash LTM104 players, 15-minute matches

    52v52 Team Deathmatch chaos is back in Call of Duty: Warzone!
    First introduced into Call of Duty: Warzone during Season Five of Black Ops Cold War back in September 2021 as a revamped version of the original “Rumble” mode, Clash is back, bigger than ever, and now includes some impressive, game-changing equipment and power-ups only available in this mode. But what is Clash Mode?
    This is Team Deathmatch and Domination on a massive scale!
    Overview, Win Conditions, and Scoring
    This action-packed team-based mode takes place in and around a specific POI within Verdansk, and pits two teams of 52 playersagainst each other. With no Circle Collapse, no last stand benefit for the Survivor Perk, and your Loadouts available immediately, the plan is simple; your side needs to acquire 500 points by the end of the 15-minute time limit. These are mainly gained by slaying enemies, completing contracts, and participating in the in-game Public Events, as well as the following:
    Scoring:

    1 point per enemy elimination
    2 points per enemy elimination with Double Down Power Up
    5 points per Contract completed
    10 points for capturing a Domination Point10 points for capturing a Bonus Crate or a Cash Crate

    Clash: Available Locations
    Expect Clash matches to occur across a sub-section of the main Verdansk map, incorporating several adjacent areas around the following POIs:

    Quarry
    Boneyard
    Farmland
    PromenadeClash: Available Vehicles
    With the impetus to reach the enemy forces never more important, expect heavy use of vehicles throughout a Clash Match. The full complement of currently available ground and air vehicles are as follows:

    Heli
    Cargo Truck
    LTVPolaris RZR Pro R 4

    Available Contracts
    There are three available Contracts to complete in Clash Mode:

    Scavenger
    Search and Destroy
    Recon

    The Scavenger and Recon Contracts work in the same way as they do in Battle Royale Matches. In addition to the usual rewards and in-game cash, you receive five team points for each Contract completed.
    Search and Destroy Contracts: Everything must go with this new contract, where one team plants a bomb on a Buy Station, and on detonation, they can earn impressive rarity weapons and items from the Buy Stations’ inventory. The other teams can defuse the bomb to earn a Fire Sale for a major discount from the Buy Stations. 
    Expect the Search and Destroy Contract to be available in Battle Royale, Resurgence, and Plunder Modes, at Mid-Season.
    In-Match Events and Domination Points

    During a Clash match, expect several in-match Events to occur. These are like those in Battle Royale Matches, though Clash Events are timed throughout the match rather than related to the Circle Collapse. The available Events are:

    Domination Points
    Bonus Points Crates
    Clash Firesale
    Cash Crates
    Power Surge

    Domination Points Event: Up to three single capture Dom Pointsappear on the map, and these respawn throughout the match. Much like the Multiplayer Mode of the same name, a team that reaches and captures one of the Dom Points receives a reward; in this case, 10 team points.
    Bonus Points Crates Event: A cargo plane flies across the center of the map, and up to four crates are dropped. Teams are likely to head to the crates as they float to the ground, as capturing a crate awards you with 10 team points.
    Clash Firesale Event: For the next two minutes, all players can take advantage of a Firesale as two Portable Buy Stations are dropped into the backfield of each team. Additionally, all loot crates are restocked and cash found in crates is also increased. 
    Cash Crates: Capture oneof the three Cash Crates that drop during this event also nets you 10 team points.
    Power Surge Event: For the next two minutes, there’s an increased drop rate of Power Ups when you dispatch an enemy player or loot any ground caches.
    Clash Mode Gameplay Features

    As well as the previously mentioned new Search and Destroy Contract, Clash comes loaded with features unique to the mode. Here’s the full run-down of what to expect:
    Buy Stations: Expect Buy Stations to be scattered across a Clash map and roughly split between each team’s area of operations. Portable Buy Stations are also available during the Firesale In-Match Event. Here’s what you can purchase:

    Armor Plate: Munitions Box: Trophy System: Counter UAV: Sentry Turret: Hand Cannon: Bunker Buster: Cluster Strike: Precision Airstrike: Specialist Perk: New Field Upgrade: Door Barricade: Control access points more easily during mid or close-quarter combat scenarios and delay enemy incursions with the Door Barricade.
    Fit a barricade to a close single or double door, and a heavy-duty lock attaches toboth sides, preventing the opening or access through the door. This is until the barricade is either removed, or destroyed, usually by using explosives, though gunfire and melee equipment is also an option.
    Expect the Door Barricade to be loot in Battle Royale and Battle Royale Casual Modes, via the new Care Package Killstreak, all coming at Mid-Season.
    New Killstreak: Hand Cannon: This high-powered pistol Killstreak, originally available in Multiplayer during Season 01, is available in ground cache as rare loot. Expect a slow rate of fire and finite ammunition, but good handling, and improved hip fire accuracy with faster hip-fire shooting speed.
    Expect the Hand Cannon to be rare loot in Battle Royale, Battle Royale Casual, Resurgence, and Plunder Modes, via the new Care Package Killstreak, all coming at Mid-Season.
    Feature: SAM Turrets: Chopper and drone pilots take note; Clash mode maps feature SAM Turrets in various tactical positions across the environment. Spend of in-match cash to activate these anti-air missile batteries and use them up to four times to target any aircraft and drones in the area. If you’re flying in the Heli on the receiving end of a SAM barrage, now’s the time to utilize flares to counter the incoming missiles!
    Train: If a Clash map features a portion of the large, circular railroad track that the train travels along, then this hulking engine and loot-filled carriages are parked and available to use as added cover and looting opportunities.
    UAV Towers: Providing you have the in-match cash to activate them, teams can head to and capture a few scattered UAV Towers, allowing pinging of enemy movement across the local area.
    Clash Mode Powerups 
    Clash Mode features five differently hued in-match Powerups that are automatically used when found. Available as a possible loot drop or sometimes appearing as dropped loot near the body of an eliminated enemy Operator, these Powerups are color-coded and offer temporary benefits to the Operator who grabs them. All five can be obtained in a single match and expect the frequency of available Powerups to be significantly increased if the in-match Power Surge Event activates. Here’s what each of the five Clash Powerups grant you:

    Hunter: Highlights enemies and allies in red and blue respectively. Allies are visible through walls. Applies Tracker and High Alert Perks.
    Speed Boost: Prevents fall damage and provides approximately 20 percent speed boost to your movement.
    Regeneration Aura: Refills your health and armor at roughly 20 percent per second. Allies within a small radius around you also receive this benefit. The effect does not stack.
    Double Down: Grants you two points per enemy Operator elimination instead of one.
    Kill Mag: Refills your active weapon magazine after a kill and quickens your reload.

    Havoc Royale LTM44 players, 15-minute matches

    Compete in a Call of Duty: Warzone match like no other, where rule bending modifiers twist the realities of the usual Resurgence gameplay in chaotic and game-changing ways. 
    Drop into a specially themed area of Verdansk with your Loadout. Every new gas circle activates a different modifier. Adapt fast to sudden changes as Havoc modifiers may impact you, the environment, and even the gameplay rules. Survive the Havoc, be the last team standing, and claim victory!
    Expect a full rundown of this game mode in the Season 04 Reloaded blog, just prior to Mid-season.

    Resurgence Casual44 Players, Players & Bots

    Infil into Rebirth Island with your squad and commit to winning using the regular Resurgence ruleset, but with one important twist; some of your adversaries aren’t human! Whether facing down a bot or not, Resurgence Casual is a great mode to drop into whether you’re warming up, teaching a new player about the game, or you’re wanting a Resurgence match that isn’t quite as extreme as normal.
    As with Battle Royale Casual or Call of Duty: Warzone Bootcamp, game progression is limited in this mode and results will not count towards or against your stats. This mode also doesn’t count towards your eligibility to accessing Resurgence Ranked Play when it arrives at Mid-Season.

    Grind your way towards a coveted position in the Top 250 as Battle Royale: Ranked Play becomes the first of two Ranked Play variants to drop in Season 04 within Call of Duty: Warzone. Harness the competitive spirit and earn new rewards for ranking up and advancing through the Skill Divisions, unlocking the following rewards as you go:
    Season 04 BR Ranked Play Rewards

    First Season Win: Weapon Charm
    Get 25 Eliminations: Elimination Sticker
    Get 100 Eliminations: Elimination Weapon Camo
    Get 250 Eliminations: Elimination LR 7.62 Weapon Blueprint
    Silver: “Ranked Season 4 – Silver” Emblem
    Gold: “Ranked Season 4 – Gold” Emblem and Decal
    Platinum: “Ranked Season 4 – Platinum” Emblem and Decal
    Diamond: “Ranked Season 4 – Diamond” Emblem and Decal
    Crimson: “Ranked Season 4 – Crimson” Emblem and Decal
    Iridescent: “Ranked Season 4 – Iridescent” Emblem and Decal
    Top 250: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250” Emblem and Decal
    Season 04 Champion: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250 Champion” Emblem

    Ranked Play: ResurgenceTrios, Rebirth Island

    Craving some real competition on Rebirth Island? Then squad up with your winning Trio, and attempt dominance over the very best players as Resurgence Ranked Play makes its triumphant return! Expect the same rules set you remember during the Call of Duty: Modern Warfare® III era, and an expanded look at this returning, fan-favorite mode in the Season 04 Reloaded blog, just prior to Mid-season.
    Ranked Play Notes: Battle Royale: Ranked Playruns from Launch Window throughout the entirety of Season 04. Resurgence: Ranked Playbegins at Mid-Season, and runs alongside Battle Royale: Ranked Play, meaning you can play one or both Modes when they are active. The ranking is separate from Battle Royale: Ranked Play.
    A new Contract, Field Upgrade, Killstreak, Perk, and ATV are all set to drop into Verdansk during Season 04:
    Clash Mode Features ExpansionAfter an evaluation period in Call of Duty: Warzone’s Clash Mode, expect the following new equipment to become available across additional modes at mid-season. Here’s what to expect:

    Contract: Search & Destroy: Battle Royale, Resurgence, Plunder.
    Field Upgrade: Door Barricade: Battle Royale, Battle Royale Casual Modes. Available via Care Package.
    Killstreak: Hand Cannon: Battle Royale, Battle Royale Casual, and Plunder Modes. Available via Care Package.

    Killstreak: Care PackageOpen ground loot caches for a rare chance to obtain the Care Package, a throwable Killstreak that, when lobbed, explodes into trail of smoke, after which a loadout-sized crate falls from the skies. Open this crate for a chance to obtain rare loot including rare equipment, the Specialist Perk, and more.
    New Perk: Loot MasterAvailable only as Ground Loot during Resurgence and Plunder matches, the Loot Master Perk allows you to maximize your scavenging potential and gear up faster by increasing the amount of loot you find while opening caches. Gain the early advantage or sustain yourself during prolonged engagements. Expect an increased drop rate for equipped weapon ammo, a higher chance to find tacticals and lethals, more cash, and a greater chance at field upgrades, killstreaks, and other high-tier gear.
    ATV: Polaris Sportsman XP 1000Added to the vehicle pool is the Polaris Sportsman XP 1000, a real wild ride allowing you to hit the Verdansk goat trails in comfort with legendary suspension, great clearance and traction, and versatility for positioning up to three Operators on the surface of the vehicle. Compared to the current ATV, the wheelbase and size of the Sportsman XP 1000 offers more stability than ever before. 
    Note: Call of Duty: Warzone Events: Check the General section later in this blog to uncover the full complement of events for this mode across Season 04.

    General ContentCall of Duty: General Content SummaryWeapons Detail: Five new weapons arrive in Season 04, including two at launch: the LC10 SMG and FFAR 1 Assault Rifle. Later in the season, get your hands on the , Essex Model 07 Marksman Rifle, Olympia Special weapon and Pickaxe Melee weapon, and change up your playstyle with new attachments.

    The Events Horizon: Season 04 is packed with Events, including Rivals, Ballerina, and even more coming mid-season.. Plus, prove your worth across the Zombies leaderboards and become King of the Dead!

    Battle Pass and BlackCell: The Season 04 Battle Pass brings Stitch and brutal BlackCell Operator Omen to the forefront alongside new Weapon Blueprints, Operator Skins, Calling Cards, Finishing Moves, Emotes, and more in a mix of free and premium tiers. Free tiers include two new base weapons and the G-Grip Tactical Foregrip.

    Season 04 Operators: Stitch returns after being freed from prison, headlining the new Battle Pass next to the sinister Omen leading BlackCell. Plus, deploy as assassin Eve Macarro in a collaboration with Ballerina, followed by much more at the mid-season.

    CDL Announcements: Major IV is almost here! Find out where to watch, plus the in-game rewards you can unlock, just for tuning in!

    Primary Weapon: LC10SMG, Battle Pass Page 3, Page 14 Battle Pass Blueprint

    Levels: 38
    MAGS: 4
    MAG SIZE: 34
    Mastery Badges: Yes
    Attachments: Optic, Muzzle, Barrel, Underbarrel, Magazine, Rear Grip, Stock, Laser, Fire Mods
    Customize Options: Skins, Camos and Reticle Unlocks, Accessories, Decals, Stickers.
    Full-auto submachine gun. Excellent accuracy and range, with a moderate rate of fire. Average mobility and very slow handling for its class.
    Returning after its debut in Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War, the LC10 SMG spits out rounds fast coupled with good accuracy and range, moderate damage, and a quick reload to get you back into the fight.
    The weapon performs well off the hip or down sights, with 34 rounds in the base magazine for a hefty ammo supply. Via Gunsmith, equip a variety of improvements such as a Laser for improved hipfire spread and an updated Barrel to further extend the weapon’s respectable damage range.

    Primary Weapon: FFAR 1Assault Rifle, Battle Pass Page 6, Page 11 HVT Tier Battle Pass Blueprint

    Levels: 42
    MAGS: 3
    MAG SIZE: 30
    Mastery Badges: Yes
    Attachments: Optic, Muzzle, Barrel, Underbarrel, Magazine, Rear Grip, Stock, Laser, Fire Mods
    Customize Options: Skins, Camo and Reticle Unlocks, Accessories, Decals, Stickers.
     Full-auto assault rifle. Very high rate of fire and excellent CQB power, but slower handling and mobility.
    Boasting a blazing fast fire rate that rivals the SMG weapon class, this bullpup Assault Rifle is designed for taking down targets fast. The somewhat unpredictable recoil favors burst fire when tackling distant targets, but once you’re locked on it’s all over for them. Supporting a variety of Underbarrel Launcher attachments, use Gunsmith to add greater versatility to the weapon. Running low on ammo? Grab an Extended Mag while you’re at it.
    Primary Weapon: Essex Model 07Marksman Rifle, Event Reward

    Levels: 38
    MAGS: 3
    MAG SIZE: 8
    Mastery Badges: Yes
    Attachments: Optic, Muzzle, Barrel, Underbarrel, Magazine, Lever, Stock, Laser, Fire Mods
    Customize Options: Skins, Camo and Reticle Unlocks, Accessories, Decals, Stickers.
    Lever-action marksman rifle. High damage potential. Balanced by slower rate of fire and handling.
    Inflict heavy critical point damage with this lever-action tactical rifle. An ideal tool for the new sheriff in town, this classic armament offers smooth handling with shots that quickly recenter after kicking up. Choose from a variety of Levers to further customize the weapon’s action, improving ADS speed, sprint to fire speed, and other movement abilities. 
    Special Weapon: OlympiaSpecial, Event Reward

    Levels: 30
    MAGS: 8
    MAG SIZE: 2
    Mastery Badges: Yes
    Attachments: Barrel, Stock
    Customize Options: Skins, Camos, Accessories, Decals, Stickers.
    Double-barrel shotgun. Very high damage and respectable range but requires frequent reloading.
    The double-barrel Olympia – not seen since Black Ops 3 – makes its debut in Black Ops 6, returning as a Special Weapon that makes for the perfect backup when entering tight spaces. The Olympia holds two shots at a time, each spraying multiple pellets when your Operator pulls the trigger. Light customization via the Short Barrel and Cut-Off Stock attachments gives you some control over the weapon’s playstyle, but the fundamentals remain the same: get up close and make your shots count. Fire down the sight for a tighter pellet spread or shoot off the hip to inflict damage over a wider area.
    Melee Weapon: PickaxeMelee, Event Reward

    Levels: 30
    Mastery Badges: Yes
    Attachments: None
    Customize Options: Skins.
    One-hit kill. Medium attack speed. Short range.
    Without a Pickaxe, you’ll be lost in the tundra. Bring the right tool for the job when deploying to Iceland in Season 04’s Multiplayer maps, starting with this deadly Melee weapon that downs unarmored enemies with brutal severity. Though its range is short, the Pickaxe’s combination of rapid slashes and overhead swipes will keep enemies frozen in their tracks. Close the distance and say farewell.

    G-GripSMGs, Assault Rifles, Battle Pass Page 7 Reward
    Vertical foregrip with integrated laser for improved firing stability, horizontal recoil control, and tightened spread when transitioning between hipfire and aiming down sights. Beam: Blue. Blocks Laser attachments.
    Stryder .22 3-Round Burst ModStryder .22 Pistol, Event Reward
    Convert the Stryder .22 into a 3-round burst. Drastically improves fire rate and maintains manageable gun kick but alters the weapon’s damage profile outside of the effective range.

    SVD Full Auto ModSVD Sniper Rifle, Event Reward
    Convert the SVD from semi-auto to full-auto functionality, ramping up the speed of your damage output and drastically improving recoil and handling.
    TR2 CQB Auto ConversionTR2 Marksman Rifle, Event Reward
    Alter the TR2 Marksman Rifle to fire handgun caliber rounds, resulting in a Marksman Rifle with a compact frame and fully automatic capabilities that rival fire rates of an SMG!
    Stitch Returns to Action in the Season 04 Battle Pass

    Stitch returns to the fray, leading this season’s Battle Pass content in a shocking team up with Adler. Purchase the Season 04 Battle Pass for 1,100 COD Points or the Season 04 Battle Pass Bundle for 2,400 COD Points to immediately unlock the Instant Rewards Page of the Battle Pass, including the following items:

    10% Battle Pass XP Boost
    The new “Supermax” Stitch Operator and “Supermax BlackCell” Stitch Operator Skin for those who purchase BlackCell
    The “Lock Up” Legendary Blueprint for the Feng 82 LMG
    The “Try Me!” Emote
    The “Untamable” Large Decal
    Start to unlock up to 1,100 COD Points as you progress through the Battle Pass

    The Season 04 Battle Pass includes over 110 pieces of unlockable contentincluding two new Base Weapons, the G-Grip Tactical Foregrip Attachment, and several unlockable mil-sim style skins for Bailey, Payne, Grey, Caine, Brutus, Toro, Adler, Nazir, and Marshall. Stay tuned for the BlackCell, Battle Pass and Store Bundles blog prior to Season 04 launch for more details.
    BlackCell Offerings

    When the job needs to get done, summon Omen, the otherworldly Operator leading BlackCell content in Season 04. The menacing Operator and his three-headed guard dog are joined by a cast of infected, black and purple-hued Operator Skins and Weapon Blueprints earned exclusively through BlackCell.
    BlackCell owners can access the Season 04 Battle Pass via the exclusive BlackCell Page, instantly unlocking the following items:

    The “Omen” BlackCell Operator and Skin
    10% XP Boost
    1,100 COD Points
    The “Guard Dog” Companion Finishing Move
    The “Hellblock” Mastercraft Blueprint for the Ladra SMG
    The “Kill Tally” Gun Screen
    The “BlackCell” Clan TagBlackCell owners get access to page after page of additional exclusive rewards within the Season 04 Battle Pass, including:

    Seven BlackCell-exclusive skins for Stitch, Bailey, Payne, Caine, Brutus, and Adler. 
    Seven BlackCell-exclusive Weapon Blueprints for the Krig C, XMG, SWAT 5.56, ASG-98, FFAR 1, Model L, LC10Over 130 item rewardsfor those who fully complete the Season 04 BlackCell Battle Pass.

    As usual, players who upgrade to BlackCell after purchasing the Battle Pass will also receive back the COD Points they spent.
    BlackCell Daily Challenges: Players with BlackCell will receive additional Daily Challenges throughout Season 04 for Multiplayer, Zombies, and Call of Duty: Warzone, giving even more chances to rake in the XP during your play sessions!
    BlackCell Loyalty Bonus: Players who purchased BlackCell in a previous Black Ops 6season and go on to purchase Season 04 BlackCell will earn a permanent 10% Player and Weapon XP Loyalty Bonus, up to 30% for players who purchased Season 01, Season 02, and Season 03 BlackCell!
    The return of Stitch signals a shift in the battles ahead, requiring new Operators to meet the demands of the intensifying conflict. Predict a swift demise for your opponents with Omen leading BlackCell, joined by Stitch at the head of the Battle Pass plus a special appearance by Eve Macarro from Ballerina.
    Omen“Omen” Operator: BlackCell Instant Reward Page

    It’s time for lockdown. Omen is a presence who strikes fear even in the world’s most dangerous criminals, with an almost preternatural ability to keep even the most sinister prisoners in line.
    Stitch“Supermax” and “Yard Dog” Skins: Battle Pass Instant Reward Page, Battle Pass Completion Page

    Until recently, Stitch was assumed dead. Instead of eliminating his enemy, however, Adler sent him off to a black site prison. Now the time has come, and following a daring jailbreak, Stitch is once again free. Adler needs his help cracking the codenames that will finally lead to the Pantheon moles, but at what cost?
    BallerinaStore Bundle

    Seeking revenge for her slain father, Eve Macarro embarks on a relentless mission against the High Table’s most feared opponents in Ballerina, the highly anticipated new action film from the World of John Wick. Deploy as the elite assassin in one of two looks in the Ballerina Bundle arriving in Season 04.

    Participate in a new round of scheduled Events across Multiplayer, Zombies, and Call of Duty: Warzone. Earn rewards like new weapons, special attachments, and more. Here’s a first look at the Events to come:
    Event: BallerinaActivation Dates: June 5 to June 12
    Total Rewards: 10Enter the world of John Wick with the new Ballerina Event. Prove your capabilities as a supreme assassin by slaying your way across Multiplayer, Zombies, and Call of Duty: Warzone. Rewards include the new Essex Model 07 Marksman Rifle and a Ballerina-themed Nunchuck Melee Blueprint for BlackCell Owners.
    Event: RivalsActivation Dates: June 12 to June 26
    Total Rewards: 15Enemies become allies in the Rivals Event, when Stitch brings his code-cracking expertise to help uncover the real names of the final Pantheon moles in the CIA. The goal is simple; prove you’re the most proficient Operator by earning XP across all game modes and unlock a plethora of impressive free items. Dominate your enemies to become the first to unlock rewards including the Stryder .22 3-Round Burst Modand Grim Reaper.

    Events: King of the Dead, Master of GriefActivation Dates: June 26 to July 3
    Activation Dates: July 10 to July 17
    King of the Dead: “Eliminate zombies in any Zombie mode to earn points to climb the leaderboard.”
    Master of Grief: “Collect Essence in Grief to earn points to climb the leaderboard.”

    Earn points by slaying all types of undead! As you’d expect, you receive more points for dispatching the harder zombie types. This, in turn, causes you to climb the Zombies leaderboard, and once the Event is over, rewards will be granted based on your leaderboard position. Everyone receives some kind of reward, but to obtain the really good stuff, it’s time to perfect your Special and Elite Zombies slaying! 
    Season 04 brings new Bundles to the Store, including a special crossover event with Ballerina. Get more intel in the Season 04 BlackCell, Battle Pass, and Bundles blog arriving before launch.
    Tracer Pack: Ballerina

    Choose one of two Operator Skins for Eve, a red sequin dress as “Eve Macarro” or a sleek black professional fit as the “Ruska Rogue.” Bring light to the darkness with three Legendary Weapon Blueprints featuring High Table Coin Tracers and High Table Coin Death FX: the “Relevé” AK-74 Assault Rifle, “Plié” Saug SMG, and the “Arabesque” 9MM PM Pistol. For a snazzier elimination, take them out with the “Dance With Death” Finishing Move.
    Balance lethality and elegance with additional Ballerina themed content, including the “Pirouette” Emote, “Keepsake” Weapon Charm, animated “Caged Grace” Emblem, animated “Pas de Duex Calling Card, and the “Take a Bow” Loading Screen.
    Tracer Pack: Ink and Smoke Reactive Ultra Skin

    Add some class to your deployments with the cel-shaded, black and greyscale “Hardboiled” Ultra Operator Skin for Weaver, accompanied by the Reactive “Lethal Inspection” AMES 85 Assault Rifle and “Personal Detective” ASG-89 Shotgun Weapon Blueprints, both featuring Noir Tracers and Ink Annihilation Death FX. For a closer finish, leap for their throats using the “Wire Cut” Finishing Move.
    When taking on the undead, equip the “Search Engine” Wonder Weapon skin for the Thrustodyne M23 and show off your Zombies credentials with the “Sidepiece” Weapon Charm, “Dead Noir” Weapon Sticker, “Evidence” Spray, “Greyscale” Loading Screen, and the consumable Time Out GobbleGum.
    Other Incoming Bundles

    There’s plenty more awesome new content arriving in the Season 04 Store, including the “Tracer Pack: Olympus Bolt Mastercraft Ultra Skin” Bundle, featuring an electrifying Mastercraft Weapon Blueprint for the new LC10 SMG alongside a divine Ultra Operator Skin for Caine. Also incoming is the “Tracer Pack: System Breach” Bundle, and the “Tracer Pack: The Goat Ultra Skin” Bundle with a Goat Companion Finishing Move. See more of the season’s upcoming Bundles and more in the Season 04 BlackCell, Battle Pass, and Store Bundle blog.

    Call of Duty League, the pinnacle of competitive Call of Duty, is bringing its fourth and final Major of the season to the DreamHack Dallas show floor. Guests with a CDL add-on ticket can watch Major IV live, where the 12 Call of Duty League teams will battle it out for the final CDL points to qualify for 2025 Call of Duty League Championship in June.
    Ensure you get into the action by tuning in and watching Major IV live on YouTube. Be sure to link your YouTube account with your Activision ID Account to earn some special viewership rewards. Click here for more intel.
    The event starts at 10:300 AM PT Friday, May 23, and continuing at 10:30 AM PT Saturday May 24 with the Finals beginning at 10:30 AM PT Sunday May 25. 

    Black Ops 6 is available now, and now’s definitely the time to experience the spy action thriller Campaign, the in-depth tactical chaos of best-in-class Multiplayer, and to soak in the gory glory of an incredible round-based Zombies experience with five maps and the brand-new Grief mode! Click here to Purchase Black Ops 6.

    © 2025 Activision Publishing, Inc. ACTIVISION, CALL OF DUTY, CALL OF DUTY WARZONE, MODERN WARFARE, CALL OF DUTY LEAGUE, and CALL OF DUTY BLACK OPS are trademarks of Activision Publishing, Inc. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective owners.
    For more information, please visit www.callofduty.com and www.youtube.com/callofduty, and follow @Activision and @CallofDuty on X, Instagram, and Facebook. For Call of Duty Updates, follow @CODUpdates on X.
    ®, TM & © 2025 Lions Gate Entertainment Inc. and related companies. All Rights Reserved.
    #call #duty #black #ops #warzone
    Call of Duty: Black Ops 6 and Warzone Season 04: Full Intel Revealed!
    Old Enemies, New Alliances: Black Ops 6 Season 04 is Here! Though he once had the chance to end Vikhor “Stitch” Kuzmin’s reign of terror, Adler spared his nemesis after they met at the culmination of Black Ops Cold War. Latest intel reveals Kuzmin was later captured and locked up in an Icelandic CIA black site until he might prove useful. Following the events and evidence uncovered by the deceased CIA Agent Jason Hudson, that day has come, and in an unlikely team up, Adler and team have broken Stitch out from his confinement, seeking his help to crack the codenames needed to find the Pantheon moles. With Verdansk once again an area of operations for deployment, what other plans might Stitch have in store? For now, Adler needs him to complete the mission at hand.  To succeed, the two must put their past behind them in pursuit of a new goal. Get in on the action when this stacked offering of free and premium content comes to Call of Duty®: Black Ops 6, launching in Season 04 on Thursday, May 29 at 9AM PT across all platforms. Nomenclature Note: Throughout the blog, you’ll see references to when gameplay content launches. Here are what these various suffixes mean: “Launch”: Expect to access this content immediately at the Season launch “Launch Window”: Expect to access this content between launch and up to 72 hours after launch.  “In Season”: Expect to access this content during the season, but before either the mid-season or next season arrives. “Mid-Season”: Expect to access this content at Mid-Season or later. All content timing may be subject to change. Multiplayer Content Summary Five MP Maps: Drop into Icelandic AOs with three new maps at launch including the Shutdown and Fugitive 6v6 Core maps and the Blitz Strike map. In the mid-season, party it up in Eclipse and play a reimagined Fringe. New and Returning Modes: Pick up dog tags to drain the enemy’s reserves in Team Elimination, a fun new twist on the Kill Confirmed formula. Make every bullet count with the return of One in the Chamber and get festive in the Party Ops Limited-Time Mode. Additional Equipment: The Grim Reaper Scorestreak returns from the original Black Ops, offering an explosive payload that’s guaranteed to blow the competition sky high. Season 04 Ranked Play: Challenge the best of the best, get those wins, and climb the Ranks in a new season of Multiplayer Ranked Play, with all-new rewards and bragging rights. ShutdownBrand-New, Core, 6v6, Small-Sized Before breaking out Stitch, Adler and team first need to cut off the power to the black site prison, bringing them to a hydroelectric plant built on the rugged volcanic terrain of Iceland. Fight in and around the central building housing the now wrecked Turbine or dive down the Sluice into the Lake, its waters hugging the plant’s south end by the Transformers. Jump up by the red container to target enemies from far out or swim back onshore to reach the Atrium and Parking. Head to the north side to fight in the rugged Yard, away from the shoreline and bookended by the Pumphouse and Canteen. It’s a quick run to the Turbine from here, giving you good map coverage down the middle. If things get too hot, you can always drop down the Chute and swim your way to safety.  FugitiveBrand-New, Core, 6v6, Medium-Sized Deploy to a secret CIA black site in a remote part of Iceland, the very location where Stitch has been imprisoned until Adler brings him in as an unlikely ally for an urgent operation. With the power out, Adler and his crew seize their chance to infiltrate the prison, climbing, zipping, and battling their way through the frozen compound. Upon reaching their target, Adler and Stitch strike a deal. Following the jailbreak, the alarms are blaring and warnings of a power failure light up the Cell Block. Though the area may appear smaller than expected when first glancing at the minimap, the prison’s intricate layout presents multiple levels and shortcuts to the various outside areas including the Checkpoint, Courtyard, and Recreation Yard. In the upper Cell Block, newly opened cells present the danger of ambush. Be on guard and look for ziplines for quick access to your next target. BlitzBrand-New, Strike, 6v6/2v2, Small-Sized Traffic comes to a halt as Pantheon reinforcements race toward the prison but get ambushed by the Rogue team. Leave the road and seek out targets over the rugged terrain of the Cliffside or move inland, ambushing enemies at the Waterfall. To approach the battle head on, move down the central Bridge, using the scattered convoy for cover. Jump down from the center to move underneath the Bridge, a great means of pivoting to a new location. Though a small map overall, Blitz’s long lanes leave room for marksmen to shine. EclipseBrand-New, Strike, 6v6/2v2, Small-Sized Stitch and the team arrive in Avalon, slipping into the shadows of an underground nightclub to discuss business. The neon lights flicker as they form a plan to break the Pantheon codenames, but the meeting is cut short when Pantheon agents storm in. Show off your best moves on the dance floor, dodging shots and flanking targets down the sides where seating offers party goers a chance to rest and order a drink from the bar. Ambush passing enemies from the DJ booth and then break through the broken façades on the walls, escaping into the halls. FringeRemaster, Core, 6v6, Medium-Sized Revisit Fringe from Call of Duty: Black Ops 3, reimagined for the first time ever in Black Ops 6. Attend the grand opening of the Rolling Hills distillery, established in an idyllic setting with several navigable buildings and the surrounding grounds. Battle along the main Road or dive into the Bar for a closer fight. Watch for sharpshooters in the upper Barn and along the Bridge and relive the thrill of trying to make it out alive through the narrow Loading route. The first half of Season 04 brings two exciting Multiplayer modes: Team Elimination and One in the Chamber. In the mid-season, loosen up in the Party Ops Limited Time Mode. Team EliminationIn this twist on Kill Confirmed, two teams are given a limited amount of lives each round as they fight to be the last surviving team. Players drop a dog tag on death that can be picked up by the enemy to confirm the kill or by a teammate to deny the opposing team. Survive longer than the other team or hold the most remaining lives when the timer ends to win the round. Balance aggression and defense as you seek out enemy dog tags while preserving your life. Dig in with your teammates to counter enemy attacks and then ask for cover while you collect the droppings. Picking up tags is a great way to earn your next Scorestreak, so stay aggressive and keep up the momentum. Once your team’s life pool is drained, your remaining teammates can still revive you where you were last killed in a last-ditch effort to snatch victory from the jaws of defeat. One in the ChamberAnother Black Ops fan-favorite mode returns as One in the Chamber shows up in Season 04! In this free-for-all mode, each Operator is given one pistol, one bullet, a knife, and three lives. Precision is king, as bullets always eliminate on impact and the only way to earn another bullet is to get an elimination. Stay cool, aim true, and preserve your lives while aiming for the highest score. UAV scans keep the action moving, so don’t try to hide. At the end of the match, the top three scoring Operators will step up to the Winner’s Circle. Party OpsGet the party started with a new Limited-Time Mode arriving later in the season: Compete in a randomized set of party themed minigames. The player with the highest score at the end of the match wins it all. The devastating Grim Reaper Scorestreak is back from the original Black Ops, unleashing massive hits on other Operators and Scorestreaks alike. New Scorestreak Scorestreak: Grim ReaperType: Lethal Score: 725 Mastery Badges: Yes Powerful semi-automatic launcher that can fire up to four rockets in one load. Wield the Grim Reaper, a quad tube loaded Launcher capable of inflicting heavy damage on enemies. Whether targeting Operators or locking on to enemy Scorestreaks, the Grim Reaper’s payload delivers a huge explosion. The weapon is lost if you’re taken out, so save it for the right moment and bring backup to ensure you have the protection needed to unleash havoc.  Season 04 Ranked Play Overview Prove you’re the very best by dedicating your Multiplayer match time to Ranked Play, using the same settings, maps, modes, and weapon restrictions used by the Call of Duty League™. Win matches to earn SRand progress through the Ranks while earning career rewards like Rank Skins and Win Challenge rewards. As usual, match wins ensure you progress through the Ranks throughout Season 04 to earn new seasonal rewards like a new Pro Issue Weapon Blueprint, Rank-themed Calling Cards, Ranked Charms, and more: Season 04 Ranked Play Rewards Get 10 Wins: “Pro Reissue AMES 85” AMES 85 Weapon Blueprint Get 100 Wins: “Ranked Season 4 – 100 Wins” Large Decal Silver: “Ranked Season 4 – Silver” Calling Card Gold: “Ranked Season 4 – Gold” Calling Card and Charm Platinum: “Ranked Season 4 – Platinum” Calling Card and Charm Diamond: “Ranked Season 4 – Diamond” Calling Card and Charm Crimson: “Ranked Season 4 – Crimson” Calling Card and Charm Iridescent: “Ranked Season 4 – Iridescent” Calling Card and Charm Top 250: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250” Calling Card and Charm Season 04 Champion: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250 Champion” Calling Card Note: Multiplayer Events: Check the General section later in this blog to uncover the full complement of events for this mode across Season 04. Zombies Content Summary Grief Returns! Drop into this epic 4v4 competitive battle on all maps, outlasting the opposition while securing Capture Zones to debuff and Grief your opponents. The last team still standing wins! Additional Gameplay Content: Crack open the armored undead and create area-of-effect explosions with the Shatter Blast Ammo Mod, chew over the impressive effects of three new GobbleGums, and create even bigger explosions with the Grim Reaper Support launcher. New Modes and More: Unlock hidden rewards with more Dark Ops Challenges, then prepare to face down a powered-up Abomination, survive as long as you can in the Starting Room LTM, and prove your Leaderboard worth by zombie slaying for bragging rights and rewards! 4v4 competitive mode where two teams outwit and outlast each other. Capture zones to debuff enemies. No damage against other players. Respawns every third round. Available Maps: Liberty Falls, Terminus, Citadelle des Morts, The Tomb, Shattered Veil. Restricted: Wonder Weapons, GobbleGums: Exit Strategy, Idle Eyes, Wonderbar!, Time Out, and Flavor Hex.  Not seen since Black Ops 2, Grief returns to Zombies! This fan-favorite mode pits two teams of four against each other, with both sides vying to out-survive the other. As the battlelines are drawn between S.A.M. and Director Richtofen, each team pledges their support to one of these rivals at the start of a match, subsequently receiving handler comms support from one of them throughout the ensuing chaos. Indirect PvP Combat The action is almost immediate as both teams drop into either side of the same Grief Arena within the chosen Zombies map, and indirect PvP combat comes into effect: The two teams of four players can’t outright kill members of the enemy team, but can interact with them by body-blocking, or slowing them  by using melee, bullet-based weapons, or projectiles.  Victory Conditions: The winning team is the one that manages to “Grief” their rivals into being killed or entering a downed state. As long as one or more team members are upright, the match continues! Grief Arena Features The action is constant and can get incredibly chaotic, due in part to your proximity to your opponents and the hordes of undead encroaching on your team, thanks to the Arena being a sub-section of the main Zombies map. These are known as “Grief Arenas.” Within a Grief Arena are a variety of features: An Open Environment: Grief Arenas are clearly defined areas where any critical doors have already been opened, and the power will already have been turned on. All other Door Buys are inactive. Both teams spawn on opposite sides of the Arena, each in a group of four. Player Respawning: Any team members that are downed – provided one or more of their team are still alive – can be revived at any time, though rival teams, undead enemies, and Shock Charges can hamper this action! Additionally, a Wave Respawner triggers every third round, automatically reviving any eliminated teammates from both teams. Join In Progress: Any player not in the game can join up until Round 10 has been completed and has a small grace period to orient themselves before they’re swarmed by zombies. Additionally, if a team has won back-to-back Capture Zones, join-in-progress is not available. Essence and Salvage: Unlike in Standard playlists, Salvage pickups in Grief are worth 100 Salvage, visible to all players, and can only be picked up by the first player to grab it. Zombies: Rounds will progress faster than usual and the amount of zombies per round has been increased to account for 8 players! All undead entities – except for bosses – are to be expected. If players fail to kill zombies, the round will turn. Core Mechanics: The Arsenal, Pack-a-Punch, Mystery Box, Crafting Tables, Perk machines, GobbleGum machine, Armor Wall Buys, and Der Wunderfizz machine are available in a Grief Arena where they normally reside, or in a new location if they don’t normally exist in this portion of their respective maps. Note: While the current GobbleGum restrictions are in place to keep matches dynamic yet balanced, additional restrictions may be made in the future as the developers keep an eye on game balance, similar to Ranked Play. Capture Zones: Appearing at a regular cadence during a match, these are smaller areas within a Grief Arena where players are required to stand and earn specific types of kills to trigger a Grief  on the opposing team. Plan A: Survive! Plan B: Capture Zones! Keeping your team upright and focused on undead slaying for longer than your rivals is the main plan in this mode. However, there’s an important secondary focus you need to plan for: Capturing zones and “Griefing” your rival team! Capture Zones appear at regular intervals throughout a match, and after stepping through the glowing perimeter, you and your team can secure the Zone by staying inside it and dispatching zombies. Beckon your crew into a Zone to quicken the zombie slaying, and once your kill count meets the requirement, a Grief is triggered on the opposition. Note that if neither team reaches this requirement within the countdown inside a Capture Zone, the Grief is applied to both teams. What is a Grief? It’s a temporary debuff, penalty, or negative gameplay mechanic that you can inflict on your rival team at a Capture Zone. The type of Grief is shown at the objective tracker within a Capture Zone. Here are the possible Griefs you’re aiming to inflict on your foes: Weapon Nerf: The affected players inflict considerably reduced damage to zombie enemies. Ammo Drain: All ammo-based weapons, including those stowed, receive an ammo drain with bullets or shells being removed constantly while the Grief is active. Zombie Ambush: An Elite zombie is summoned, and it solely focuses its killing power on the enemy team until either the Elite or the team are defeated, or the timer runs out. Weapon Carousel: The rival players’ weapons are randomly swapped every few seconds. Frozen: This Grief reduces the enemy players’ movement, along with frost and ice coating the characters. Griefs and Capture Zones also introduce new score types, including: Capture Zone Kill: Awarded to a player who defeated a zombie type during a successful Capture Zone completion. Capture Zone Win: Awarded to all players on a team who successfully commandeer a Capture Zone. Capture Zone Elite Kill: Awarded to a player who slays an Elite spawned in a Capture Zone. Available Grief ArenasA total of 11 different Grief Arenas are available in this mode. Here’s a list along with a brief description of the points of interest within each one: Liberty Falls Arena 1: Pump & Pay, Motor Lodge, and Fuller’s Liberty Lanes Liberty Falls Arena 2: Dark Aether Church, Cemetery, Hilltop Terminus Arena 1: Bio Lab Terminus Arena 2: Crab Island  Citadelle des Morts Arena: Courtyard, Ramparts, and Entrance Hall The Tomb Arena 1: Dig Site, Mausoleum The Tomb Arena 2: Dark Aether Nexus Shattered Veil Arena 1: Garden Pond, Lower Terrace Shattered Veil Arena 2: Upper Terrace, Shem’s Henge, Motor Court Shattered Veil Arena 3: Mansion Foyer, Overlook, East Foyer, Library Shattered Veil Arena 4: West Hallways, Southwest Balcony, Bottlery Access the following new content within all five Zombies Mapsthroughout Season 04: Dark Ops ChallengesA mysterious new set of hidden Calling Cards and bounteous amounts of XP are available at the start of Season 04, thanks to a fresh drop of Zombies Dark Ops Challenges. Who knows... maybe there’s even one for Grief. All further information is]. New LTM: Starting RoomInspired by the starting room in the classic “Moon” Zombies map, drop in with up to three of your Zombies crew into a more straightforward but challenging experience where you’re locked into the first zone of a map. Raptor One is gone, and those undead hordes are only getting stronger, but all doors in the initial zone are locked. Survive to the highest round you can! New LTM: Abomination ChallengeEnter a warped version of Liberty Falls during this new Mid-Season Event, and hunt down an ultra-powered-up Abomination. Perhaps it’s wise to bring backup. Wreck even the most battle-hardened undead threat with the explosive power of the Shatter Blast Ammo Mod, then drop even more devastating firepower on the hordes with the Grim Reaper Support launcher. There’s three new chewables, too! Ammo Mod: Shatter BlastAvailable: Augments Menu, and In-Game“Bullets deal explosive damage. Each bullet has a chance to create an explosion that destroys armor.” Modify your ammunition to explode the toughened armor of certain normal and Special undead enemies. This mod also has a second benefit, creating an area-of-effect blast radius at the same time, whether any armor is shattered or not.  Due to the somewhat chaotic nature of this modification, there is a random chance of the Shatter Blast effect triggering, and it won’t happen every time you fire. Also expect a cooldown period after the effect. Note that Shatter Blast doesn’t directly affect Elite enemies, but area-of-effect explosions can still damage them. You are wise to wrangle your undead into hordes so they’re near each other, to really inflict some damage! Shatter Blast: Major Augments Research the following Augments to further customize this Ammo Mod. Big Game Shatter Blast can be used against Elite enemies. Expect an impressively sized explosion. Blast Chain On explosion, three additional explosions occur in rapid succession. Blast Repair For every enemy that has its armor destroyed by Shatter Blast, armor health will be restored for the player. Shatter Blast: Minor Augments Blast Zone Increase the size of the explosion. Blast Boost Increase the explosion damage. Blast Wave Normal enemies are knocked down by the explosion. New GobbleGumsCrack your teeth on three new GobbleGums, available across all maps once you earn or unlock them and equip them in your GobbleGum Loadout Pack. Explosive Flourish: Reloading your weapon creates an explosion around you. GobbleGum lasts 2 minutes. Flavor Hex: Activates a random Ultra GobbleGum. Rainburps: Zombies killed belch sparkly rainbow bubbles. Lasts 3 minutes. Additional Support Weapon: Grim ReaperAvailable: Rivals Event reward Salvage: 2000 Hammer away at the Crafting Table and assemble a powerful semi-automatic launcher known as the Grim Reaper, which deals out lethal damage to the undead with up to a quartet of missiles fired in one load. With a capacity to carry up to a dozen rockets, and the ability to fire them individually or as a quartet of devastation, this can level a courtyard of undead with a single launch! Unlock this Support weapon once you’ve earned it via the Rivals Event. Note: Zombies Events: Check the General section later in this blog to uncover a first look at events for this mode across Season 04, including the King of the Dead Leaderboard challenge! Call of Duty: Warzone Content Summary New Point of Interest: The towering skyscraper known as The Overlook comes to Downtown Verdansk, with ziplines, cranes, and an impressive interior to explore. New and Limited Time Modes: Clash mode – the massive 52v52 Verdansk Deathmatch – is back! Join 51 other Operators in a chaotic firefight to claim domination points and defeat foes. Then compete in a specially themed area of Verdansk in a match with rule-bending modifiers in Havoc Royale. And drop into Rebirth Island for a spot of Resurgence Casual human and bot combat. Doubling Down on Ranked Play: Call of Duty: Warzone doubles down – literally – with two separate Ranked Play modes; Battle Royale: Rankedat launch running throughout the entire season, and the return of Ranked Play to Rebirth Island at Mid-season. New Features: Cranes and horizontal ziplines Downtown. Lobby Lockdown in The Overlook. Look up and look out!  Dominate foes with a gigantic new skyscraper point of interest, available to Operators within the vicinity of Downtown! The old tenement blocks, Burger Town, and SKN Comm tower have been demolished, and construction crews are finalizing a sprawling skyscraper that dominates the landscape! Look for a full recon tour below. Recon Tour: The Overlook As construction nears completion on this behemoth of a skyscraper, it’s worth gaining a tactical advantage on this monolithic new point of interest. The Overlook Footprint: The “Diamond” and Perimeter Security Checkpoints Drop into the grounds of The Overlook, and you’ll immediately see the grounds of the new skyscraper under construction stretch in a rough diamond shape around the location of the old SKN Comm Tower. Flanked by two massive cranes, the building plot perimeter runs from the corner of the main bank, clockwise past the Post Office, passing the Rothwynn Donna building, northeast to the Museum/Art Gallery, and follows the road around to City Hall.  All the older structureshave been bulldozed in the name of progress! Perimeter Security Checkpoints Military-style security checkpoints have been set up on the corners and roads of the plot of land within the footprint of the structure. Most aren’t secure enough to impede vehicular progress, and some have ramps to allow airborne access. These serve as helpful visual cues that you’re entering the new POI, The Overlook.  Ground Level: Construction Sites Most of the groundwork around the skyscraper is in its final stages of completion, but there are plenty of barriers, fencing, canopies, and containers to use as cover in the area below each of the two giant cranes north and south of the structure. Ground Level: Restaurants Burger Town: Fans of the famous Burger Town Double Cheeseburger will be thrilled to know the fast-food chain has relocated a few meters further down the road from its previous location and is contained within the massive footprint of The Overlook. This outlet also serves as a lower entrance into the grand foyer interior of the building. Sushi Bar: Diagonally opposite the Burger Town, on the northwest side of the POI, is a small Sushi bar, within the footprint of the tower itself. Nestled in the stepped courtyard, you can quickly advance to the north crane or main lobby entrance. It’s also worth pointing out that the sight lines around this POI have significantly changed since Season 03, with much greater visibility across familiar POIs within Downtown and the surrounding districts. North and South Cranes Two huge cranes flank the north and south side of the monolith and are another way to traverse into The Overlook at great height. With five separate platforms attached to the mast to land on, use the vertical Ascender built into the crane’s mast and take an eight-second ascent to a platform just below the jib that extends out to the main winch, and the hoist allowing a jump to The Overlook roof. Operators who aren’t challenged by vertigo will have wild and panoramic views that extend to all of Verdansk’s POIs! Both cranes are also functional, and providing you’ve found the necessary controls in the vicinity, cargo on the hook block and hoist can be summoned and moved to various locations around the tower and nearby Downtown buildings, in case you or your team needs a daring lift! Zip Lines and Additional Rooftop Cover Increasing the ways you can quickly traverse and gaingreat height in your tactical positioning near The Overlook exterior, zip-lines provide a diagonal route to and from the surrounding Downtown building rooftops.  Each also has a small billboard or other protective cover as you reach the zipline mechanism. Access to and from Overlook at the following locations: South: Post Office rooftop to Skydeck. West: Rothwynn Donna building rooftop to Skydeck. Northeast: Art Gallery/Museum rooftop to Skydeck. East: City Hall dome rooftop to Skydeck.  The Overlook: Entrance and Lobby Lockdown The Overlook has a substantial exterior and interior presence, mainly tiered fountains, planting, and stairs up to forecourts and shuttered entrances to the north, east, south, and west, all leading to a central interior lobby. If you find the main entrances shuttered, it means the lobby is experiencing a lockdown. Perhaps there’s a way to breach this security? Are there other ways to get in? The interior lobby has a coffee shop, mezzanine office, stairs, a variety of cover options, and other areas to investigate, not least the marginally terrifying 18-storey elevator ascenders to the northeast and southwest, and even those only get you halfway up the inside of the tower. The Overlook: Atrium and SkydeckJust above the midway point within The Overlook tower is a five-floor interior with exterior Skydeck. Depending on your use of ziplines, you’re able to access a large Atrium with concrete tile and planters and an abundance of plant life. Around the perimeter are rooms, stairwells, and two new elevator shafts, all enabling you to reach the exterior Skydeck. Known by some locals as the “cyclops” tower, due to this large central upper opening you can fly a helicopter through, the Skydeck features a small glass pyramid, some windswept seating, and infiltration to the floors above.  The large, rectangular holes on all four sides provide zipline access around Downtown, as well as daring helicopter maneuvers through the gaps. The ascent doesn’t end here; enter any of the four pillars holding up the roof of the skyscraper for another elevator ascender ride. The Overlook: Penthouse, RoofThe remaining upper floors of The Overlook are nearing completion, meaning health and safety rules aren’t being observed as stringently as you’d like. Top floors up from the Skydeck is the roof. Missing windows, exterior gantries without railings, and exposed exterior ladders mean you’ll be thankful for your parachute.  Depending on which of the tower corners you’re fighting through, this offers another five floors to investigate, including rooms that are fully furnished.  These include a security and server room, a two-floor penthouse level with opulent bedroom, kitchen, and games area, and that’s before the more perturbed of Operators learn the secrets of the] room!  As well as the usual Battle Royale and Resurgence playlists across Verdansk and Rebirth Island, major modes – Clash and Battle Royale: Ranked Play – return to the game, with the intriguing Havoc Royale and the arrival of Resurgence: Ranked Play on Rebirth Island at mid-season! Clash LTM104 players, 15-minute matches 52v52 Team Deathmatch chaos is back in Call of Duty: Warzone! First introduced into Call of Duty: Warzone during Season Five of Black Ops Cold War back in September 2021 as a revamped version of the original “Rumble” mode, Clash is back, bigger than ever, and now includes some impressive, game-changing equipment and power-ups only available in this mode. But what is Clash Mode? This is Team Deathmatch and Domination on a massive scale! Overview, Win Conditions, and Scoring This action-packed team-based mode takes place in and around a specific POI within Verdansk, and pits two teams of 52 playersagainst each other. With no Circle Collapse, no last stand benefit for the Survivor Perk, and your Loadouts available immediately, the plan is simple; your side needs to acquire 500 points by the end of the 15-minute time limit. These are mainly gained by slaying enemies, completing contracts, and participating in the in-game Public Events, as well as the following: Scoring: 1 point per enemy elimination 2 points per enemy elimination with Double Down Power Up 5 points per Contract completed 10 points for capturing a Domination Point10 points for capturing a Bonus Crate or a Cash Crate Clash: Available Locations Expect Clash matches to occur across a sub-section of the main Verdansk map, incorporating several adjacent areas around the following POIs: Quarry Boneyard Farmland PromenadeClash: Available Vehicles With the impetus to reach the enemy forces never more important, expect heavy use of vehicles throughout a Clash Match. The full complement of currently available ground and air vehicles are as follows: Heli Cargo Truck LTVPolaris RZR Pro R 4 Available Contracts There are three available Contracts to complete in Clash Mode: Scavenger Search and Destroy Recon The Scavenger and Recon Contracts work in the same way as they do in Battle Royale Matches. In addition to the usual rewards and in-game cash, you receive five team points for each Contract completed. Search and Destroy Contracts: Everything must go with this new contract, where one team plants a bomb on a Buy Station, and on detonation, they can earn impressive rarity weapons and items from the Buy Stations’ inventory. The other teams can defuse the bomb to earn a Fire Sale for a major discount from the Buy Stations.  Expect the Search and Destroy Contract to be available in Battle Royale, Resurgence, and Plunder Modes, at Mid-Season. In-Match Events and Domination Points During a Clash match, expect several in-match Events to occur. These are like those in Battle Royale Matches, though Clash Events are timed throughout the match rather than related to the Circle Collapse. The available Events are: Domination Points Bonus Points Crates Clash Firesale Cash Crates Power Surge Domination Points Event: Up to three single capture Dom Pointsappear on the map, and these respawn throughout the match. Much like the Multiplayer Mode of the same name, a team that reaches and captures one of the Dom Points receives a reward; in this case, 10 team points. Bonus Points Crates Event: A cargo plane flies across the center of the map, and up to four crates are dropped. Teams are likely to head to the crates as they float to the ground, as capturing a crate awards you with 10 team points. Clash Firesale Event: For the next two minutes, all players can take advantage of a Firesale as two Portable Buy Stations are dropped into the backfield of each team. Additionally, all loot crates are restocked and cash found in crates is also increased.  Cash Crates: Capture oneof the three Cash Crates that drop during this event also nets you 10 team points. Power Surge Event: For the next two minutes, there’s an increased drop rate of Power Ups when you dispatch an enemy player or loot any ground caches. Clash Mode Gameplay Features As well as the previously mentioned new Search and Destroy Contract, Clash comes loaded with features unique to the mode. Here’s the full run-down of what to expect: Buy Stations: Expect Buy Stations to be scattered across a Clash map and roughly split between each team’s area of operations. Portable Buy Stations are also available during the Firesale In-Match Event. Here’s what you can purchase: Armor Plate: Munitions Box: Trophy System: Counter UAV: Sentry Turret: Hand Cannon: Bunker Buster: Cluster Strike: Precision Airstrike: Specialist Perk: New Field Upgrade: Door Barricade: Control access points more easily during mid or close-quarter combat scenarios and delay enemy incursions with the Door Barricade. Fit a barricade to a close single or double door, and a heavy-duty lock attaches toboth sides, preventing the opening or access through the door. This is until the barricade is either removed, or destroyed, usually by using explosives, though gunfire and melee equipment is also an option. Expect the Door Barricade to be loot in Battle Royale and Battle Royale Casual Modes, via the new Care Package Killstreak, all coming at Mid-Season. New Killstreak: Hand Cannon: This high-powered pistol Killstreak, originally available in Multiplayer during Season 01, is available in ground cache as rare loot. Expect a slow rate of fire and finite ammunition, but good handling, and improved hip fire accuracy with faster hip-fire shooting speed. Expect the Hand Cannon to be rare loot in Battle Royale, Battle Royale Casual, Resurgence, and Plunder Modes, via the new Care Package Killstreak, all coming at Mid-Season. Feature: SAM Turrets: Chopper and drone pilots take note; Clash mode maps feature SAM Turrets in various tactical positions across the environment. Spend of in-match cash to activate these anti-air missile batteries and use them up to four times to target any aircraft and drones in the area. If you’re flying in the Heli on the receiving end of a SAM barrage, now’s the time to utilize flares to counter the incoming missiles! Train: If a Clash map features a portion of the large, circular railroad track that the train travels along, then this hulking engine and loot-filled carriages are parked and available to use as added cover and looting opportunities. UAV Towers: Providing you have the in-match cash to activate them, teams can head to and capture a few scattered UAV Towers, allowing pinging of enemy movement across the local area. Clash Mode Powerups  Clash Mode features five differently hued in-match Powerups that are automatically used when found. Available as a possible loot drop or sometimes appearing as dropped loot near the body of an eliminated enemy Operator, these Powerups are color-coded and offer temporary benefits to the Operator who grabs them. All five can be obtained in a single match and expect the frequency of available Powerups to be significantly increased if the in-match Power Surge Event activates. Here’s what each of the five Clash Powerups grant you: Hunter: Highlights enemies and allies in red and blue respectively. Allies are visible through walls. Applies Tracker and High Alert Perks. Speed Boost: Prevents fall damage and provides approximately 20 percent speed boost to your movement. Regeneration Aura: Refills your health and armor at roughly 20 percent per second. Allies within a small radius around you also receive this benefit. The effect does not stack. Double Down: Grants you two points per enemy Operator elimination instead of one. Kill Mag: Refills your active weapon magazine after a kill and quickens your reload. Havoc Royale LTM44 players, 15-minute matches Compete in a Call of Duty: Warzone match like no other, where rule bending modifiers twist the realities of the usual Resurgence gameplay in chaotic and game-changing ways.  Drop into a specially themed area of Verdansk with your Loadout. Every new gas circle activates a different modifier. Adapt fast to sudden changes as Havoc modifiers may impact you, the environment, and even the gameplay rules. Survive the Havoc, be the last team standing, and claim victory! Expect a full rundown of this game mode in the Season 04 Reloaded blog, just prior to Mid-season. Resurgence Casual44 Players, Players & Bots Infil into Rebirth Island with your squad and commit to winning using the regular Resurgence ruleset, but with one important twist; some of your adversaries aren’t human! Whether facing down a bot or not, Resurgence Casual is a great mode to drop into whether you’re warming up, teaching a new player about the game, or you’re wanting a Resurgence match that isn’t quite as extreme as normal. As with Battle Royale Casual or Call of Duty: Warzone Bootcamp, game progression is limited in this mode and results will not count towards or against your stats. This mode also doesn’t count towards your eligibility to accessing Resurgence Ranked Play when it arrives at Mid-Season. Grind your way towards a coveted position in the Top 250 as Battle Royale: Ranked Play becomes the first of two Ranked Play variants to drop in Season 04 within Call of Duty: Warzone. Harness the competitive spirit and earn new rewards for ranking up and advancing through the Skill Divisions, unlocking the following rewards as you go: Season 04 BR Ranked Play Rewards First Season Win: Weapon Charm Get 25 Eliminations: Elimination Sticker Get 100 Eliminations: Elimination Weapon Camo Get 250 Eliminations: Elimination LR 7.62 Weapon Blueprint Silver: “Ranked Season 4 – Silver” Emblem Gold: “Ranked Season 4 – Gold” Emblem and Decal Platinum: “Ranked Season 4 – Platinum” Emblem and Decal Diamond: “Ranked Season 4 – Diamond” Emblem and Decal Crimson: “Ranked Season 4 – Crimson” Emblem and Decal Iridescent: “Ranked Season 4 – Iridescent” Emblem and Decal Top 250: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250” Emblem and Decal Season 04 Champion: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250 Champion” Emblem Ranked Play: ResurgenceTrios, Rebirth Island Craving some real competition on Rebirth Island? Then squad up with your winning Trio, and attempt dominance over the very best players as Resurgence Ranked Play makes its triumphant return! Expect the same rules set you remember during the Call of Duty: Modern Warfare® III era, and an expanded look at this returning, fan-favorite mode in the Season 04 Reloaded blog, just prior to Mid-season. Ranked Play Notes: Battle Royale: Ranked Playruns from Launch Window throughout the entirety of Season 04. Resurgence: Ranked Playbegins at Mid-Season, and runs alongside Battle Royale: Ranked Play, meaning you can play one or both Modes when they are active. The ranking is separate from Battle Royale: Ranked Play. A new Contract, Field Upgrade, Killstreak, Perk, and ATV are all set to drop into Verdansk during Season 04: Clash Mode Features ExpansionAfter an evaluation period in Call of Duty: Warzone’s Clash Mode, expect the following new equipment to become available across additional modes at mid-season. Here’s what to expect: Contract: Search & Destroy: Battle Royale, Resurgence, Plunder. Field Upgrade: Door Barricade: Battle Royale, Battle Royale Casual Modes. Available via Care Package. Killstreak: Hand Cannon: Battle Royale, Battle Royale Casual, and Plunder Modes. Available via Care Package. Killstreak: Care PackageOpen ground loot caches for a rare chance to obtain the Care Package, a throwable Killstreak that, when lobbed, explodes into trail of smoke, after which a loadout-sized crate falls from the skies. Open this crate for a chance to obtain rare loot including rare equipment, the Specialist Perk, and more. New Perk: Loot MasterAvailable only as Ground Loot during Resurgence and Plunder matches, the Loot Master Perk allows you to maximize your scavenging potential and gear up faster by increasing the amount of loot you find while opening caches. Gain the early advantage or sustain yourself during prolonged engagements. Expect an increased drop rate for equipped weapon ammo, a higher chance to find tacticals and lethals, more cash, and a greater chance at field upgrades, killstreaks, and other high-tier gear. ATV: Polaris Sportsman XP 1000Added to the vehicle pool is the Polaris Sportsman XP 1000, a real wild ride allowing you to hit the Verdansk goat trails in comfort with legendary suspension, great clearance and traction, and versatility for positioning up to three Operators on the surface of the vehicle. Compared to the current ATV, the wheelbase and size of the Sportsman XP 1000 offers more stability than ever before.  Note: Call of Duty: Warzone Events: Check the General section later in this blog to uncover the full complement of events for this mode across Season 04. General ContentCall of Duty: General Content SummaryWeapons Detail: Five new weapons arrive in Season 04, including two at launch: the LC10 SMG and FFAR 1 Assault Rifle. Later in the season, get your hands on the , Essex Model 07 Marksman Rifle, Olympia Special weapon and Pickaxe Melee weapon, and change up your playstyle with new attachments. The Events Horizon: Season 04 is packed with Events, including Rivals, Ballerina, and even more coming mid-season.. Plus, prove your worth across the Zombies leaderboards and become King of the Dead! Battle Pass and BlackCell: The Season 04 Battle Pass brings Stitch and brutal BlackCell Operator Omen to the forefront alongside new Weapon Blueprints, Operator Skins, Calling Cards, Finishing Moves, Emotes, and more in a mix of free and premium tiers. Free tiers include two new base weapons and the G-Grip Tactical Foregrip. Season 04 Operators: Stitch returns after being freed from prison, headlining the new Battle Pass next to the sinister Omen leading BlackCell. Plus, deploy as assassin Eve Macarro in a collaboration with Ballerina, followed by much more at the mid-season. CDL Announcements: Major IV is almost here! Find out where to watch, plus the in-game rewards you can unlock, just for tuning in! Primary Weapon: LC10SMG, Battle Pass Page 3, Page 14 Battle Pass Blueprint Levels: 38 MAGS: 4 MAG SIZE: 34 Mastery Badges: Yes Attachments: Optic, Muzzle, Barrel, Underbarrel, Magazine, Rear Grip, Stock, Laser, Fire Mods Customize Options: Skins, Camos and Reticle Unlocks, Accessories, Decals, Stickers. Full-auto submachine gun. Excellent accuracy and range, with a moderate rate of fire. Average mobility and very slow handling for its class. Returning after its debut in Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War, the LC10 SMG spits out rounds fast coupled with good accuracy and range, moderate damage, and a quick reload to get you back into the fight. The weapon performs well off the hip or down sights, with 34 rounds in the base magazine for a hefty ammo supply. Via Gunsmith, equip a variety of improvements such as a Laser for improved hipfire spread and an updated Barrel to further extend the weapon’s respectable damage range. Primary Weapon: FFAR 1Assault Rifle, Battle Pass Page 6, Page 11 HVT Tier Battle Pass Blueprint Levels: 42 MAGS: 3 MAG SIZE: 30 Mastery Badges: Yes Attachments: Optic, Muzzle, Barrel, Underbarrel, Magazine, Rear Grip, Stock, Laser, Fire Mods Customize Options: Skins, Camo and Reticle Unlocks, Accessories, Decals, Stickers.  Full-auto assault rifle. Very high rate of fire and excellent CQB power, but slower handling and mobility. Boasting a blazing fast fire rate that rivals the SMG weapon class, this bullpup Assault Rifle is designed for taking down targets fast. The somewhat unpredictable recoil favors burst fire when tackling distant targets, but once you’re locked on it’s all over for them. Supporting a variety of Underbarrel Launcher attachments, use Gunsmith to add greater versatility to the weapon. Running low on ammo? Grab an Extended Mag while you’re at it. Primary Weapon: Essex Model 07Marksman Rifle, Event Reward Levels: 38 MAGS: 3 MAG SIZE: 8 Mastery Badges: Yes Attachments: Optic, Muzzle, Barrel, Underbarrel, Magazine, Lever, Stock, Laser, Fire Mods Customize Options: Skins, Camo and Reticle Unlocks, Accessories, Decals, Stickers. Lever-action marksman rifle. High damage potential. Balanced by slower rate of fire and handling. Inflict heavy critical point damage with this lever-action tactical rifle. An ideal tool for the new sheriff in town, this classic armament offers smooth handling with shots that quickly recenter after kicking up. Choose from a variety of Levers to further customize the weapon’s action, improving ADS speed, sprint to fire speed, and other movement abilities.  Special Weapon: OlympiaSpecial, Event Reward Levels: 30 MAGS: 8 MAG SIZE: 2 Mastery Badges: Yes Attachments: Barrel, Stock Customize Options: Skins, Camos, Accessories, Decals, Stickers. Double-barrel shotgun. Very high damage and respectable range but requires frequent reloading. The double-barrel Olympia – not seen since Black Ops 3 – makes its debut in Black Ops 6, returning as a Special Weapon that makes for the perfect backup when entering tight spaces. The Olympia holds two shots at a time, each spraying multiple pellets when your Operator pulls the trigger. Light customization via the Short Barrel and Cut-Off Stock attachments gives you some control over the weapon’s playstyle, but the fundamentals remain the same: get up close and make your shots count. Fire down the sight for a tighter pellet spread or shoot off the hip to inflict damage over a wider area. Melee Weapon: PickaxeMelee, Event Reward Levels: 30 Mastery Badges: Yes Attachments: None Customize Options: Skins. One-hit kill. Medium attack speed. Short range. Without a Pickaxe, you’ll be lost in the tundra. Bring the right tool for the job when deploying to Iceland in Season 04’s Multiplayer maps, starting with this deadly Melee weapon that downs unarmored enemies with brutal severity. Though its range is short, the Pickaxe’s combination of rapid slashes and overhead swipes will keep enemies frozen in their tracks. Close the distance and say farewell. G-GripSMGs, Assault Rifles, Battle Pass Page 7 Reward Vertical foregrip with integrated laser for improved firing stability, horizontal recoil control, and tightened spread when transitioning between hipfire and aiming down sights. Beam: Blue. Blocks Laser attachments. Stryder .22 3-Round Burst ModStryder .22 Pistol, Event Reward Convert the Stryder .22 into a 3-round burst. Drastically improves fire rate and maintains manageable gun kick but alters the weapon’s damage profile outside of the effective range. SVD Full Auto ModSVD Sniper Rifle, Event Reward Convert the SVD from semi-auto to full-auto functionality, ramping up the speed of your damage output and drastically improving recoil and handling. TR2 CQB Auto ConversionTR2 Marksman Rifle, Event Reward Alter the TR2 Marksman Rifle to fire handgun caliber rounds, resulting in a Marksman Rifle with a compact frame and fully automatic capabilities that rival fire rates of an SMG! Stitch Returns to Action in the Season 04 Battle Pass Stitch returns to the fray, leading this season’s Battle Pass content in a shocking team up with Adler. Purchase the Season 04 Battle Pass for 1,100 COD Points or the Season 04 Battle Pass Bundle for 2,400 COD Points to immediately unlock the Instant Rewards Page of the Battle Pass, including the following items: 10% Battle Pass XP Boost The new “Supermax” Stitch Operator and “Supermax BlackCell” Stitch Operator Skin for those who purchase BlackCell The “Lock Up” Legendary Blueprint for the Feng 82 LMG The “Try Me!” Emote The “Untamable” Large Decal Start to unlock up to 1,100 COD Points as you progress through the Battle Pass The Season 04 Battle Pass includes over 110 pieces of unlockable contentincluding two new Base Weapons, the G-Grip Tactical Foregrip Attachment, and several unlockable mil-sim style skins for Bailey, Payne, Grey, Caine, Brutus, Toro, Adler, Nazir, and Marshall. Stay tuned for the BlackCell, Battle Pass and Store Bundles blog prior to Season 04 launch for more details. BlackCell Offerings When the job needs to get done, summon Omen, the otherworldly Operator leading BlackCell content in Season 04. The menacing Operator and his three-headed guard dog are joined by a cast of infected, black and purple-hued Operator Skins and Weapon Blueprints earned exclusively through BlackCell. BlackCell owners can access the Season 04 Battle Pass via the exclusive BlackCell Page, instantly unlocking the following items: The “Omen” BlackCell Operator and Skin 10% XP Boost 1,100 COD Points The “Guard Dog” Companion Finishing Move The “Hellblock” Mastercraft Blueprint for the Ladra SMG The “Kill Tally” Gun Screen The “BlackCell” Clan TagBlackCell owners get access to page after page of additional exclusive rewards within the Season 04 Battle Pass, including: Seven BlackCell-exclusive skins for Stitch, Bailey, Payne, Caine, Brutus, and Adler.  Seven BlackCell-exclusive Weapon Blueprints for the Krig C, XMG, SWAT 5.56, ASG-98, FFAR 1, Model L, LC10Over 130 item rewardsfor those who fully complete the Season 04 BlackCell Battle Pass. As usual, players who upgrade to BlackCell after purchasing the Battle Pass will also receive back the COD Points they spent. BlackCell Daily Challenges: Players with BlackCell will receive additional Daily Challenges throughout Season 04 for Multiplayer, Zombies, and Call of Duty: Warzone, giving even more chances to rake in the XP during your play sessions! BlackCell Loyalty Bonus: Players who purchased BlackCell in a previous Black Ops 6season and go on to purchase Season 04 BlackCell will earn a permanent 10% Player and Weapon XP Loyalty Bonus, up to 30% for players who purchased Season 01, Season 02, and Season 03 BlackCell! The return of Stitch signals a shift in the battles ahead, requiring new Operators to meet the demands of the intensifying conflict. Predict a swift demise for your opponents with Omen leading BlackCell, joined by Stitch at the head of the Battle Pass plus a special appearance by Eve Macarro from Ballerina. Omen“Omen” Operator: BlackCell Instant Reward Page It’s time for lockdown. Omen is a presence who strikes fear even in the world’s most dangerous criminals, with an almost preternatural ability to keep even the most sinister prisoners in line. Stitch“Supermax” and “Yard Dog” Skins: Battle Pass Instant Reward Page, Battle Pass Completion Page Until recently, Stitch was assumed dead. Instead of eliminating his enemy, however, Adler sent him off to a black site prison. Now the time has come, and following a daring jailbreak, Stitch is once again free. Adler needs his help cracking the codenames that will finally lead to the Pantheon moles, but at what cost? BallerinaStore Bundle Seeking revenge for her slain father, Eve Macarro embarks on a relentless mission against the High Table’s most feared opponents in Ballerina, the highly anticipated new action film from the World of John Wick. Deploy as the elite assassin in one of two looks in the Ballerina Bundle arriving in Season 04. Participate in a new round of scheduled Events across Multiplayer, Zombies, and Call of Duty: Warzone. Earn rewards like new weapons, special attachments, and more. Here’s a first look at the Events to come: Event: BallerinaActivation Dates: June 5 to June 12 Total Rewards: 10Enter the world of John Wick with the new Ballerina Event. Prove your capabilities as a supreme assassin by slaying your way across Multiplayer, Zombies, and Call of Duty: Warzone. Rewards include the new Essex Model 07 Marksman Rifle and a Ballerina-themed Nunchuck Melee Blueprint for BlackCell Owners. Event: RivalsActivation Dates: June 12 to June 26 Total Rewards: 15Enemies become allies in the Rivals Event, when Stitch brings his code-cracking expertise to help uncover the real names of the final Pantheon moles in the CIA. The goal is simple; prove you’re the most proficient Operator by earning XP across all game modes and unlock a plethora of impressive free items. Dominate your enemies to become the first to unlock rewards including the Stryder .22 3-Round Burst Modand Grim Reaper. Events: King of the Dead, Master of GriefActivation Dates: June 26 to July 3 Activation Dates: July 10 to July 17 King of the Dead: “Eliminate zombies in any Zombie mode to earn points to climb the leaderboard.” Master of Grief: “Collect Essence in Grief to earn points to climb the leaderboard.” Earn points by slaying all types of undead! As you’d expect, you receive more points for dispatching the harder zombie types. This, in turn, causes you to climb the Zombies leaderboard, and once the Event is over, rewards will be granted based on your leaderboard position. Everyone receives some kind of reward, but to obtain the really good stuff, it’s time to perfect your Special and Elite Zombies slaying!  Season 04 brings new Bundles to the Store, including a special crossover event with Ballerina. Get more intel in the Season 04 BlackCell, Battle Pass, and Bundles blog arriving before launch. Tracer Pack: Ballerina Choose one of two Operator Skins for Eve, a red sequin dress as “Eve Macarro” or a sleek black professional fit as the “Ruska Rogue.” Bring light to the darkness with three Legendary Weapon Blueprints featuring High Table Coin Tracers and High Table Coin Death FX: the “Relevé” AK-74 Assault Rifle, “Plié” Saug SMG, and the “Arabesque” 9MM PM Pistol. For a snazzier elimination, take them out with the “Dance With Death” Finishing Move. Balance lethality and elegance with additional Ballerina themed content, including the “Pirouette” Emote, “Keepsake” Weapon Charm, animated “Caged Grace” Emblem, animated “Pas de Duex Calling Card, and the “Take a Bow” Loading Screen. Tracer Pack: Ink and Smoke Reactive Ultra Skin Add some class to your deployments with the cel-shaded, black and greyscale “Hardboiled” Ultra Operator Skin for Weaver, accompanied by the Reactive “Lethal Inspection” AMES 85 Assault Rifle and “Personal Detective” ASG-89 Shotgun Weapon Blueprints, both featuring Noir Tracers and Ink Annihilation Death FX. For a closer finish, leap for their throats using the “Wire Cut” Finishing Move. When taking on the undead, equip the “Search Engine” Wonder Weapon skin for the Thrustodyne M23 and show off your Zombies credentials with the “Sidepiece” Weapon Charm, “Dead Noir” Weapon Sticker, “Evidence” Spray, “Greyscale” Loading Screen, and the consumable Time Out GobbleGum. Other Incoming Bundles There’s plenty more awesome new content arriving in the Season 04 Store, including the “Tracer Pack: Olympus Bolt Mastercraft Ultra Skin” Bundle, featuring an electrifying Mastercraft Weapon Blueprint for the new LC10 SMG alongside a divine Ultra Operator Skin for Caine. Also incoming is the “Tracer Pack: System Breach” Bundle, and the “Tracer Pack: The Goat Ultra Skin” Bundle with a Goat Companion Finishing Move. See more of the season’s upcoming Bundles and more in the Season 04 BlackCell, Battle Pass, and Store Bundle blog. Call of Duty League, the pinnacle of competitive Call of Duty, is bringing its fourth and final Major of the season to the DreamHack Dallas show floor. Guests with a CDL add-on ticket can watch Major IV live, where the 12 Call of Duty League teams will battle it out for the final CDL points to qualify for 2025 Call of Duty League Championship in June. Ensure you get into the action by tuning in and watching Major IV live on YouTube. Be sure to link your YouTube account with your Activision ID Account to earn some special viewership rewards. Click here for more intel. The event starts at 10:300 AM PT Friday, May 23, and continuing at 10:30 AM PT Saturday May 24 with the Finals beginning at 10:30 AM PT Sunday May 25.  Black Ops 6 is available now, and now’s definitely the time to experience the spy action thriller Campaign, the in-depth tactical chaos of best-in-class Multiplayer, and to soak in the gory glory of an incredible round-based Zombies experience with five maps and the brand-new Grief mode! Click here to Purchase Black Ops 6. © 2025 Activision Publishing, Inc. ACTIVISION, CALL OF DUTY, CALL OF DUTY WARZONE, MODERN WARFARE, CALL OF DUTY LEAGUE, and CALL OF DUTY BLACK OPS are trademarks of Activision Publishing, Inc. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective owners. For more information, please visit www.callofduty.com and www.youtube.com/callofduty, and follow @Activision and @CallofDuty on X, Instagram, and Facebook. For Call of Duty Updates, follow @CODUpdates on X. ®, TM & © 2025 Lions Gate Entertainment Inc. and related companies. All Rights Reserved. #call #duty #black #ops #warzone
    WWW.CALLOFDUTY.COM
    Call of Duty: Black Ops 6 and Warzone Season 04: Full Intel Revealed!
    Old Enemies, New Alliances: Black Ops 6 Season 04 is Here! Though he once had the chance to end Vikhor “Stitch” Kuzmin’s reign of terror, Adler spared his nemesis after they met at the culmination of Black Ops Cold War. Latest intel reveals Kuzmin was later captured and locked up in an Icelandic CIA black site until he might prove useful. Following the events and evidence uncovered by the deceased CIA Agent Jason Hudson, that day has come, and in an unlikely team up, Adler and team have broken Stitch out from his confinement, seeking his help to crack the codenames needed to find the Pantheon moles. With Verdansk once again an area of operations for deployment, what other plans might Stitch have in store? For now, Adler needs him to complete the mission at hand.  To succeed, the two must put their past behind them in pursuit of a new goal. Get in on the action when this stacked offering of free and premium content comes to Call of Duty®: Black Ops 6, launching in Season 04 on Thursday, May 29 at 9AM PT across all platforms. Nomenclature Note: Throughout the blog, you’ll see references to when gameplay content launches. Here are what these various suffixes mean: “Launch”: Expect to access this content immediately at the Season launch “Launch Window”: Expect to access this content between launch and up to 72 hours after launch.  “In Season”: Expect to access this content during the season, but before either the mid-season or next season arrives. “Mid-Season”: Expect to access this content at Mid-Season or later. All content timing may be subject to change. Multiplayer Content Summary Five MP Maps: Drop into Icelandic AOs with three new maps at launch including the Shutdown and Fugitive 6v6 Core maps and the Blitz Strike map. In the mid-season, party it up in Eclipse and play a reimagined Fringe. New and Returning Modes: Pick up dog tags to drain the enemy’s reserves in Team Elimination, a fun new twist on the Kill Confirmed formula. Make every bullet count with the return of One in the Chamber and get festive in the Party Ops Limited-Time Mode. Additional Equipment: The Grim Reaper Scorestreak returns from the original Black Ops, offering an explosive payload that’s guaranteed to blow the competition sky high. Season 04 Ranked Play: Challenge the best of the best, get those wins, and climb the Ranks in a new season of Multiplayer Ranked Play, with all-new rewards and bragging rights. Shutdown (Launch) Brand-New, Core, 6v6, Small-Sized Before breaking out Stitch, Adler and team first need to cut off the power to the black site prison, bringing them to a hydroelectric plant built on the rugged volcanic terrain of Iceland. Fight in and around the central building housing the now wrecked Turbine or dive down the Sluice into the Lake, its waters hugging the plant’s south end by the Transformers. Jump up by the red container to target enemies from far out or swim back onshore to reach the Atrium and Parking. Head to the north side to fight in the rugged Yard, away from the shoreline and bookended by the Pumphouse and Canteen. It’s a quick run to the Turbine from here, giving you good map coverage down the middle. If things get too hot, you can always drop down the Chute and swim your way to safety.  Fugitive (Launch) Brand-New, Core, 6v6, Medium-Sized Deploy to a secret CIA black site in a remote part of Iceland, the very location where Stitch has been imprisoned until Adler brings him in as an unlikely ally for an urgent operation. With the power out, Adler and his crew seize their chance to infiltrate the prison, climbing, zipping, and battling their way through the frozen compound. Upon reaching their target, Adler and Stitch strike a deal. Following the jailbreak, the alarms are blaring and warnings of a power failure light up the Cell Block. Though the area may appear smaller than expected when first glancing at the minimap, the prison’s intricate layout presents multiple levels and shortcuts to the various outside areas including the Checkpoint, Courtyard, and Recreation Yard. In the upper Cell Block, newly opened cells present the danger of ambush. Be on guard and look for ziplines for quick access to your next target. Blitz (Launch) Brand-New, Strike, 6v6/2v2, Small-Sized Traffic comes to a halt as Pantheon reinforcements race toward the prison but get ambushed by the Rogue team. Leave the road and seek out targets over the rugged terrain of the Cliffside or move inland, ambushing enemies at the Waterfall. To approach the battle head on, move down the central Bridge, using the scattered convoy for cover. Jump down from the center to move underneath the Bridge, a great means of pivoting to a new location. Though a small map overall, Blitz’s long lanes leave room for marksmen to shine. Eclipse (Mid-Season) Brand-New, Strike, 6v6/2v2, Small-Sized Stitch and the team arrive in Avalon, slipping into the shadows of an underground nightclub to discuss business. The neon lights flicker as they form a plan to break the Pantheon codenames, but the meeting is cut short when Pantheon agents storm in. Show off your best moves on the dance floor, dodging shots and flanking targets down the sides where seating offers party goers a chance to rest and order a drink from the bar. Ambush passing enemies from the DJ booth and then break through the broken façades on the walls, escaping into the halls. Fringe (Mid-Season) Remaster, Core, 6v6, Medium-Sized Revisit Fringe from Call of Duty: Black Ops 3, reimagined for the first time ever in Black Ops 6. Attend the grand opening of the Rolling Hills distillery, established in an idyllic setting with several navigable buildings and the surrounding grounds. Battle along the main Road or dive into the Bar for a closer fight. Watch for sharpshooters in the upper Barn and along the Bridge and relive the thrill of trying to make it out alive through the narrow Loading route. The first half of Season 04 brings two exciting Multiplayer modes: Team Elimination and One in the Chamber. In the mid-season, loosen up in the Party Ops Limited Time Mode. Team Elimination (Launch) In this twist on Kill Confirmed, two teams are given a limited amount of lives each round as they fight to be the last surviving team. Players drop a dog tag on death that can be picked up by the enemy to confirm the kill or by a teammate to deny the opposing team. Survive longer than the other team or hold the most remaining lives when the timer ends to win the round. Balance aggression and defense as you seek out enemy dog tags while preserving your life. Dig in with your teammates to counter enemy attacks and then ask for cover while you collect the droppings. Picking up tags is a great way to earn your next Scorestreak, so stay aggressive and keep up the momentum. Once your team’s life pool is drained, your remaining teammates can still revive you where you were last killed in a last-ditch effort to snatch victory from the jaws of defeat. One in the Chamber (In-Season) Another Black Ops fan-favorite mode returns as One in the Chamber shows up in Season 04! In this free-for-all mode, each Operator is given one pistol, one bullet, a knife, and three lives. Precision is king, as bullets always eliminate on impact and the only way to earn another bullet is to get an elimination. Stay cool, aim true, and preserve your lives while aiming for the highest score. UAV scans keep the action moving, so don’t try to hide. At the end of the match, the top three scoring Operators will step up to the Winner’s Circle. Party Ops (Mid-Season) Get the party started with a new Limited-Time Mode arriving later in the season: Compete in a randomized set of party themed minigames. The player with the highest score at the end of the match wins it all. The devastating Grim Reaper Scorestreak is back from the original Black Ops, unleashing massive hits on other Operators and Scorestreaks alike. New Scorestreak Scorestreak: Grim Reaper (In-Season) Type: Lethal Score: 725 Mastery Badges: Yes Powerful semi-automatic launcher that can fire up to four rockets in one load. Wield the Grim Reaper, a quad tube loaded Launcher capable of inflicting heavy damage on enemies. Whether targeting Operators or locking on to enemy Scorestreaks, the Grim Reaper’s payload delivers a huge explosion. The weapon is lost if you’re taken out, so save it for the right moment and bring backup to ensure you have the protection needed to unleash havoc.  Season 04 Ranked Play Overview Prove you’re the very best by dedicating your Multiplayer match time to Ranked Play, using the same settings, maps, modes, and weapon restrictions used by the Call of Duty League™. Win matches to earn SR (Skill Rating) and progress through the Ranks while earning career rewards like Rank Skins and Win Challenge rewards. As usual, match wins ensure you progress through the Ranks throughout Season 04 to earn new seasonal rewards like a new Pro Issue Weapon Blueprint, Rank-themed Calling Cards, Ranked Charms, and more: Season 04 Ranked Play Rewards Get 10 Wins: “Pro Reissue AMES 85” AMES 85 Weapon Blueprint Get 100 Wins: “Ranked Season 4 – 100 Wins” Large Decal Silver: “Ranked Season 4 – Silver” Calling Card Gold: “Ranked Season 4 – Gold” Calling Card and Charm Platinum: “Ranked Season 4 – Platinum” Calling Card and Charm Diamond: “Ranked Season 4 – Diamond” Calling Card and Charm Crimson: “Ranked Season 4 – Crimson” Calling Card and Charm Iridescent: “Ranked Season 4 – Iridescent” Calling Card and Charm Top 250: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250” Calling Card and Charm Season 04 Champion: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250 Champion” Calling Card Note: Multiplayer Events: Check the General section later in this blog to uncover the full complement of events for this mode across Season 04. Zombies Content Summary Grief Returns! Drop into this epic 4v4 competitive battle on all maps, outlasting the opposition while securing Capture Zones to debuff and Grief your opponents. The last team still standing wins! Additional Gameplay Content: Crack open the armored undead and create area-of-effect explosions with the Shatter Blast Ammo Mod, chew over the impressive effects of three new GobbleGums, and create even bigger explosions with the Grim Reaper Support launcher. New Modes and More: Unlock hidden rewards with more Dark Ops Challenges, then prepare to face down a powered-up Abomination, survive as long as you can in the Starting Room LTM, and prove your Leaderboard worth by zombie slaying for bragging rights and rewards! 4v4 competitive mode where two teams outwit and outlast each other. Capture zones to debuff enemies. No damage against other players. Respawns every third round. Available Maps: Liberty Falls, Terminus, Citadelle des Morts, The Tomb, Shattered Veil. Restricted: Wonder Weapons, GobbleGums: Exit Strategy, Idle Eyes, Wonderbar!, Time Out, and Flavor Hex (Season 04 GobbleGum).  Not seen since Black Ops 2, Grief returns to Zombies! This fan-favorite mode pits two teams of four against each other, with both sides vying to out-survive the other. As the battlelines are drawn between S.A.M. and Director Richtofen, each team pledges their support to one of these rivals at the start of a match, subsequently receiving handler comms support from one of them throughout the ensuing chaos. Indirect PvP Combat The action is almost immediate as both teams drop into either side of the same Grief Arena within the chosen Zombies map, and indirect PvP combat comes into effect: The two teams of four players can’t outright kill members of the enemy team, but can interact with them by body-blocking, or slowing them  by using melee, bullet-based weapons, or projectiles.  Victory Conditions: The winning team is the one that manages to “Grief” their rivals into being killed or entering a downed state. As long as one or more team members are upright, the match continues! Grief Arena Features The action is constant and can get incredibly chaotic, due in part to your proximity to your opponents and the hordes of undead encroaching on your team, thanks to the Arena being a sub-section of the main Zombies map. These are known as “Grief Arenas.” Within a Grief Arena are a variety of features: An Open Environment: Grief Arenas are clearly defined areas where any critical doors have already been opened, and the power will already have been turned on. All other Door Buys are inactive. Both teams spawn on opposite sides of the Arena, each in a group of four. Player Respawning: Any team members that are downed – provided one or more of their team are still alive – can be revived at any time, though rival teams, undead enemies, and Shock Charges can hamper this action! Additionally, a Wave Respawner triggers every third round, automatically reviving any eliminated teammates from both teams. Join In Progress: Any player not in the game can join up until Round 10 has been completed and has a small grace period to orient themselves before they’re swarmed by zombies. Additionally, if a team has won back-to-back Capture Zones (see below), join-in-progress is not available. Essence and Salvage: Unlike in Standard playlists, Salvage pickups in Grief are worth 100 Salvage, visible to all players, and can only be picked up by the first player to grab it. Zombies: Rounds will progress faster than usual and the amount of zombies per round has been increased to account for 8 players! All undead entities – except for bosses – are to be expected. If players fail to kill zombies, the round will turn. Core Mechanics: The Arsenal, Pack-a-Punch, Mystery Box, Crafting Tables, Perk machines, GobbleGum machine (with Exit Strategy, Idle Eyes, Wonderbar!, Time Out, and Flavor Hex restricted), Armor Wall Buys, and Der Wunderfizz machine are available in a Grief Arena where they normally reside, or in a new location if they don’t normally exist in this portion of their respective maps. Note: While the current GobbleGum restrictions are in place to keep matches dynamic yet balanced, additional restrictions may be made in the future as the developers keep an eye on game balance, similar to Ranked Play. Capture Zones: Appearing at a regular cadence during a match, these are smaller areas within a Grief Arena where players are required to stand and earn specific types of kills to trigger a Grief  on the opposing team. Plan A: Survive! Plan B: Capture Zones! Keeping your team upright and focused on undead slaying for longer than your rivals is the main plan in this mode. However, there’s an important secondary focus you need to plan for: Capturing zones and “Griefing” your rival team! Capture Zones appear at regular intervals throughout a match, and after stepping through the glowing perimeter, you and your team can secure the Zone by staying inside it and dispatching zombies. Beckon your crew into a Zone to quicken the zombie slaying, and once your kill count meets the requirement, a Grief is triggered on the opposition. Note that if neither team reaches this requirement within the countdown inside a Capture Zone, the Grief is applied to both teams. What is a Grief? It’s a temporary debuff, penalty, or negative gameplay mechanic that you can inflict on your rival team at a Capture Zone. The type of Grief is shown at the objective tracker within a Capture Zone. Here are the possible Griefs you’re aiming to inflict on your foes: Weapon Nerf: The affected players inflict considerably reduced damage to zombie enemies. Ammo Drain: All ammo-based weapons, including those stowed, receive an ammo drain with bullets or shells being removed constantly while the Grief is active. Zombie Ambush: An Elite zombie is summoned, and it solely focuses its killing power on the enemy team until either the Elite or the team are defeated, or the timer runs out. Weapon Carousel: The rival players’ weapons are randomly swapped every few seconds. Frozen: This Grief reduces the enemy players’ movement, along with frost and ice coating the characters. Griefs and Capture Zones also introduce new score types, including: Capture Zone Kill: Awarded to a player who defeated a zombie type during a successful Capture Zone completion. Capture Zone Win: Awarded to all players on a team who successfully commandeer a Capture Zone. Capture Zone Elite Kill: Awarded to a player who slays an Elite spawned in a Capture Zone. Available Grief Arenas (11 Arenas, Launch) A total of 11 different Grief Arenas are available in this mode. Here’s a list along with a brief description of the points of interest within each one: Liberty Falls Arena 1: Pump & Pay, Motor Lodge, and Fuller’s Liberty Lanes Liberty Falls Arena 2: Dark Aether Church, Cemetery, Hilltop Terminus Arena 1: Bio Lab Terminus Arena 2: Crab Island  Citadelle des Morts Arena: Courtyard, Ramparts, and Entrance Hall The Tomb Arena 1: Dig Site, Mausoleum The Tomb Arena 2: Dark Aether Nexus Shattered Veil Arena 1: Garden Pond, Lower Terrace Shattered Veil Arena 2: Upper Terrace, Shem’s Henge, Motor Court Shattered Veil Arena 3: Mansion Foyer, Overlook, East Foyer, Library Shattered Veil Arena 4: West Hallways, Southwest Balcony, Bottlery Access the following new content within all five Zombies Maps (unless otherwise stated) throughout Season 04: Dark Ops Challenges (Launch) A mysterious new set of hidden Calling Cards and bounteous amounts of XP are available at the start of Season 04, thanks to a fresh drop of Zombies Dark Ops Challenges. Who knows... maybe there’s even one for Grief. All further information is [[REDACTED]]. New LTM: Starting Room (Mid-Season) Inspired by the starting room in the classic “Moon” Zombies map, drop in with up to three of your Zombies crew into a more straightforward but challenging experience where you’re locked into the first zone of a map. Raptor One is gone, and those undead hordes are only getting stronger, but all doors in the initial zone are locked. Survive to the highest round you can! New LTM: Abomination Challenge (Mid-Season) Enter a warped version of Liberty Falls during this new Mid-Season Event, and hunt down an ultra-powered-up Abomination. Perhaps it’s wise to bring backup. Wreck even the most battle-hardened undead threat with the explosive power of the Shatter Blast Ammo Mod, then drop even more devastating firepower on the hordes with the Grim Reaper Support launcher. There’s three new chewables, too! Ammo Mod: Shatter Blast (Launch) Available: Augments Menu, and In-Game (Pause Menu) “Bullets deal explosive damage. Each bullet has a chance to create an explosion that destroys armor.” Modify your ammunition to explode the toughened armor of certain normal and Special undead enemies. This mod also has a second benefit, creating an area-of-effect blast radius at the same time, whether any armor is shattered or not.  Due to the somewhat chaotic nature of this modification, there is a random chance of the Shatter Blast effect triggering, and it won’t happen every time you fire. Also expect a cooldown period after the effect. Note that Shatter Blast doesn’t directly affect Elite enemies (pending some Augment research!), but area-of-effect explosions can still damage them. You are wise to wrangle your undead into hordes so they’re near each other, to really inflict some damage! Shatter Blast: Major Augments Research the following Augments to further customize this Ammo Mod. Big Game Shatter Blast can be used against Elite enemies. Expect an impressively sized explosion. Blast Chain On explosion, three additional explosions occur in rapid succession. Blast Repair For every enemy that has its armor destroyed by Shatter Blast, armor health will be restored for the player. Shatter Blast: Minor Augments Blast Zone Increase the size of the explosion. Blast Boost Increase the explosion damage. Blast Wave Normal enemies are knocked down by the explosion. New GobbleGums (Launch) Crack your teeth on three new GobbleGums, available across all maps once you earn or unlock them and equip them in your GobbleGum Loadout Pack. Explosive Flourish (Epic): Reloading your weapon creates an explosion around you. GobbleGum lasts 2 minutes. Flavor Hex (Legendary): Activates a random Ultra GobbleGum. Rainburps (Whimsical): Zombies killed belch sparkly rainbow bubbles. Lasts 3 minutes. Additional Support Weapon: Grim Reaper (In-Season) Available: Rivals Event reward Salvage: 2000 Hammer away at the Crafting Table and assemble a powerful semi-automatic launcher known as the Grim Reaper, which deals out lethal damage to the undead with up to a quartet of missiles fired in one load. With a capacity to carry up to a dozen rockets, and the ability to fire them individually or as a quartet of devastation, this can level a courtyard of undead with a single launch! Unlock this Support weapon once you’ve earned it via the Rivals Event. Note: Zombies Events: Check the General section later in this blog to uncover a first look at events for this mode across Season 04, including the King of the Dead Leaderboard challenge! Call of Duty: Warzone Content Summary New Point of Interest: The towering skyscraper known as The Overlook comes to Downtown Verdansk, with ziplines, cranes, and an impressive interior to explore. New and Limited Time Modes: Clash mode – the massive 52v52 Verdansk Deathmatch – is back! Join 51 other Operators in a chaotic firefight to claim domination points and defeat foes. Then compete in a specially themed area of Verdansk in a match with rule-bending modifiers in Havoc Royale. And drop into Rebirth Island for a spot of Resurgence Casual human and bot combat. Doubling Down on Ranked Play: Call of Duty: Warzone doubles down – literally – with two separate Ranked Play modes; Battle Royale: Ranked (Verdansk) at launch running throughout the entire season, and the return of Ranked Play to Rebirth Island at Mid-season. New Features: Cranes and horizontal ziplines Downtown. Lobby Lockdown in The Overlook. Look up and look out!  Dominate foes with a gigantic new skyscraper point of interest, available to Operators within the vicinity of Downtown! The old tenement blocks, Burger Town, and SKN Comm tower have been demolished, and construction crews are finalizing a sprawling skyscraper that dominates the landscape! Look for a full recon tour below. Recon Tour: The Overlook As construction nears completion on this behemoth of a skyscraper (more than twice the height of any previous building within the Verdansk conurbation), it’s worth gaining a tactical advantage on this monolithic new point of interest. The Overlook Footprint: The “Diamond” and Perimeter Security Checkpoints Drop into the grounds of The Overlook, and you’ll immediately see the grounds of the new skyscraper under construction stretch in a rough diamond shape around the location of the old SKN Comm Tower. Flanked by two massive cranes, the building plot perimeter runs from the corner of the main bank, clockwise past the Post Office, passing the Rothwynn Donna building, northeast to the Museum/Art Gallery, and follows the road around to City Hall.  All the older structures (the Burger Town, low-rise tenement blocks, the building site, and the small coffee shop and bar across from the Museum) have been bulldozed in the name of progress! Perimeter Security Checkpoints Military-style security checkpoints have been set up on the corners and roads of the plot of land within the footprint of the structure. Most aren’t secure enough to impede vehicular progress, and some have ramps to allow airborne access. These serve as helpful visual cues that you’re entering the new POI, The Overlook.  Ground Level: Construction Sites Most of the groundwork around the skyscraper is in its final stages of completion, but there are plenty of barriers, fencing, canopies, and containers to use as cover in the area below each of the two giant cranes north and south of the structure. Ground Level: Restaurants Burger Town: Fans of the famous Burger Town Double Cheeseburger will be thrilled to know the fast-food chain has relocated a few meters further down the road from its previous location and is contained within the massive footprint of The Overlook. This outlet also serves as a lower entrance into the grand foyer interior of the building. Sushi Bar: Diagonally opposite the Burger Town, on the northwest side of the POI, is a small Sushi bar, within the footprint of the tower itself. Nestled in the stepped courtyard, you can quickly advance to the north crane or main lobby entrance. It’s also worth pointing out that the sight lines around this POI have significantly changed since Season 03, with much greater visibility across familiar POIs within Downtown and the surrounding districts. North and South Cranes Two huge cranes flank the north and south side of the monolith and are another way to traverse into The Overlook at great height. With five separate platforms attached to the mast to land on (two at ground, and three at height), use the vertical Ascender built into the crane’s mast and take an eight-second ascent to a platform just below the jib that extends out to the main winch, and the hoist allowing a jump to The Overlook roof. Operators who aren’t challenged by vertigo will have wild and panoramic views that extend to all of Verdansk’s POIs (except Quarry)! Both cranes are also functional, and providing you’ve found the necessary controls in the vicinity (both on and off the cranes’ superstructures), cargo on the hook block and hoist can be summoned and moved to various locations around the tower and nearby Downtown buildings, in case you or your team needs a daring lift! Zip Lines and Additional Rooftop Cover Increasing the ways you can quickly traverse and gain (or lose) great height in your tactical positioning near The Overlook exterior, zip-lines provide a diagonal route to and from the surrounding Downtown building rooftops.  Each also has a small billboard or other protective cover as you reach the zipline mechanism. Access to and from Overlook at the following locations: South: Post Office rooftop to Skydeck. West: Rothwynn Donna building rooftop to Skydeck. Northeast: Art Gallery/Museum rooftop to Skydeck. East: City Hall dome rooftop to Skydeck.  The Overlook: Entrance and Lobby Lockdown The Overlook has a substantial exterior and interior presence, mainly tiered fountains, planting, and stairs up to forecourts and shuttered entrances to the north, east, south, and west, all leading to a central interior lobby. If you find the main entrances shuttered, it means the lobby is experiencing a lockdown. Perhaps there’s a way to breach this security? Are there other ways to get in? The interior lobby has a coffee shop, mezzanine office, stairs, a variety of cover options, and other areas to investigate, not least the marginally terrifying 18-storey elevator ascenders to the northeast and southwest, and even those only get you halfway up the inside of the tower. The Overlook: Atrium and Skydeck (Interior, Exterior) Just above the midway point within The Overlook tower is a five-floor interior with exterior Skydeck. Depending on your use of ziplines, you’re able to access a large Atrium with concrete tile and planters and an abundance of plant life. Around the perimeter are rooms, stairwells, and two new elevator shafts, all enabling you to reach the exterior Skydeck. Known by some locals as the “cyclops” tower, due to this large central upper opening you can fly a helicopter through, the Skydeck features a small glass pyramid, some windswept seating, and infiltration to the floors above.  The large, rectangular holes on all four sides provide zipline access around Downtown, as well as daring helicopter maneuvers through the gaps. The ascent doesn’t end here; enter any of the four pillars holding up the roof of the skyscraper for another elevator ascender ride. The Overlook: Penthouse (Interior), Roof (Exterior) The remaining upper floors of The Overlook are nearing completion, meaning health and safety rules aren’t being observed as stringently as you’d like. Top floors up from the Skydeck is the roof. Missing windows, exterior gantries without railings, and exposed exterior ladders mean you’ll be thankful for your parachute.  Depending on which of the tower corners you’re fighting through, this offers another five floors to investigate, including rooms that are fully furnished.  These include a security and server room, a two-floor penthouse level with opulent bedroom, kitchen, and games area, and that’s before the more perturbed of Operators learn the secrets of the [[REDACTED]] room!  As well as the usual Battle Royale and Resurgence playlists across Verdansk and Rebirth Island, major modes – Clash and Battle Royale: Ranked Play – return to the game, with the intriguing Havoc Royale and the arrival of Resurgence: Ranked Play on Rebirth Island at mid-season! Clash LTM (Launch) 104 players (52v52), 15-minute matches 52v52 Team Deathmatch chaos is back in Call of Duty: Warzone! First introduced into Call of Duty: Warzone during Season Five of Black Ops Cold War back in September 2021 as a revamped version of the original “Rumble” mode, Clash is back, bigger than ever, and now includes some impressive, game-changing equipment and power-ups only available in this mode. But what is Clash Mode? This is Team Deathmatch and Domination on a massive scale! Overview, Win Conditions, and Scoring This action-packed team-based mode takes place in and around a specific POI within Verdansk, and pits two teams of 52 players (divided into 13 Quad Squads per side) against each other. With no Circle Collapse, no last stand benefit for the Survivor Perk, and your Loadouts available immediately, the plan is simple; your side needs to acquire 500 points by the end of the 15-minute time limit. These are mainly gained by slaying enemies (sometimes aided with power ups you can acquire within a match), completing contracts, and participating in the in-game Public Events, as well as the following: Scoring: 1 point per enemy elimination 2 points per enemy elimination with Double Down Power Up 5 points per Contract completed 10 points for capturing a Domination Point (Flag) 10 points for capturing a Bonus Crate or a Cash Crate Clash: Available Locations Expect Clash matches to occur across a sub-section of the main Verdansk map, incorporating several adjacent areas around the following POIs: Quarry Boneyard Farmland Promenade (East) Clash: Available Vehicles With the impetus to reach the enemy forces never more important, expect heavy use of vehicles throughout a Clash Match. The full complement of currently available ground and air vehicles are as follows: Heli Cargo Truck LTV (Light Tactical Vehicle) Polaris RZR Pro R 4 Available Contracts There are three available Contracts to complete in Clash Mode: Scavenger Search and Destroy Recon The Scavenger and Recon Contracts work in the same way as they do in Battle Royale Matches. In addition to the usual rewards and in-game cash, you receive five team points for each Contract completed. Search and Destroy Contracts (Clash Mode Only): Everything must go with this new contract, where one team plants a bomb on a Buy Station, and on detonation, they can earn impressive rarity weapons and items from the Buy Stations’ inventory. The other teams can defuse the bomb to earn a Fire Sale for a major discount from the Buy Stations.  Expect the Search and Destroy Contract to be available in Battle Royale, Resurgence, and Plunder Modes, at Mid-Season. In-Match Events and Domination Points During a Clash match, expect several in-match Events to occur. These are like those in Battle Royale Matches, though Clash Events are timed throughout the match rather than related to the Circle Collapse. The available Events are: Domination Points Bonus Points Crates Clash Firesale Cash Crates Power Surge Domination Points Event: Up to three single capture Dom Points (flags) appear on the map, and these respawn throughout the match. Much like the Multiplayer Mode of the same name, a team that reaches and captures one of the Dom Points receives a reward; in this case, 10 team points. Bonus Points Crates Event: A cargo plane flies across the center of the map, and up to four crates are dropped. Teams are likely to head to the crates as they float to the ground, as capturing a crate awards you with 10 team points. Clash Firesale Event: For the next two minutes, all players can take advantage of a Firesale as two Portable Buy Stations are dropped into the backfield of each team (a total of four). Additionally, all loot crates are restocked and cash found in crates is also increased.  Cash Crates: Capture one (or more) of the three Cash Crates that drop during this event also nets you 10 team points. Power Surge Event: For the next two minutes, there’s an increased drop rate of Power Ups when you dispatch an enemy player or loot any ground caches. Clash Mode Gameplay Features As well as the previously mentioned new Search and Destroy Contract, Clash comes loaded with features unique to the mode. Here’s the full run-down of what to expect: Buy Stations (Clash Mode only): Expect Buy Stations to be scattered across a Clash map and roughly split between each team’s area of operations. Portable Buy Stations are also available during the Firesale In-Match Event. Here’s what you can purchase: Armor Plate: $500 Munitions Box: $1,000 Trophy System: $1,500 Counter UAV: $3,000 Sentry Turret: $3,000 Hand Cannon: $4,000 Bunker Buster: $4,000 Cluster Strike: $4,000 Precision Airstrike: $6,000 Specialist Perk: $10,000 New Field Upgrade: Door Barricade (Clash Mode at Season Launch): Control access points more easily during mid or close-quarter combat scenarios and delay enemy incursions with the Door Barricade. Fit a barricade to a close single or double door, and a heavy-duty lock attaches to (and is visible on) both sides, preventing the opening or access through the door. This is until the barricade is either removed (only by the Operator or squadmates who fitted it), or destroyed, usually by using explosives, though gunfire and melee equipment is also an option. Expect the Door Barricade to be loot in Battle Royale and Battle Royale Casual Modes, via the new Care Package Killstreak, all coming at Mid-Season. New Killstreak: Hand Cannon (Clash Mode at Season Launch): This high-powered pistol Killstreak, originally available in Multiplayer during Season 01, is available in ground cache as rare loot. Expect a slow rate of fire and finite ammunition, but good handling, and improved hip fire accuracy with faster hip-fire shooting speed. Expect the Hand Cannon to be rare loot in Battle Royale, Battle Royale Casual, Resurgence, and Plunder Modes, via the new Care Package Killstreak, all coming at Mid-Season. Feature: SAM Turrets (Clash Mode only): Chopper and drone pilots take note; Clash mode maps feature SAM Turrets in various tactical positions across the environment. Spend $1,500 of in-match cash to activate these anti-air missile batteries and use them up to four times to target any aircraft and drones in the area. If you’re flying in the Heli on the receiving end of a SAM barrage, now’s the time to utilize flares to counter the incoming missiles! Train (Clash Mode only): If a Clash map features a portion of the large, circular railroad track that the train travels along, then this hulking engine and loot-filled carriages are parked and available to use as added cover and looting opportunities. UAV Towers (Clash Mode only): Providing you have the $2,000 in-match cash to activate them, teams can head to and capture a few scattered UAV Towers, allowing pinging of enemy movement across the local area. Clash Mode Powerups  Clash Mode features five differently hued in-match Powerups that are automatically used when found. Available as a possible loot drop or sometimes appearing as dropped loot near the body of an eliminated enemy Operator, these Powerups are color-coded and offer temporary benefits to the Operator who grabs them. All five can be obtained in a single match and expect the frequency of available Powerups to be significantly increased if the in-match Power Surge Event activates (usually in the final stages of a match). Here’s what each of the five Clash Powerups grant you: Hunter (Red Aura): Highlights enemies and allies in red and blue respectively. Allies are visible through walls. Applies Tracker and High Alert Perks. Speed Boost (Yellow Aura): Prevents fall damage and provides approximately 20 percent speed boost to your movement. Regeneration Aura (Green Aura): Refills your health and armor at roughly 20 percent per second. Allies within a small radius around you also receive this benefit. The effect does not stack. Double Down (Blue Aura): Grants you two points per enemy Operator elimination instead of one. Kill Mag (Purple Aura): Refills your active weapon magazine after a kill and quickens your reload. Havoc Royale LTM (Mid-Season) 44 players (Quads), 15-minute matches Compete in a Call of Duty: Warzone match like no other, where rule bending modifiers twist the realities of the usual Resurgence gameplay in chaotic and game-changing ways.  Drop into a specially themed area of Verdansk with your Loadout. Every new gas circle activates a different modifier. Adapt fast to sudden changes as Havoc modifiers may impact you, the environment, and even the gameplay rules. Survive the Havoc, be the last team standing, and claim victory! Expect a full rundown of this game mode in the Season 04 Reloaded blog, just prior to Mid-season. Resurgence Casual (Mid-Season) 44 Players, Players & Bots Infil into Rebirth Island with your squad and commit to winning using the regular Resurgence ruleset, but with one important twist; some of your adversaries aren’t human! Whether facing down a bot or not, Resurgence Casual is a great mode to drop into whether you’re warming up, teaching a new player about the game, or you’re wanting a Resurgence match that isn’t quite as extreme as normal. As with Battle Royale Casual or Call of Duty: Warzone Bootcamp, game progression is limited in this mode and results will not count towards or against your stats. This mode also doesn’t count towards your eligibility to accessing Resurgence Ranked Play when it arrives at Mid-Season. Grind your way towards a coveted position in the Top 250 as Battle Royale: Ranked Play becomes the first of two Ranked Play variants to drop in Season 04 within Call of Duty: Warzone. Harness the competitive spirit and earn new rewards for ranking up and advancing through the Skill Divisions, unlocking the following rewards as you go: Season 04 BR Ranked Play Rewards First Season Win: Weapon Charm Get 25 Eliminations: Elimination Sticker Get 100 Eliminations: Elimination Weapon Camo Get 250 Eliminations: Elimination LR 7.62 Weapon Blueprint Silver: “Ranked Season 4 – Silver” Emblem Gold: “Ranked Season 4 – Gold” Emblem and Decal Platinum: “Ranked Season 4 – Platinum” Emblem and Decal Diamond: “Ranked Season 4 – Diamond” Emblem and Decal Crimson: “Ranked Season 4 – Crimson” Emblem and Decal Iridescent: “Ranked Season 4 – Iridescent” Emblem and Decal Top 250: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250” Emblem and Decal Season 04 Champion: “Ranked Season 4 – Top 250 Champion” Emblem Ranked Play: Resurgence (Mid-Season) Trios, Rebirth Island Craving some real competition on Rebirth Island? Then squad up with your winning Trio, and attempt dominance over the very best players as Resurgence Ranked Play makes its triumphant return! Expect the same rules set you remember during the Call of Duty: Modern Warfare® III era, and an expanded look at this returning, fan-favorite mode in the Season 04 Reloaded blog, just prior to Mid-season. Ranked Play Notes: Battle Royale: Ranked Play (Verdansk) runs from Launch Window throughout the entirety of Season 04. Resurgence: Ranked Play (Rebirth Island) begins at Mid-Season, and runs alongside Battle Royale: Ranked Play, meaning you can play one or both Modes when they are active. The ranking is separate from Battle Royale: Ranked Play. A new Contract, Field Upgrade, Killstreak, Perk, and ATV are all set to drop into Verdansk during Season 04: Clash Mode Features Expansion (Mid-Season) After an evaluation period in Call of Duty: Warzone’s Clash Mode, expect the following new equipment to become available across additional modes at mid-season. Here’s what to expect: Contract: Search & Destroy: Battle Royale, Resurgence, Plunder. Field Upgrade: Door Barricade: Battle Royale, Battle Royale Casual Modes. Available via Care Package. Killstreak: Hand Cannon: Battle Royale, Battle Royale Casual, and Plunder Modes. Available via Care Package. Killstreak: Care Package (Mid-Season) Open ground loot caches for a rare chance to obtain the Care Package, a throwable Killstreak that, when lobbed, explodes into trail of smoke, after which a loadout-sized crate falls from the skies. Open this crate for a chance to obtain rare loot including rare equipment, the Specialist Perk, and more. New Perk: Loot Master (Mid-Season) Available only as Ground Loot during Resurgence and Plunder matches, the Loot Master Perk allows you to maximize your scavenging potential and gear up faster by increasing the amount of loot you find while opening caches. Gain the early advantage or sustain yourself during prolonged engagements. Expect an increased drop rate for equipped weapon ammo, a higher chance to find tacticals and lethals, more cash, and a greater chance at field upgrades, killstreaks, and other high-tier gear. ATV: Polaris Sportsman XP 1000 (Launch) Added to the vehicle pool is the Polaris Sportsman XP 1000, a real wild ride allowing you to hit the Verdansk goat trails in comfort with legendary suspension, great clearance and traction, and versatility for positioning up to three Operators on the surface of the vehicle. Compared to the current ATV, the wheelbase and size of the Sportsman XP 1000 offers more stability than ever before.  Note: Call of Duty: Warzone Events: Check the General section later in this blog to uncover the full complement of events for this mode across Season 04. General Content (MP, ZM, WZ) Call of Duty: General Content Summary (All Modes and Games) Weapons Detail: Five new weapons arrive in Season 04, including two at launch: the LC10 SMG and FFAR 1 Assault Rifle. Later in the season, get your hands on the , Essex Model 07 Marksman Rifle, Olympia Special weapon and Pickaxe Melee weapon, and change up your playstyle with new attachments. The Events Horizon: Season 04 is packed with Events, including Rivals, Ballerina (From the World of John Wick), and even more coming mid-season.. Plus, prove your worth across the Zombies leaderboards and become King of the Dead! Battle Pass and BlackCell: The Season 04 Battle Pass brings Stitch and brutal BlackCell Operator Omen to the forefront alongside new Weapon Blueprints, Operator Skins, Calling Cards, Finishing Moves, Emotes, and more in a mix of free and premium tiers. Free tiers include two new base weapons and the G-Grip Tactical Foregrip. Season 04 Operators: Stitch returns after being freed from prison, headlining the new Battle Pass next to the sinister Omen leading BlackCell. Plus, deploy as assassin Eve Macarro in a collaboration with Ballerina, followed by much more at the mid-season. CDL Announcements: Major IV is almost here! Find out where to watch, plus the in-game rewards you can unlock, just for tuning in! Primary Weapon: LC10 (Launch) SMG, Battle Pass Page 3, Page 14 Battle Pass Blueprint Levels: 38 MAGS: 4 MAG SIZE: 34 Mastery Badges: Yes Attachments: Optic, Muzzle, Barrel, Underbarrel, Magazine, Rear Grip, Stock, Laser, Fire Mods Customize Options: Skins, Camos and Reticle Unlocks (MP, ZM, WZ), Accessories (1), Decals (1), Stickers (3). Full-auto submachine gun. Excellent accuracy and range, with a moderate rate of fire. Average mobility and very slow handling for its class. Returning after its debut in Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War, the LC10 SMG spits out rounds fast coupled with good accuracy and range, moderate damage, and a quick reload to get you back into the fight. The weapon performs well off the hip or down sights, with 34 rounds in the base magazine for a hefty ammo supply. Via Gunsmith, equip a variety of improvements such as a Laser for improved hipfire spread and an updated Barrel to further extend the weapon’s respectable damage range. Primary Weapon: FFAR 1 (Launch) Assault Rifle, Battle Pass Page 6, Page 11 HVT Tier Battle Pass Blueprint Levels: 42 MAGS: 3 MAG SIZE: 30 Mastery Badges: Yes Attachments: Optic, Muzzle, Barrel, Underbarrel, Magazine, Rear Grip, Stock, Laser, Fire Mods Customize Options: Skins, Camo and Reticle Unlocks (MP, ZM, WZ), Accessories (1), Decals (1), Stickers (3).  Full-auto assault rifle. Very high rate of fire and excellent CQB power, but slower handling and mobility. Boasting a blazing fast fire rate that rivals the SMG weapon class, this bullpup Assault Rifle is designed for taking down targets fast. The somewhat unpredictable recoil favors burst fire when tackling distant targets, but once you’re locked on it’s all over for them. Supporting a variety of Underbarrel Launcher attachments, use Gunsmith to add greater versatility to the weapon. Running low on ammo? Grab an Extended Mag while you’re at it. Primary Weapon: Essex Model 07 (In-Season) Marksman Rifle, Event Reward Levels: 38 MAGS: 3 MAG SIZE: 8 Mastery Badges: Yes Attachments: Optic, Muzzle, Barrel, Underbarrel, Magazine, Lever, Stock, Laser, Fire Mods Customize Options: Skins, Camo and Reticle Unlocks (MP, ZM, WZ), Accessories (1), Decals (1), Stickers (3). Lever-action marksman rifle. High damage potential. Balanced by slower rate of fire and handling. Inflict heavy critical point damage with this lever-action tactical rifle. An ideal tool for the new sheriff in town, this classic armament offers smooth handling with shots that quickly recenter after kicking up. Choose from a variety of Levers to further customize the weapon’s action, improving ADS speed, sprint to fire speed, and other movement abilities.  Special Weapon: Olympia (Mid-Season) Special, Event Reward Levels: 30 MAGS: 8 MAG SIZE: 2 Mastery Badges: Yes Attachments: Barrel, Stock Customize Options: Skins, Camos (MP, ZM, WZ), Accessories (1), Decals (1), Stickers (3). Double-barrel shotgun. Very high damage and respectable range but requires frequent reloading. The double-barrel Olympia – not seen since Black Ops 3 – makes its debut in Black Ops 6, returning as a Special Weapon that makes for the perfect backup when entering tight spaces. The Olympia holds two shots at a time, each spraying multiple pellets when your Operator pulls the trigger. Light customization via the Short Barrel and Cut-Off Stock attachments gives you some control over the weapon’s playstyle, but the fundamentals remain the same: get up close and make your shots count. Fire down the sight for a tighter pellet spread or shoot off the hip to inflict damage over a wider area. Melee Weapon: Pickaxe (Mid-Season) Melee, Event Reward Levels: 30 Mastery Badges: Yes Attachments: None Customize Options: Skins. One-hit kill. Medium attack speed. Short range. Without a Pickaxe, you’ll be lost in the tundra. Bring the right tool for the job when deploying to Iceland in Season 04’s Multiplayer maps, starting with this deadly Melee weapon that downs unarmored enemies with brutal severity. Though its range is short, the Pickaxe’s combination of rapid slashes and overhead swipes will keep enemies frozen in their tracks. Close the distance and say farewell. G-Grip (Launch) SMGs (except PP-19), Assault Rifles, Battle Pass Page 7 Reward Vertical foregrip with integrated laser for improved firing stability, horizontal recoil control, and tightened spread when transitioning between hipfire and aiming down sights. Beam: Blue. Blocks Laser attachments. Stryder .22 3-Round Burst Mod (Launch) Stryder .22 Pistol, Event Reward Convert the Stryder .22 into a 3-round burst. Drastically improves fire rate and maintains manageable gun kick but alters the weapon’s damage profile outside of the effective range. SVD Full Auto Mod (In-Season) SVD Sniper Rifle, Event Reward Convert the SVD from semi-auto to full-auto functionality, ramping up the speed of your damage output and drastically improving recoil and handling. TR2 CQB Auto Conversion (In-Season) TR2 Marksman Rifle, Event Reward Alter the TR2 Marksman Rifle to fire handgun caliber rounds, resulting in a Marksman Rifle with a compact frame and fully automatic capabilities that rival fire rates of an SMG! Stitch Returns to Action in the Season 04 Battle Pass Stitch returns to the fray, leading this season’s Battle Pass content in a shocking team up with Adler. Purchase the Season 04 Battle Pass for 1,100 COD Points or the Season 04 Battle Pass Bundle for 2,400 COD Points to immediately unlock the Instant Rewards Page of the Battle Pass, including the following items: 10% Battle Pass XP Boost The new “Supermax” Stitch Operator and “Supermax BlackCell” Stitch Operator Skin for those who purchase BlackCell The “Lock Up” Legendary Blueprint for the Feng 82 LMG The “Try Me!” Emote The “Untamable” Large Decal Start to unlock up to 1,100 COD Points as you progress through the Battle Pass The Season 04 Battle Pass includes over 110 pieces of unlockable content (excluding BlackCell) including two new Base Weapons, the G-Grip Tactical Foregrip Attachment, and several unlockable mil-sim style skins for Bailey, Payne, Grey, Caine, Brutus, Toro, Adler, Nazir, and Marshall. Stay tuned for the BlackCell, Battle Pass and Store Bundles blog prior to Season 04 launch for more details. BlackCell Offerings When the job needs to get done, summon Omen, the otherworldly Operator leading BlackCell content in Season 04. The menacing Operator and his three-headed guard dog are joined by a cast of infected, black and purple-hued Operator Skins and Weapon Blueprints earned exclusively through BlackCell. BlackCell owners can access the Season 04 Battle Pass via the exclusive BlackCell Page, instantly unlocking the following items: The “Omen” BlackCell Operator and Skin 10% XP Boost 1,100 COD Points The “Guard Dog” Companion Finishing Move The “Hellblock” Mastercraft Blueprint for the Ladra SMG The “Kill Tally” Gun Screen The “BlackCell” Clan Tag (showcased in Lobbies and Winner’s Circles) BlackCell owners get access to page after page of additional exclusive rewards within the Season 04 Battle Pass, including: Seven BlackCell-exclusive skins for Stitch (two skins), Bailey, Payne, Caine, Brutus, and Adler.  Seven BlackCell-exclusive Weapon Blueprints for the Krig C (Assault Rifle), XMG (LMG), SWAT 5.56 (Marksman Rifle), ASG-98 (Shotgun), FFAR 1 (Assault Rifle), Model L (Assault Rifle), LC10 (SMG) Over 130 item rewards (Battle Pass and BlackCell related) for those who fully complete the Season 04 BlackCell Battle Pass. As usual, players who upgrade to BlackCell after purchasing the Battle Pass will also receive back the COD Points they spent. BlackCell Daily Challenges: Players with BlackCell will receive additional Daily Challenges throughout Season 04 for Multiplayer, Zombies, and Call of Duty: Warzone, giving even more chances to rake in the XP during your play sessions! BlackCell Loyalty Bonus: Players who purchased BlackCell in a previous Black Ops 6season and go on to purchase Season 04 BlackCell will earn a permanent 10% Player and Weapon XP Loyalty Bonus, up to 30% for players who purchased Season 01, Season 02, and Season 03 BlackCell! The return of Stitch signals a shift in the battles ahead, requiring new Operators to meet the demands of the intensifying conflict. Predict a swift demise for your opponents with Omen leading BlackCell, joined by Stitch at the head of the Battle Pass plus a special appearance by Eve Macarro from Ballerina. Omen (BlackCell, Crimson One, Launch) “Omen” Operator: BlackCell Instant Reward Page It’s time for lockdown. Omen is a presence who strikes fear even in the world’s most dangerous criminals, with an almost preternatural ability to keep even the most sinister prisoners in line. Stitch (Battle Pass, Rogue Black Ops, Launch) “Supermax” and “Yard Dog” Skins: Battle Pass Instant Reward Page, Battle Pass Completion Page Until recently, Stitch was assumed dead. Instead of eliminating his enemy, however, Adler sent him off to a black site prison. Now the time has come, and following a daring jailbreak, Stitch is once again free. Adler needs his help cracking the codenames that will finally lead to the Pantheon moles, but at what cost? Ballerina (Bundle, Crimson One, In-Season) Store Bundle Seeking revenge for her slain father, Eve Macarro embarks on a relentless mission against the High Table’s most feared opponents in Ballerina, the highly anticipated new action film from the World of John Wick. Deploy as the elite assassin in one of two looks in the Ballerina Bundle arriving in Season 04. Participate in a new round of scheduled Events across Multiplayer, Zombies, and Call of Duty: Warzone. Earn rewards like new weapons, special attachments, and more. Here’s a first look at the Events to come (with more announcements in the Season 04 Reloaded blog): Event: Ballerina (MP, ZM, WZ, In-Season) Activation Dates: June 5 to June 12 Total Rewards: 10 (+ One BlackCell reward) Enter the world of John Wick with the new Ballerina Event. Prove your capabilities as a supreme assassin by slaying your way across Multiplayer, Zombies, and Call of Duty: Warzone. Rewards include the new Essex Model 07 Marksman Rifle and a Ballerina-themed Nunchuck Melee Blueprint for BlackCell Owners. Event: Rivals (MP, ZM, WZ, In-Season) Activation Dates: June 12 to June 26 Total Rewards: 15 (+ One BlackCell reward) Enemies become allies in the Rivals Event, when Stitch brings his code-cracking expertise to help uncover the real names of the final Pantheon moles in the CIA. The goal is simple; prove you’re the most proficient Operator by earning XP across all game modes and unlock a plethora of impressive free items. Dominate your enemies to become the first to unlock rewards including the Stryder .22 3-Round Burst Mod (Attachment) and Grim Reaper (Scorestreak). Events: King of the Dead, Master of Grief (Zombies, Mid-Season) Activation Dates (King of the Dead): June 26 to July 3 Activation Dates (Master of Grief): July 10 to July 17 King of the Dead: “Eliminate zombies in any Zombie mode to earn points to climb the leaderboard.” Master of Grief: “Collect Essence in Grief to earn points to climb the leaderboard.” Earn points by slaying all types of undead! As you’d expect, you receive more points for dispatching the harder zombie types. This, in turn, causes you to climb the Zombies leaderboard, and once the Event is over, rewards will be granted based on your leaderboard position. Everyone receives some kind of reward, but to obtain the really good stuff, it’s time to perfect your Special and Elite Zombies slaying!  Season 04 brings new Bundles to the Store, including a special crossover event with Ballerina. Get more intel in the Season 04 BlackCell, Battle Pass, and Bundles blog arriving before launch. Tracer Pack: Ballerina Choose one of two Operator Skins for Eve, a red sequin dress as “Eve Macarro” or a sleek black professional fit as the “Ruska Rogue.” Bring light to the darkness with three Legendary Weapon Blueprints featuring High Table Coin Tracers and High Table Coin Death FX: the “Relevé” AK-74 Assault Rifle, “Plié” Saug SMG, and the “Arabesque” 9MM PM Pistol. For a snazzier elimination, take them out with the “Dance With Death” Finishing Move. Balance lethality and elegance with additional Ballerina themed content, including the “Pirouette” Emote, “Keepsake” Weapon Charm, animated “Caged Grace” Emblem, animated “Pas de Duex Calling Card, and the “Take a Bow” Loading Screen. Tracer Pack: Ink and Smoke Reactive Ultra Skin Add some class to your deployments with the cel-shaded, black and greyscale “Hardboiled” Ultra Operator Skin for Weaver, accompanied by the Reactive “Lethal Inspection” AMES 85 Assault Rifle and “Personal Detective” ASG-89 Shotgun Weapon Blueprints, both featuring Noir Tracers and Ink Annihilation Death FX. For a closer finish, leap for their throats using the “Wire Cut” Finishing Move. When taking on the undead, equip the “Search Engine” Wonder Weapon skin for the Thrustodyne M23 and show off your Zombies credentials with the “Sidepiece” Weapon Charm, “Dead Noir” Weapon Sticker, “Evidence” Spray, “Greyscale” Loading Screen, and the consumable Time Out GobbleGum. Other Incoming Bundles There’s plenty more awesome new content arriving in the Season 04 Store, including the “Tracer Pack: Olympus Bolt Mastercraft Ultra Skin” Bundle, featuring an electrifying Mastercraft Weapon Blueprint for the new LC10 SMG alongside a divine Ultra Operator Skin for Caine. Also incoming is the “Tracer Pack: System Breach” Bundle, and the “Tracer Pack: The Goat Ultra Skin” Bundle with a Goat Companion Finishing Move. See more of the season’s upcoming Bundles and more in the Season 04 BlackCell, Battle Pass, and Store Bundle blog. Call of Duty League, the pinnacle of competitive Call of Duty, is bringing its fourth and final Major of the season to the DreamHack Dallas show floor. Guests with a CDL add-on ticket can watch Major IV live, where the 12 Call of Duty League teams will battle it out for the final CDL points to qualify for 2025 Call of Duty League Championship in June. Ensure you get into the action by tuning in and watching Major IV live on YouTube. Be sure to link your YouTube account with your Activision ID Account to earn some special viewership rewards (shown above). Click here for more intel. The event starts at 10:300 AM PT Friday, May 23, and continuing at 10:30 AM PT Saturday May 24 with the Finals beginning at 10:30 AM PT Sunday May 25.  Black Ops 6 is available now, and now’s definitely the time to experience the spy action thriller Campaign, the in-depth tactical chaos of best-in-class Multiplayer, and to soak in the gory glory of an incredible round-based Zombies experience with five maps and the brand-new Grief mode! Click here to Purchase Black Ops 6. © 2025 Activision Publishing, Inc. ACTIVISION, CALL OF DUTY, CALL OF DUTY WARZONE, MODERN WARFARE, CALL OF DUTY LEAGUE, and CALL OF DUTY BLACK OPS are trademarks of Activision Publishing, Inc. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective owners. For more information, please visit www.callofduty.com and www.youtube.com/callofduty, and follow @Activision and @CallofDuty on X, Instagram, and Facebook. For Call of Duty Updates, follow @CODUpdates on X. ®, TM & © 2025 Lions Gate Entertainment Inc. and related companies. All Rights Reserved.
    0 Yorumlar 0 hisse senetleri 0 önizleme
  • The data center boom in the desert

    In the high desert east of Reno, Nevada, construction crews are flattening the golden foothills of the Virginia Range, laying the foundations of a data center city. Google, Tract, Switch, EdgeCore, Novva, Vantage, and PowerHouse are all operating, building, or expanding huge facilities within the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, a business park bigger than the city of Detroit.  This story is a part of MIT Technology Review’s series “Power Hungry: AI and our energy future,” on the energy demands and carbon costs of the artificial-intelligence revolution. Meanwhile, Microsoft acquired more than 225 acres of undeveloped property within the center and an even larger plot in nearby Silver Springs, Nevada. Apple is expanding its data center, located just across the Truckee River from the industrial park. OpenAI has said it’s considering building a data center in Nevada as well. The corporate race to amass computing resources to train and run artificial intelligence models and store information in the cloud has sparked a data center boom in the desert—just far enough away from Nevada’s communities to elude wide notice and, some fear, adequate scrutiny.  Switch, a data center company based in Las Vegas, says the full build-out of its campus at the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center could exceed seven million square feet.EMILY NAJERA The full scale and potential environmental impacts of the developments aren’t known, because the footprint, energy needs, and water requirements are often closely guarded corporate secrets. Most of the companies didn’t respond to inquiries from MIT Technology Review, or declined to provide additional information about the projects.  But there’s “a whole lot of construction going on,” says Kris Thompson, who served as the longtime project manager for the industrial center before stepping down late last year. “The last number I heard was 13 million square feet under construction right now, which is massive.”
    Indeed, it’s the equivalent of almost five Empire State Buildings laid out flat. In addition, public filings from NV Energy, the state’s near-monopoly utility, reveal that a dozen data-center projects, mostly in this area, have requested nearly six gigawatts of electricity capacity within the next decade.  That would make the greater Reno area—the biggest little city in the world—one of the largest data-center markets around the globe.
    It would also require expanding the state’s power sector by about 40%, all for a single industry in an explosive growth stage that may, or may not, prove sustainable. The energy needs, in turn, suggest those projects could consume billions of gallons of water per year, according to an analysis conducted for this story.  Construction crews are busy building data centers throughout the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.EMILY NAJERA The build-out of a dense cluster of energy and water-hungry data centers in a small stretch of the nation’s driest state, where climate change is driving up temperatures faster than anywhere else in the country, has begun to raise alarms among water experts, environmental groups, and residents. That includes members of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe, whose namesake water body lies within their reservation and marks the end point of the Truckee River, the region’s main source of water. Much of Nevada has suffered through severe drought conditions for years, farmers and communities are drawing down many of the state’s groundwater reservoirs faster than they can be refilled, and global warming is sucking more and more moisture out of the region’s streams, shrubs, and soils. “Telling entities that they can come in and stick more straws in the ground for data centers is raising a lot of questions about sound management,” says Kyle Roerink, executive director of the Great Basin Water Network, a nonprofit that works to protect water resources throughout Nevada and Utah.  “We just don’t want to be in a situation where the tail is wagging the dog,” he later added, “where this demand for data centers is driving water policy.” Luring data centers In the late 1850s, the mountains southeast of Reno began enticing prospectors from across the country, who hoped to strike silver or gold in the famed Comstock Lode. But Storey County had few residents or economic prospects by the late 1990s, around the time when Don Roger Norman, a media-shy real estate speculator, spotted a new opportunity in the sagebrush-covered hills. 
    He began buying up tens of thousands of acres of land for tens of millions of dollars and lining up development approvals to lure industrial projects to what became the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center. His partners included Lance Gilman, a cowboy-hat-wearing real estate broker, who later bought the nearby Mustang Ranch brothel and won a seat as a county commissioner. In 1999, the county passed an ordinance that preapproves companies to develop most types of commercial and industrial projects across the business park, cutting months to years off the development process. That helped cinch deals with a flock of tenants looking to build big projects fast, including Walmart, Tesla, and Redwood Materials. Now the promise of fast permits is helping to draw data centers by the gigawatt. On a clear, cool January afternoon, Brian Armon, a commercial real estate broker who leads the industrial practices group at NAI Alliance, takes me on a tour of the projects around the region, which mostly entails driving around the business center. Lance Gilman, a local real estate broker, helped to develop the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center and land some of its largest tenants.GREGG SEGAL After pulling off Interstate 80 onto USA Parkway, he points out the cranes, earthmovers, and riprap foundations, where a variety of data centers are under construction. Deeper into the industrial park, Armon pulls up near Switch’s long, low, arched-roof facility, which sits on a terrace above cement walls and security gates. The Las Vegas–based company says the first phase of its data center campus encompasses more than a million square feet, and that the full build-out will cover seven times that space. 
    Over the next hill, we turn around in Google’s parking lot. Cranes, tents, framing, and construction equipment extend behind the company’s existing data center, filling much of the 1,210-acre lot that the search engine giant acquired in 2017. Last August, during an event at the University of Nevada, Reno, the company announced it would spend million to expand the data center campus along with another one in Las Vegas. Thompson says that the development company, Tahoe Reno Industrial LLC, has now sold off every parcel of developable land within the park. When I ask Armon what’s attracting all the data centers here, he starts with the fast approvals but cites a list of other lures as well: The inexpensive land. NV Energy’s willingness to strike deals to supply relatively low-cost electricity. Cool nighttime and winter temperatures, as far as American deserts go, which reduce the energy and water needs. The proximity to tech hubs such as Silicon Valley, which cuts latency for applications in which milliseconds matter. And the lack of natural disasters that could shut down the facilities, at least for the most part.
    “We are high in seismic activity,” he says. “But everything else is good. We’re not going to have a tornado or flood or a devastating wildfire.” Then there’s the generous tax policies.In 2023, Novva, a Utah-based data center company, announced plans to build a 300,000-square-foot facility within the industrial business park. Nevada doesn’t charge corporate income tax, and it has also enacted deep tax cuts specifically for data centers that set up shop in the state. That includes abatements of up to 75% on property tax for a decade or two—and nearly as much of a bargain on the sales and use taxes applied to equipment purchased for the facilities. Data centers don’t require many permanent workers to run the operations, but the projects have created thousands of construction jobs. They’re also helping to diversify the region’s economy beyond casinos and generating tax windfalls for the state, counties, and cities, says Jeff Sutich, executive director of the Northern Nevada Development Authority. Indeed, just three data-center projects, developed by Apple, Google, and Vantage, will produce nearly half a billion dollars in tax revenue for Nevada, even with those generous abatements, according to the Nevada Governor’s Office of Economic Development. The question is whether the benefits of data centers are worth the tradeoffs for Nevadans, given the public health costs, greenhouse-gas emissions, energy demands, and water strains. The rain shadow The Sierra Nevada’s granite peaks trace the eastern edge of California, forcing Pacific Ocean winds to rise and cool. That converts water vapor in the air into the rain and snow that fill the range’s tributaries, rivers, and lakes.  But the same meteorological phenomenon casts a rain shadow over much of neighboring Nevada, forming an arid expanse known as the Great Basin Desert. The state receives about 10 inches of precipitation a year, about a third of the national average.
    The Truckee River draws from the melting Sierra snowpack at the edge of Lake Tahoe, cascades down the range, and snakes through the flatlands of Reno and Sparks. It forks at the Derby Dam, a Reclamation Act project a few miles from the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, which diverts water to a farming region further east while allowing the rest to continue north toward Pyramid Lake.  Along the way, an engineered system of reservoirs, canals, and treatment plants divert, store, and release water from the river, supplying businesses, cities, towns, and native tribes across the region. But Nevada’s population and economy are expanding, creating more demands on these resources even as they become more constrained. 
    The Truckee River, which originates at Lake Tahoe and terminates at Pyramid Lake, is the major water source for cities, towns, and farms across northwestern Nevada.EMILY NAJERA Throughout much of the 2020s the state has suffered through one of the hottest and most widespread droughts on record, extending two decades of abnormally dry conditions across the American West. Some scientists fear it may constitute an emerging megadrought.  About 50% of Nevada currently faces moderate to exceptional drought conditions. In addition, more than half of the state’s hundreds of groundwater basins are already “over-appropriated,” meaning the water rights on paper exceed the levels believed to be underground.  It’s not clear if climate change will increase or decrease the state’s rainfall levels, on balance. But precipitation patterns are expected to become more erratic, whiplashing between short periods of intense rainfall and more-frequent, extended, or severe droughts.  In addition, more precipitation will fall as rain rather than snow, shortening the Sierra snow season by weeks to months over the coming decades.  “In the extreme case, at the end of the century, that’s pretty much all of winter,” says Sean McKenna, executive director of hydrologic sciences at the Desert Research Institute, a research division of the Nevada System of Higher Education. That loss will undermine an essential function of the Sierra snowpack: reliably delivering water to farmers and cities when it’s most needed in the spring and summer, across both Nevada and California.  These shifting conditions will require the region to develop better ways to store, preserve, and recycle the water it does get, McKenna says. Northern Nevada’s cities, towns, and agencies will also need to carefully evaluate and plan for the collective impacts of continuing growth and development on the interconnected water system, particularly when it comes to water-hungry projects like data centers, he adds. “We can’t consider each of these as a one-off, without considering that there may be tens or dozens of these in the next 15 years,” McKenna says.Thirsty data centers Data centers suck up water in two main ways.
    As giant rooms of server racks process information and consume energy, they generate heat that must be shunted away to prevent malfunctions and damage to the equipment. The processing units optimized for training and running AI models often draw more electricity and, in turn, produce more heat. To keep things cool, more and more data centers have turned to liquid cooling systems that don’t need as much electricity as fan cooling or air-conditioning. These often rely on water to absorb heat and transfer it to outdoor cooling towers, where much of the moisture evaporates. Microsoft’s US data centers, for instance, could have directly evaporated nearly 185,000 gallons of “clean freshwater” in the course of training OpenAI’s GPT-3 large language model, according to a 2023 preprint study led by researchers at the University of California, Riverside.What’s less appreciated, however, is that the larger data-center drain on water generally occurs indirectly, at the power plants generating extra electricity for the turbocharged AI sector. These facilities, in turn, require more water to cool down equipment, among other purposes. You have to add up both uses “to reflect the true water cost of data centers,” says Shaolei Ren, an associate professor of electrical and computer engineering at UC Riverside and coauthor of the study. Ren estimates that the 12 data-center projects listed in NV Energy’s report would directly consume between 860 million gallons and 5.7 billion gallons a year, based on the requested electricity capacity.The indirect water drain associated with electricity generation for those operations could add up to 15.5 billion gallons, based on the average consumption of the regional grid. The exact water figures would depend on shifting climate conditions, the type of cooling systems each data center uses, and the mix of power sources that supply the facilities. Solar power, which provides roughly a quarter of Nevada’s power, requires relatively little water to operate, for instance. But natural-gas plants, which generate about 56%, withdraw 2,803 gallons per megawatt-hour on average, according to the Energy Information Administration.  Geothermal plants, which produce about 10% of the state’s electricity by cycling water through hot rocks, generally consume less water than fossil fuel plants do but often require more water than other renewables, according to some research.  But here too, the water usage varies depending on the type of geothermal plant in question. Google has lined up several deals to partially power its data centers through Fervo Energy, which has helped to commercialize an emerging approach that injects water under high pressure to fracture rock and form wells deep below the surface.  The company stresses that it doesn’t evaporate water for cooling and that it relies on brackish groundwater, not fresh water, to develop and run its plants. In a recent post, Fervo noted that its facilities consume significantly less water per megawatt-hour than coal, nuclear, or natural-gas plants do. Part of NV Energy’s proposed plan to meet growing electricity demands in Nevada includes developing several natural-gas peaking units, adding more than one gigawatt of solar power and installing another gigawatt of battery storage. It's also forging ahead with a more than billion transmission project. But the company didn’t respond to questions concerning how it will supply all of the gigawatts of additional electricity requested by data centers, if the construction of those power plants will increase consumer rates, or how much water those facilities are expected to consume. NV Energy operates a transmission line, substation, and power plant in or around the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.EMILY NAJERA “NV Energy teams work diligently on our long-term planning to make investments in our infrastructure to serve new customers and the continued growth in the state without putting existing customers at risk,” the company said in a statement. An added challenge is that data centers need to run around the clock. That will often compel utilities to develop new electricity-generating sources that can run nonstop as well, as natural-gas, geothermal, or nuclear plants do, says Emily Grubert, an associate professor of sustainable energy policy at the University of Notre Dame, who has studied the relative water consumption of electricity sources.  “You end up with the water-intensive resources looking more important,” she adds. Even if NV Energy and the companies developing data centers do strive to power them through sources with relatively low water needs, “we only have so much ability to add six gigawatts to Nevada’s grid,” Grubert explains. “What you do will never be system-neutral, because it’s such a big number.” Securing supplies On a mid-February morning, I meet TRI’s Thompson and Don Gilman, Lance Gilman’s son, at the Storey County offices, located within the industrial center.  “I’m just a country boy who sells dirt,” Gilman, also a real estate broker, says by way of introduction.  We climb into his large SUV and drive to a reservoir in the heart of the industrial park, filled nearly to the lip.  Thompson explains that much of the water comes from an on-site treatment facility that filters waste fluids from companies in the park. In addition, tens of millions of gallons of treated effluent will also likely flow into the tank this year from the Truckee Meadows Water Authority Reclamation Facility, near the border of Reno and Sparks. That’s thanks to a 16-mile pipeline that the developers, the water authority, several tenants, and various local cities and agencies partnered to build, through a project that began in 2021. “Our general improvement district is furnishing that water to tech companies here in the park as we speak,” Thompson says. “That helps preserve the precious groundwater, so that is an environmental feather in the cap for these data centers. They are focused on environmental excellence.” The reservoir within the industrial business park provides water to data centers and other tenants.EMILY NAJERA But data centers often need drinking-quality water—not wastewater merely treated to irrigation standards—for evaporative cooling, “to avoid pipe clogs and/or bacterial growth,” the UC Riverside study notes. For instance, Google says its data centers withdrew about 7.7 billion gallons of water in 2023, and nearly 6 billion of those gallons were potable.  Tenants in the industrial park can potentially obtain access to water from the ground and the Truckee River, as well. From early on, the master developers worked hard to secure permits to water sources, since they are nearly as precious as development entitlements to companies hoping to build projects in the desert. Initially, the development company controlled a private business, the TRI Water and Sewer Company, that provided those services to the business park’s tenants, according to public documents. The company set up wells, a water tank, distribution lines, and a sewer disposal system.  But in 2000, the board of county commissioners established a general improvement district, a legal mechanism for providing municipal services in certain parts of the state, to manage electricity and then water within the center. It, in turn, hired TRI Water and Sewer as the operating company. As of its 2020 service plan, the general improvement district held permits for nearly 5,300 acre-feet of groundwater, “which can be pumped from well fields within the service area and used for new growth as it occurs.” The document lists another 2,000 acre-feet per year available from the on-site treatment facility, 1,000 from the Truckee River, and 4,000 more from the effluent pipeline.  Those figures haven’t budged much since, according to Shari Whalen, general manager of the TRI General Improvement District. All told, they add up to more than 4 billion gallons of water per year for all the needs of the industrial park and the tenants there, data centers and otherwise. Whalen says that the amount and quality of water required for any given data center depends on its design, and that those matters are worked out on a case-by-case basis.  When asked if the general improvement district is confident that it has adequate water resources to supply the needs of all the data centers under development, as well as other tenants at the industrial center, she says: “They can’t just show up and build unless they have water resources designated for their projects. We wouldn’t approve a project if it didn’t have those water resources.” Water As the region’s water sources have grown more constrained, lining up supplies has become an increasingly high-stakes and controversial business. More than a century ago, the US federal government filed a lawsuit against an assortment of parties pulling water from the Truckee River. The suit would eventually establish that the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe’s legal rights to water for irrigation superseded other claims. But the tribe has been fighting to protect those rights and increase flows from the river ever since, arguing that increasing strains on the watershed from upstream cities and businesses threaten to draw away water reserved for reservation farming, decrease lake levels, and harm native fish. The Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe considers the water body and its fish, including the endangered cui-ui and threatened Lahontan cutthroat trout, to be essential parts of its culture, identity, and way of life. The tribe was originally named Cui-ui Ticutta, which translates to cui-ui eaters. The lake continues to provide sustenance as well as business for the tribe and its members, a number of whom operate boat charters and fishing guide services. “It’s completely tied into us as a people,” says Steven Wadsworth, chairman of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe. “That is what has sustained us all this time,” he adds. “It’s just who we are. It’s part of our spiritual well-being.” Steven Wadsworth, chairman of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe, fears that data centers will divert water that would otherwise reach the tribe’s namesake lake.EMILY NAJERA In recent decades, the tribe has sued the Nevada State Engineer, Washoe County, the federal government, and others for overallocating water rights and endangering the lake’s fish. It also protested the TRI General Improvement District’s applications to draw thousands of additional acre‑feet of groundwater from a basin near the business park. In 2019, the State Engineer’s office rejected those requests, concluding that the basin was already fully appropriated.  More recently, the tribe took issue with the plan to build the pipeline and divert effluent that would have flown into the Truckee, securing an agreement that required the Truckee Meadows Water Authority and other parties to add back several thousand acre‑feet of water to the river.  Whalen says she’s sensitive to Wadsworth’s concerns. But she says that the pipeline promises to keep a growing amount of treated wastewater out of the river, where it could otherwise contribute to rising salt levels in the lake. “I think that the pipeline fromto our system is good for water quality in the river,” she says. “I understand philosophically the concerns about data centers, but the general improvement district is dedicated to working with everyone on the river for regional water-resource planning—and the tribe is no exception.” Water efficiency  In an email, Thompson added that he has “great respect and admiration,” for the tribe and has visited the reservation several times in an effort to help bring industrial or commercial development there. He stressed that all of the business park’s groundwater was “validated by the State Water Engineer,” and that the rights to surface water and effluent were purchased “for fair market value.”During the earlier interview at the industrial center, he and Gilman had both expressed confidence that tenants in the park have adequate water supplies, and that the businesses won’t draw water away from other areas.  “We’re in our own aquifer, our own water basin here,” Thompson said. “You put a straw in the ground here, you’re not going to pull water from Fernley or from Reno or from Silver Springs.” Gilman also stressed that data-center companies have gotten more water efficient in recent years, echoing a point others made as well. “With the newer technology, it’s not much of a worry,” says Sutich, of the Northern Nevada Development Authority. “The technology has come a long way in the last 10 years, which is really giving these guys the opportunity to be good stewards of water usage.” An aerial view of the cooling tower fans at Google’s data center in the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.GOOGLE Indeed, Google’s existing Storey County facility is air-cooled, according to the company’s latest environmental report. The data center withdrew 1.9 million gallons in 2023 but only consumed 200,000 gallons. The rest cycles back into the water system. Google said all the data centers under construction on its campus will also “utilize air-cooling technology.” The company didn’t respond to a question about the scale of its planned expansion in the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, and referred a question about indirect water consumption to NV Energy. The search giant has stressed that it strives to be water efficient across all of its data centers, and decides whether to use air or liquid cooling based on local supply and projected demand, among other variables. Four years ago, the company set a goal of replenishing more water than it consumes by 2030. Locally, it also committed to provide half a million dollars to the National Forest Foundation to improve the Truckee River watershed and reduce wildfire risks.  Microsoft clearly suggested in earlier news reports that the Silver Springs land it purchased around the end of 2022 would be used for a data center. NAI Alliance’s market real estate report identifies that lot, as well as the parcel Microsoft purchased within the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, as data center sites. But the company now declines to specify what it intends to build in the region.  “While the land purchase is public knowledge, we have not disclosed specific detailsour plans for the land or potential development timelines,” wrote Donna Whitehead, a Microsoft spokesperson, in an email.  Workers have begun grading land inside a fenced off lot within the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.EMILY NAJERA Microsoft has also scaled down its global data-center ambitions, backing away from several projects in recent months amid shifting economic conditions, according to various reports. Whatever it ultimately does or doesn’t build, the company stresses that it has made strides to reduce water consumption in its facilities. Late last year, the company announced that it’s using “chip-level cooling solutions” in data centers, which continually circulate water between the servers and chillers through a closed loop that the company claims doesn’t lose any water to evaporation. It says the design requires only a “nominal increase” in energy compared to its data centers that rely on evaporative water cooling. Others seem to be taking a similar approach. EdgeCore also said its 900,000-square-foot data center at the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center will rely on an “air-cooled closed-loop chiller” that doesn’t require water evaporation for cooling.  But some of the companies seem to have taken steps to ensure access to significant amounts of water. Switch, for instance, took a lead role in developing the effluent pipeline. In addition, Tract, which develops campuses on which third-party data centers can build their own facilities, has said it lined up more than 1,100 acre-feet of water rights, the equivalent of nearly 360 million gallons a year.  Apple, Novva, Switch, Tract, and Vantage didn’t respond to inquiries from MIT Technology Review.  Coming conflicts  The suggestion that companies aren’t straining water supplies when they adopt air cooling is, in many cases, akin to saying they’re not responsible for the greenhouse gas produced through their power use simply because it occurs outside of their facilities. In fact, the additional water used at a power plant to meet the increased electricity needs of air cooling may exceed any gains at the data center, Ren, of UC Riverside, says. “That’s actually very likely, because it uses a lot more energy,” he adds. That means that some of the companies developing data centers in and around Storey County may simply hand off their water challenges to other parts of Nevada or neighboring states across the drying American West, depending on where and how the power is generated, Ren says.  Google has said its air-cooled facilities require about 10% more electricity, and its environmental report notes that the Storey County facility is one of its two least-energy-efficient data centers.  Pipes running along Google’s data center campus help the search company cool its servers.GOOGLE Some fear there’s also a growing mismatch between what Nevada’s water permits allow, what’s actually in the ground, and what nature will provide as climate conditions shift. Notably, the groundwater committed to all parties from the Tracy Segment basin—a long-fought-over resource that partially supplies the TRI General Improvement District—already exceeds the “perennial yield.” That refers to the maximum amount that can be drawn out every year without depleting the reservoir over the long term. “If pumping does ultimately exceed the available supply, that means there will be conflict among users,” Roerink, of the Great Basin Water Network, said in an email. “So I have to wonder: Who could be suing whom? Who could be buying out whom? How will the tribe’s rights be defended?”The Truckee Meadows Water Authority, the community-owned utility that manages the water system for Reno and Sparks, said it is planning carefully for the future and remains confident there will be “sufficient resources for decades to come,” at least within its territory east of the industrial center. Storey County, the Truckee-Carson Irrigation District, and the State Engineer’s office didn’t respond to questions or accept interview requests.  Open for business As data center proposals have begun shifting into Northern Nevada’s cities, more local residents and organizations have begun to take notice and express concerns. The regional division of the Sierra Club, for instance, recently sought to overturn the approval of Reno’s first data center, about 20 miles west of the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.  Olivia Tanager, director of the Sierra Club’s Toiyabe Chapter, says the environmental organization was shocked by the projected electricity demands from data centers highlighted in NV Energy’s filings. Nevada’s wild horses are a common sight along USA Parkway, the highway cutting through the industrial business park. EMILY NAJERA “We have increasing interest in understanding the impact that data centers will have to our climate goals, to our grid as a whole, and certainly to our water resources,” she says. “The demands are extraordinary, and we don’t have that amount of water to toy around with.” During a city hall hearing in January that stretched late into the evening, she and a line of residents raised concerns about the water, energy, climate, and employment impacts of AI data centers. At the end, though, the city council upheld the planning department’s approval of the project, on a 5-2 vote. “Welcome to Reno,” Kathleen Taylor, Reno’s vice mayor, said before casting her vote. “We’re open for business.” Where the river ends In late March, I walk alongside Chairman Wadsworth, of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe, on the shores of Pyramid Lake, watching a row of fly-fishers in waders cast their lines into the cold waters.  The lake is the largest remnant of Lake Lahontan, an Ice Age inland sea that once stretched across western Nevada and would have submerged present-day Reno. But as the climate warmed, the lapping waters retreated, etching erosional terraces into the mountainsides and exposing tufa deposits around the lake, large formations of porous rock made of calcium-carbonate. That includes the pyramid-shaped island on the eastern shore that inspired the lake’s name. A lone angler stands along the shores of Pyramid Lake. In the decades after the US Reclamation Service completed the Derby Dam in 1905, Pyramid Lake declined another 80 feet and nearby Winnemucca Lake dried up entirely. “We know what happens when water use goes unchecked,” says Wadsworth, gesturing eastward toward the range across the lake, where Winnemucca once filled the next basin over. “Because all we have to do is look over there and see a dry, barren lake bed that used to be full.”In an earlier interview, Wadsworth acknowledged that the world needs data centers. But he argued they should be spread out across the country, not densely clustered in the middle of the Nevada desert.Given the fierce competition for resources up to now, he can’t imagine how there could be enough water to meet the demands of data centers, expanding cities, and other growing businesses without straining the limited local supplies that should, by his accounting, flow to Pyramid Lake. He fears these growing pressures will force the tribe to wage new legal battles to protect their rights and preserve the lake, extending what he refers to as “a century of water wars.” “We have seen the devastating effects of what happens when you mess with Mother Nature,” Wadsworth says. “Part of our spirit has left us. And that’s why we fight so hard to hold on to what’s left.”
    #data #center #boom #desert
    The data center boom in the desert
    In the high desert east of Reno, Nevada, construction crews are flattening the golden foothills of the Virginia Range, laying the foundations of a data center city. Google, Tract, Switch, EdgeCore, Novva, Vantage, and PowerHouse are all operating, building, or expanding huge facilities within the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, a business park bigger than the city of Detroit.  This story is a part of MIT Technology Review’s series “Power Hungry: AI and our energy future,” on the energy demands and carbon costs of the artificial-intelligence revolution. Meanwhile, Microsoft acquired more than 225 acres of undeveloped property within the center and an even larger plot in nearby Silver Springs, Nevada. Apple is expanding its data center, located just across the Truckee River from the industrial park. OpenAI has said it’s considering building a data center in Nevada as well. The corporate race to amass computing resources to train and run artificial intelligence models and store information in the cloud has sparked a data center boom in the desert—just far enough away from Nevada’s communities to elude wide notice and, some fear, adequate scrutiny.  Switch, a data center company based in Las Vegas, says the full build-out of its campus at the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center could exceed seven million square feet.EMILY NAJERA The full scale and potential environmental impacts of the developments aren’t known, because the footprint, energy needs, and water requirements are often closely guarded corporate secrets. Most of the companies didn’t respond to inquiries from MIT Technology Review, or declined to provide additional information about the projects.  But there’s “a whole lot of construction going on,” says Kris Thompson, who served as the longtime project manager for the industrial center before stepping down late last year. “The last number I heard was 13 million square feet under construction right now, which is massive.” Indeed, it’s the equivalent of almost five Empire State Buildings laid out flat. In addition, public filings from NV Energy, the state’s near-monopoly utility, reveal that a dozen data-center projects, mostly in this area, have requested nearly six gigawatts of electricity capacity within the next decade.  That would make the greater Reno area—the biggest little city in the world—one of the largest data-center markets around the globe. It would also require expanding the state’s power sector by about 40%, all for a single industry in an explosive growth stage that may, or may not, prove sustainable. The energy needs, in turn, suggest those projects could consume billions of gallons of water per year, according to an analysis conducted for this story.  Construction crews are busy building data centers throughout the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.EMILY NAJERA The build-out of a dense cluster of energy and water-hungry data centers in a small stretch of the nation’s driest state, where climate change is driving up temperatures faster than anywhere else in the country, has begun to raise alarms among water experts, environmental groups, and residents. That includes members of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe, whose namesake water body lies within their reservation and marks the end point of the Truckee River, the region’s main source of water. Much of Nevada has suffered through severe drought conditions for years, farmers and communities are drawing down many of the state’s groundwater reservoirs faster than they can be refilled, and global warming is sucking more and more moisture out of the region’s streams, shrubs, and soils. “Telling entities that they can come in and stick more straws in the ground for data centers is raising a lot of questions about sound management,” says Kyle Roerink, executive director of the Great Basin Water Network, a nonprofit that works to protect water resources throughout Nevada and Utah.  “We just don’t want to be in a situation where the tail is wagging the dog,” he later added, “where this demand for data centers is driving water policy.” Luring data centers In the late 1850s, the mountains southeast of Reno began enticing prospectors from across the country, who hoped to strike silver or gold in the famed Comstock Lode. But Storey County had few residents or economic prospects by the late 1990s, around the time when Don Roger Norman, a media-shy real estate speculator, spotted a new opportunity in the sagebrush-covered hills.  He began buying up tens of thousands of acres of land for tens of millions of dollars and lining up development approvals to lure industrial projects to what became the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center. His partners included Lance Gilman, a cowboy-hat-wearing real estate broker, who later bought the nearby Mustang Ranch brothel and won a seat as a county commissioner. In 1999, the county passed an ordinance that preapproves companies to develop most types of commercial and industrial projects across the business park, cutting months to years off the development process. That helped cinch deals with a flock of tenants looking to build big projects fast, including Walmart, Tesla, and Redwood Materials. Now the promise of fast permits is helping to draw data centers by the gigawatt. On a clear, cool January afternoon, Brian Armon, a commercial real estate broker who leads the industrial practices group at NAI Alliance, takes me on a tour of the projects around the region, which mostly entails driving around the business center. Lance Gilman, a local real estate broker, helped to develop the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center and land some of its largest tenants.GREGG SEGAL After pulling off Interstate 80 onto USA Parkway, he points out the cranes, earthmovers, and riprap foundations, where a variety of data centers are under construction. Deeper into the industrial park, Armon pulls up near Switch’s long, low, arched-roof facility, which sits on a terrace above cement walls and security gates. The Las Vegas–based company says the first phase of its data center campus encompasses more than a million square feet, and that the full build-out will cover seven times that space.  Over the next hill, we turn around in Google’s parking lot. Cranes, tents, framing, and construction equipment extend behind the company’s existing data center, filling much of the 1,210-acre lot that the search engine giant acquired in 2017. Last August, during an event at the University of Nevada, Reno, the company announced it would spend million to expand the data center campus along with another one in Las Vegas. Thompson says that the development company, Tahoe Reno Industrial LLC, has now sold off every parcel of developable land within the park. When I ask Armon what’s attracting all the data centers here, he starts with the fast approvals but cites a list of other lures as well: The inexpensive land. NV Energy’s willingness to strike deals to supply relatively low-cost electricity. Cool nighttime and winter temperatures, as far as American deserts go, which reduce the energy and water needs. The proximity to tech hubs such as Silicon Valley, which cuts latency for applications in which milliseconds matter. And the lack of natural disasters that could shut down the facilities, at least for the most part. “We are high in seismic activity,” he says. “But everything else is good. We’re not going to have a tornado or flood or a devastating wildfire.” Then there’s the generous tax policies.In 2023, Novva, a Utah-based data center company, announced plans to build a 300,000-square-foot facility within the industrial business park. Nevada doesn’t charge corporate income tax, and it has also enacted deep tax cuts specifically for data centers that set up shop in the state. That includes abatements of up to 75% on property tax for a decade or two—and nearly as much of a bargain on the sales and use taxes applied to equipment purchased for the facilities. Data centers don’t require many permanent workers to run the operations, but the projects have created thousands of construction jobs. They’re also helping to diversify the region’s economy beyond casinos and generating tax windfalls for the state, counties, and cities, says Jeff Sutich, executive director of the Northern Nevada Development Authority. Indeed, just three data-center projects, developed by Apple, Google, and Vantage, will produce nearly half a billion dollars in tax revenue for Nevada, even with those generous abatements, according to the Nevada Governor’s Office of Economic Development. The question is whether the benefits of data centers are worth the tradeoffs for Nevadans, given the public health costs, greenhouse-gas emissions, energy demands, and water strains. The rain shadow The Sierra Nevada’s granite peaks trace the eastern edge of California, forcing Pacific Ocean winds to rise and cool. That converts water vapor in the air into the rain and snow that fill the range’s tributaries, rivers, and lakes.  But the same meteorological phenomenon casts a rain shadow over much of neighboring Nevada, forming an arid expanse known as the Great Basin Desert. The state receives about 10 inches of precipitation a year, about a third of the national average. The Truckee River draws from the melting Sierra snowpack at the edge of Lake Tahoe, cascades down the range, and snakes through the flatlands of Reno and Sparks. It forks at the Derby Dam, a Reclamation Act project a few miles from the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, which diverts water to a farming region further east while allowing the rest to continue north toward Pyramid Lake.  Along the way, an engineered system of reservoirs, canals, and treatment plants divert, store, and release water from the river, supplying businesses, cities, towns, and native tribes across the region. But Nevada’s population and economy are expanding, creating more demands on these resources even as they become more constrained.  The Truckee River, which originates at Lake Tahoe and terminates at Pyramid Lake, is the major water source for cities, towns, and farms across northwestern Nevada.EMILY NAJERA Throughout much of the 2020s the state has suffered through one of the hottest and most widespread droughts on record, extending two decades of abnormally dry conditions across the American West. Some scientists fear it may constitute an emerging megadrought.  About 50% of Nevada currently faces moderate to exceptional drought conditions. In addition, more than half of the state’s hundreds of groundwater basins are already “over-appropriated,” meaning the water rights on paper exceed the levels believed to be underground.  It’s not clear if climate change will increase or decrease the state’s rainfall levels, on balance. But precipitation patterns are expected to become more erratic, whiplashing between short periods of intense rainfall and more-frequent, extended, or severe droughts.  In addition, more precipitation will fall as rain rather than snow, shortening the Sierra snow season by weeks to months over the coming decades.  “In the extreme case, at the end of the century, that’s pretty much all of winter,” says Sean McKenna, executive director of hydrologic sciences at the Desert Research Institute, a research division of the Nevada System of Higher Education. That loss will undermine an essential function of the Sierra snowpack: reliably delivering water to farmers and cities when it’s most needed in the spring and summer, across both Nevada and California.  These shifting conditions will require the region to develop better ways to store, preserve, and recycle the water it does get, McKenna says. Northern Nevada’s cities, towns, and agencies will also need to carefully evaluate and plan for the collective impacts of continuing growth and development on the interconnected water system, particularly when it comes to water-hungry projects like data centers, he adds. “We can’t consider each of these as a one-off, without considering that there may be tens or dozens of these in the next 15 years,” McKenna says.Thirsty data centers Data centers suck up water in two main ways. As giant rooms of server racks process information and consume energy, they generate heat that must be shunted away to prevent malfunctions and damage to the equipment. The processing units optimized for training and running AI models often draw more electricity and, in turn, produce more heat. To keep things cool, more and more data centers have turned to liquid cooling systems that don’t need as much electricity as fan cooling or air-conditioning. These often rely on water to absorb heat and transfer it to outdoor cooling towers, where much of the moisture evaporates. Microsoft’s US data centers, for instance, could have directly evaporated nearly 185,000 gallons of “clean freshwater” in the course of training OpenAI’s GPT-3 large language model, according to a 2023 preprint study led by researchers at the University of California, Riverside.What’s less appreciated, however, is that the larger data-center drain on water generally occurs indirectly, at the power plants generating extra electricity for the turbocharged AI sector. These facilities, in turn, require more water to cool down equipment, among other purposes. You have to add up both uses “to reflect the true water cost of data centers,” says Shaolei Ren, an associate professor of electrical and computer engineering at UC Riverside and coauthor of the study. Ren estimates that the 12 data-center projects listed in NV Energy’s report would directly consume between 860 million gallons and 5.7 billion gallons a year, based on the requested electricity capacity.The indirect water drain associated with electricity generation for those operations could add up to 15.5 billion gallons, based on the average consumption of the regional grid. The exact water figures would depend on shifting climate conditions, the type of cooling systems each data center uses, and the mix of power sources that supply the facilities. Solar power, which provides roughly a quarter of Nevada’s power, requires relatively little water to operate, for instance. But natural-gas plants, which generate about 56%, withdraw 2,803 gallons per megawatt-hour on average, according to the Energy Information Administration.  Geothermal plants, which produce about 10% of the state’s electricity by cycling water through hot rocks, generally consume less water than fossil fuel plants do but often require more water than other renewables, according to some research.  But here too, the water usage varies depending on the type of geothermal plant in question. Google has lined up several deals to partially power its data centers through Fervo Energy, which has helped to commercialize an emerging approach that injects water under high pressure to fracture rock and form wells deep below the surface.  The company stresses that it doesn’t evaporate water for cooling and that it relies on brackish groundwater, not fresh water, to develop and run its plants. In a recent post, Fervo noted that its facilities consume significantly less water per megawatt-hour than coal, nuclear, or natural-gas plants do. Part of NV Energy’s proposed plan to meet growing electricity demands in Nevada includes developing several natural-gas peaking units, adding more than one gigawatt of solar power and installing another gigawatt of battery storage. It's also forging ahead with a more than billion transmission project. But the company didn’t respond to questions concerning how it will supply all of the gigawatts of additional electricity requested by data centers, if the construction of those power plants will increase consumer rates, or how much water those facilities are expected to consume. NV Energy operates a transmission line, substation, and power plant in or around the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.EMILY NAJERA “NV Energy teams work diligently on our long-term planning to make investments in our infrastructure to serve new customers and the continued growth in the state without putting existing customers at risk,” the company said in a statement. An added challenge is that data centers need to run around the clock. That will often compel utilities to develop new electricity-generating sources that can run nonstop as well, as natural-gas, geothermal, or nuclear plants do, says Emily Grubert, an associate professor of sustainable energy policy at the University of Notre Dame, who has studied the relative water consumption of electricity sources.  “You end up with the water-intensive resources looking more important,” she adds. Even if NV Energy and the companies developing data centers do strive to power them through sources with relatively low water needs, “we only have so much ability to add six gigawatts to Nevada’s grid,” Grubert explains. “What you do will never be system-neutral, because it’s such a big number.” Securing supplies On a mid-February morning, I meet TRI’s Thompson and Don Gilman, Lance Gilman’s son, at the Storey County offices, located within the industrial center.  “I’m just a country boy who sells dirt,” Gilman, also a real estate broker, says by way of introduction.  We climb into his large SUV and drive to a reservoir in the heart of the industrial park, filled nearly to the lip.  Thompson explains that much of the water comes from an on-site treatment facility that filters waste fluids from companies in the park. In addition, tens of millions of gallons of treated effluent will also likely flow into the tank this year from the Truckee Meadows Water Authority Reclamation Facility, near the border of Reno and Sparks. That’s thanks to a 16-mile pipeline that the developers, the water authority, several tenants, and various local cities and agencies partnered to build, through a project that began in 2021. “Our general improvement district is furnishing that water to tech companies here in the park as we speak,” Thompson says. “That helps preserve the precious groundwater, so that is an environmental feather in the cap for these data centers. They are focused on environmental excellence.” The reservoir within the industrial business park provides water to data centers and other tenants.EMILY NAJERA But data centers often need drinking-quality water—not wastewater merely treated to irrigation standards—for evaporative cooling, “to avoid pipe clogs and/or bacterial growth,” the UC Riverside study notes. For instance, Google says its data centers withdrew about 7.7 billion gallons of water in 2023, and nearly 6 billion of those gallons were potable.  Tenants in the industrial park can potentially obtain access to water from the ground and the Truckee River, as well. From early on, the master developers worked hard to secure permits to water sources, since they are nearly as precious as development entitlements to companies hoping to build projects in the desert. Initially, the development company controlled a private business, the TRI Water and Sewer Company, that provided those services to the business park’s tenants, according to public documents. The company set up wells, a water tank, distribution lines, and a sewer disposal system.  But in 2000, the board of county commissioners established a general improvement district, a legal mechanism for providing municipal services in certain parts of the state, to manage electricity and then water within the center. It, in turn, hired TRI Water and Sewer as the operating company. As of its 2020 service plan, the general improvement district held permits for nearly 5,300 acre-feet of groundwater, “which can be pumped from well fields within the service area and used for new growth as it occurs.” The document lists another 2,000 acre-feet per year available from the on-site treatment facility, 1,000 from the Truckee River, and 4,000 more from the effluent pipeline.  Those figures haven’t budged much since, according to Shari Whalen, general manager of the TRI General Improvement District. All told, they add up to more than 4 billion gallons of water per year for all the needs of the industrial park and the tenants there, data centers and otherwise. Whalen says that the amount and quality of water required for any given data center depends on its design, and that those matters are worked out on a case-by-case basis.  When asked if the general improvement district is confident that it has adequate water resources to supply the needs of all the data centers under development, as well as other tenants at the industrial center, she says: “They can’t just show up and build unless they have water resources designated for their projects. We wouldn’t approve a project if it didn’t have those water resources.” Water As the region’s water sources have grown more constrained, lining up supplies has become an increasingly high-stakes and controversial business. More than a century ago, the US federal government filed a lawsuit against an assortment of parties pulling water from the Truckee River. The suit would eventually establish that the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe’s legal rights to water for irrigation superseded other claims. But the tribe has been fighting to protect those rights and increase flows from the river ever since, arguing that increasing strains on the watershed from upstream cities and businesses threaten to draw away water reserved for reservation farming, decrease lake levels, and harm native fish. The Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe considers the water body and its fish, including the endangered cui-ui and threatened Lahontan cutthroat trout, to be essential parts of its culture, identity, and way of life. The tribe was originally named Cui-ui Ticutta, which translates to cui-ui eaters. The lake continues to provide sustenance as well as business for the tribe and its members, a number of whom operate boat charters and fishing guide services. “It’s completely tied into us as a people,” says Steven Wadsworth, chairman of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe. “That is what has sustained us all this time,” he adds. “It’s just who we are. It’s part of our spiritual well-being.” Steven Wadsworth, chairman of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe, fears that data centers will divert water that would otherwise reach the tribe’s namesake lake.EMILY NAJERA In recent decades, the tribe has sued the Nevada State Engineer, Washoe County, the federal government, and others for overallocating water rights and endangering the lake’s fish. It also protested the TRI General Improvement District’s applications to draw thousands of additional acre‑feet of groundwater from a basin near the business park. In 2019, the State Engineer’s office rejected those requests, concluding that the basin was already fully appropriated.  More recently, the tribe took issue with the plan to build the pipeline and divert effluent that would have flown into the Truckee, securing an agreement that required the Truckee Meadows Water Authority and other parties to add back several thousand acre‑feet of water to the river.  Whalen says she’s sensitive to Wadsworth’s concerns. But she says that the pipeline promises to keep a growing amount of treated wastewater out of the river, where it could otherwise contribute to rising salt levels in the lake. “I think that the pipeline fromto our system is good for water quality in the river,” she says. “I understand philosophically the concerns about data centers, but the general improvement district is dedicated to working with everyone on the river for regional water-resource planning—and the tribe is no exception.” Water efficiency  In an email, Thompson added that he has “great respect and admiration,” for the tribe and has visited the reservation several times in an effort to help bring industrial or commercial development there. He stressed that all of the business park’s groundwater was “validated by the State Water Engineer,” and that the rights to surface water and effluent were purchased “for fair market value.”During the earlier interview at the industrial center, he and Gilman had both expressed confidence that tenants in the park have adequate water supplies, and that the businesses won’t draw water away from other areas.  “We’re in our own aquifer, our own water basin here,” Thompson said. “You put a straw in the ground here, you’re not going to pull water from Fernley or from Reno or from Silver Springs.” Gilman also stressed that data-center companies have gotten more water efficient in recent years, echoing a point others made as well. “With the newer technology, it’s not much of a worry,” says Sutich, of the Northern Nevada Development Authority. “The technology has come a long way in the last 10 years, which is really giving these guys the opportunity to be good stewards of water usage.” An aerial view of the cooling tower fans at Google’s data center in the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.GOOGLE Indeed, Google’s existing Storey County facility is air-cooled, according to the company’s latest environmental report. The data center withdrew 1.9 million gallons in 2023 but only consumed 200,000 gallons. The rest cycles back into the water system. Google said all the data centers under construction on its campus will also “utilize air-cooling technology.” The company didn’t respond to a question about the scale of its planned expansion in the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, and referred a question about indirect water consumption to NV Energy. The search giant has stressed that it strives to be water efficient across all of its data centers, and decides whether to use air or liquid cooling based on local supply and projected demand, among other variables. Four years ago, the company set a goal of replenishing more water than it consumes by 2030. Locally, it also committed to provide half a million dollars to the National Forest Foundation to improve the Truckee River watershed and reduce wildfire risks.  Microsoft clearly suggested in earlier news reports that the Silver Springs land it purchased around the end of 2022 would be used for a data center. NAI Alliance’s market real estate report identifies that lot, as well as the parcel Microsoft purchased within the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, as data center sites. But the company now declines to specify what it intends to build in the region.  “While the land purchase is public knowledge, we have not disclosed specific detailsour plans for the land or potential development timelines,” wrote Donna Whitehead, a Microsoft spokesperson, in an email.  Workers have begun grading land inside a fenced off lot within the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.EMILY NAJERA Microsoft has also scaled down its global data-center ambitions, backing away from several projects in recent months amid shifting economic conditions, according to various reports. Whatever it ultimately does or doesn’t build, the company stresses that it has made strides to reduce water consumption in its facilities. Late last year, the company announced that it’s using “chip-level cooling solutions” in data centers, which continually circulate water between the servers and chillers through a closed loop that the company claims doesn’t lose any water to evaporation. It says the design requires only a “nominal increase” in energy compared to its data centers that rely on evaporative water cooling. Others seem to be taking a similar approach. EdgeCore also said its 900,000-square-foot data center at the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center will rely on an “air-cooled closed-loop chiller” that doesn’t require water evaporation for cooling.  But some of the companies seem to have taken steps to ensure access to significant amounts of water. Switch, for instance, took a lead role in developing the effluent pipeline. In addition, Tract, which develops campuses on which third-party data centers can build their own facilities, has said it lined up more than 1,100 acre-feet of water rights, the equivalent of nearly 360 million gallons a year.  Apple, Novva, Switch, Tract, and Vantage didn’t respond to inquiries from MIT Technology Review.  Coming conflicts  The suggestion that companies aren’t straining water supplies when they adopt air cooling is, in many cases, akin to saying they’re not responsible for the greenhouse gas produced through their power use simply because it occurs outside of their facilities. In fact, the additional water used at a power plant to meet the increased electricity needs of air cooling may exceed any gains at the data center, Ren, of UC Riverside, says. “That’s actually very likely, because it uses a lot more energy,” he adds. That means that some of the companies developing data centers in and around Storey County may simply hand off their water challenges to other parts of Nevada or neighboring states across the drying American West, depending on where and how the power is generated, Ren says.  Google has said its air-cooled facilities require about 10% more electricity, and its environmental report notes that the Storey County facility is one of its two least-energy-efficient data centers.  Pipes running along Google’s data center campus help the search company cool its servers.GOOGLE Some fear there’s also a growing mismatch between what Nevada’s water permits allow, what’s actually in the ground, and what nature will provide as climate conditions shift. Notably, the groundwater committed to all parties from the Tracy Segment basin—a long-fought-over resource that partially supplies the TRI General Improvement District—already exceeds the “perennial yield.” That refers to the maximum amount that can be drawn out every year without depleting the reservoir over the long term. “If pumping does ultimately exceed the available supply, that means there will be conflict among users,” Roerink, of the Great Basin Water Network, said in an email. “So I have to wonder: Who could be suing whom? Who could be buying out whom? How will the tribe’s rights be defended?”The Truckee Meadows Water Authority, the community-owned utility that manages the water system for Reno and Sparks, said it is planning carefully for the future and remains confident there will be “sufficient resources for decades to come,” at least within its territory east of the industrial center. Storey County, the Truckee-Carson Irrigation District, and the State Engineer’s office didn’t respond to questions or accept interview requests.  Open for business As data center proposals have begun shifting into Northern Nevada’s cities, more local residents and organizations have begun to take notice and express concerns. The regional division of the Sierra Club, for instance, recently sought to overturn the approval of Reno’s first data center, about 20 miles west of the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.  Olivia Tanager, director of the Sierra Club’s Toiyabe Chapter, says the environmental organization was shocked by the projected electricity demands from data centers highlighted in NV Energy’s filings. Nevada’s wild horses are a common sight along USA Parkway, the highway cutting through the industrial business park. EMILY NAJERA “We have increasing interest in understanding the impact that data centers will have to our climate goals, to our grid as a whole, and certainly to our water resources,” she says. “The demands are extraordinary, and we don’t have that amount of water to toy around with.” During a city hall hearing in January that stretched late into the evening, she and a line of residents raised concerns about the water, energy, climate, and employment impacts of AI data centers. At the end, though, the city council upheld the planning department’s approval of the project, on a 5-2 vote. “Welcome to Reno,” Kathleen Taylor, Reno’s vice mayor, said before casting her vote. “We’re open for business.” Where the river ends In late March, I walk alongside Chairman Wadsworth, of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe, on the shores of Pyramid Lake, watching a row of fly-fishers in waders cast their lines into the cold waters.  The lake is the largest remnant of Lake Lahontan, an Ice Age inland sea that once stretched across western Nevada and would have submerged present-day Reno. But as the climate warmed, the lapping waters retreated, etching erosional terraces into the mountainsides and exposing tufa deposits around the lake, large formations of porous rock made of calcium-carbonate. That includes the pyramid-shaped island on the eastern shore that inspired the lake’s name. A lone angler stands along the shores of Pyramid Lake. In the decades after the US Reclamation Service completed the Derby Dam in 1905, Pyramid Lake declined another 80 feet and nearby Winnemucca Lake dried up entirely. “We know what happens when water use goes unchecked,” says Wadsworth, gesturing eastward toward the range across the lake, where Winnemucca once filled the next basin over. “Because all we have to do is look over there and see a dry, barren lake bed that used to be full.”In an earlier interview, Wadsworth acknowledged that the world needs data centers. But he argued they should be spread out across the country, not densely clustered in the middle of the Nevada desert.Given the fierce competition for resources up to now, he can’t imagine how there could be enough water to meet the demands of data centers, expanding cities, and other growing businesses without straining the limited local supplies that should, by his accounting, flow to Pyramid Lake. He fears these growing pressures will force the tribe to wage new legal battles to protect their rights and preserve the lake, extending what he refers to as “a century of water wars.” “We have seen the devastating effects of what happens when you mess with Mother Nature,” Wadsworth says. “Part of our spirit has left us. And that’s why we fight so hard to hold on to what’s left.” #data #center #boom #desert
    WWW.TECHNOLOGYREVIEW.COM
    The data center boom in the desert
    In the high desert east of Reno, Nevada, construction crews are flattening the golden foothills of the Virginia Range, laying the foundations of a data center city. Google, Tract, Switch, EdgeCore, Novva, Vantage, and PowerHouse are all operating, building, or expanding huge facilities within the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, a business park bigger than the city of Detroit.  This story is a part of MIT Technology Review’s series “Power Hungry: AI and our energy future,” on the energy demands and carbon costs of the artificial-intelligence revolution. Meanwhile, Microsoft acquired more than 225 acres of undeveloped property within the center and an even larger plot in nearby Silver Springs, Nevada. Apple is expanding its data center, located just across the Truckee River from the industrial park. OpenAI has said it’s considering building a data center in Nevada as well. The corporate race to amass computing resources to train and run artificial intelligence models and store information in the cloud has sparked a data center boom in the desert—just far enough away from Nevada’s communities to elude wide notice and, some fear, adequate scrutiny.  Switch, a data center company based in Las Vegas, says the full build-out of its campus at the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center could exceed seven million square feet.EMILY NAJERA The full scale and potential environmental impacts of the developments aren’t known, because the footprint, energy needs, and water requirements are often closely guarded corporate secrets. Most of the companies didn’t respond to inquiries from MIT Technology Review, or declined to provide additional information about the projects.  But there’s “a whole lot of construction going on,” says Kris Thompson, who served as the longtime project manager for the industrial center before stepping down late last year. “The last number I heard was 13 million square feet under construction right now, which is massive.” Indeed, it’s the equivalent of almost five Empire State Buildings laid out flat. In addition, public filings from NV Energy, the state’s near-monopoly utility, reveal that a dozen data-center projects, mostly in this area, have requested nearly six gigawatts of electricity capacity within the next decade.  That would make the greater Reno area—the biggest little city in the world—one of the largest data-center markets around the globe. It would also require expanding the state’s power sector by about 40%, all for a single industry in an explosive growth stage that may, or may not, prove sustainable. The energy needs, in turn, suggest those projects could consume billions of gallons of water per year, according to an analysis conducted for this story.  Construction crews are busy building data centers throughout the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.EMILY NAJERA The build-out of a dense cluster of energy and water-hungry data centers in a small stretch of the nation’s driest state, where climate change is driving up temperatures faster than anywhere else in the country, has begun to raise alarms among water experts, environmental groups, and residents. That includes members of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe, whose namesake water body lies within their reservation and marks the end point of the Truckee River, the region’s main source of water. Much of Nevada has suffered through severe drought conditions for years, farmers and communities are drawing down many of the state’s groundwater reservoirs faster than they can be refilled, and global warming is sucking more and more moisture out of the region’s streams, shrubs, and soils. “Telling entities that they can come in and stick more straws in the ground for data centers is raising a lot of questions about sound management,” says Kyle Roerink, executive director of the Great Basin Water Network, a nonprofit that works to protect water resources throughout Nevada and Utah.  “We just don’t want to be in a situation where the tail is wagging the dog,” he later added, “where this demand for data centers is driving water policy.” Luring data centers In the late 1850s, the mountains southeast of Reno began enticing prospectors from across the country, who hoped to strike silver or gold in the famed Comstock Lode. But Storey County had few residents or economic prospects by the late 1990s, around the time when Don Roger Norman, a media-shy real estate speculator, spotted a new opportunity in the sagebrush-covered hills.  He began buying up tens of thousands of acres of land for tens of millions of dollars and lining up development approvals to lure industrial projects to what became the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center. His partners included Lance Gilman, a cowboy-hat-wearing real estate broker, who later bought the nearby Mustang Ranch brothel and won a seat as a county commissioner. In 1999, the county passed an ordinance that preapproves companies to develop most types of commercial and industrial projects across the business park, cutting months to years off the development process. That helped cinch deals with a flock of tenants looking to build big projects fast, including Walmart, Tesla, and Redwood Materials. Now the promise of fast permits is helping to draw data centers by the gigawatt. On a clear, cool January afternoon, Brian Armon, a commercial real estate broker who leads the industrial practices group at NAI Alliance, takes me on a tour of the projects around the region, which mostly entails driving around the business center. Lance Gilman, a local real estate broker, helped to develop the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center and land some of its largest tenants.GREGG SEGAL After pulling off Interstate 80 onto USA Parkway, he points out the cranes, earthmovers, and riprap foundations, where a variety of data centers are under construction. Deeper into the industrial park, Armon pulls up near Switch’s long, low, arched-roof facility, which sits on a terrace above cement walls and security gates. The Las Vegas–based company says the first phase of its data center campus encompasses more than a million square feet, and that the full build-out will cover seven times that space.  Over the next hill, we turn around in Google’s parking lot. Cranes, tents, framing, and construction equipment extend behind the company’s existing data center, filling much of the 1,210-acre lot that the search engine giant acquired in 2017. Last August, during an event at the University of Nevada, Reno, the company announced it would spend $400 million to expand the data center campus along with another one in Las Vegas. Thompson says that the development company, Tahoe Reno Industrial LLC, has now sold off every parcel of developable land within the park (although several lots are available for resale following the failed gamble of one crypto tenant). When I ask Armon what’s attracting all the data centers here, he starts with the fast approvals but cites a list of other lures as well: The inexpensive land. NV Energy’s willingness to strike deals to supply relatively low-cost electricity. Cool nighttime and winter temperatures, as far as American deserts go, which reduce the energy and water needs. The proximity to tech hubs such as Silicon Valley, which cuts latency for applications in which milliseconds matter. And the lack of natural disasters that could shut down the facilities, at least for the most part. “We are high in seismic activity,” he says. “But everything else is good. We’re not going to have a tornado or flood or a devastating wildfire.” Then there’s the generous tax policies.In 2023, Novva, a Utah-based data center company, announced plans to build a 300,000-square-foot facility within the industrial business park. Nevada doesn’t charge corporate income tax, and it has also enacted deep tax cuts specifically for data centers that set up shop in the state. That includes abatements of up to 75% on property tax for a decade or two—and nearly as much of a bargain on the sales and use taxes applied to equipment purchased for the facilities. Data centers don’t require many permanent workers to run the operations, but the projects have created thousands of construction jobs. They’re also helping to diversify the region’s economy beyond casinos and generating tax windfalls for the state, counties, and cities, says Jeff Sutich, executive director of the Northern Nevada Development Authority. Indeed, just three data-center projects, developed by Apple, Google, and Vantage, will produce nearly half a billion dollars in tax revenue for Nevada, even with those generous abatements, according to the Nevada Governor’s Office of Economic Development. The question is whether the benefits of data centers are worth the tradeoffs for Nevadans, given the public health costs, greenhouse-gas emissions, energy demands, and water strains. The rain shadow The Sierra Nevada’s granite peaks trace the eastern edge of California, forcing Pacific Ocean winds to rise and cool. That converts water vapor in the air into the rain and snow that fill the range’s tributaries, rivers, and lakes.  But the same meteorological phenomenon casts a rain shadow over much of neighboring Nevada, forming an arid expanse known as the Great Basin Desert. The state receives about 10 inches of precipitation a year, about a third of the national average. The Truckee River draws from the melting Sierra snowpack at the edge of Lake Tahoe, cascades down the range, and snakes through the flatlands of Reno and Sparks. It forks at the Derby Dam, a Reclamation Act project a few miles from the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, which diverts water to a farming region further east while allowing the rest to continue north toward Pyramid Lake.  Along the way, an engineered system of reservoirs, canals, and treatment plants divert, store, and release water from the river, supplying businesses, cities, towns, and native tribes across the region. But Nevada’s population and economy are expanding, creating more demands on these resources even as they become more constrained.  The Truckee River, which originates at Lake Tahoe and terminates at Pyramid Lake, is the major water source for cities, towns, and farms across northwestern Nevada.EMILY NAJERA Throughout much of the 2020s the state has suffered through one of the hottest and most widespread droughts on record, extending two decades of abnormally dry conditions across the American West. Some scientists fear it may constitute an emerging megadrought.  About 50% of Nevada currently faces moderate to exceptional drought conditions. In addition, more than half of the state’s hundreds of groundwater basins are already “over-appropriated,” meaning the water rights on paper exceed the levels believed to be underground.  It’s not clear if climate change will increase or decrease the state’s rainfall levels, on balance. But precipitation patterns are expected to become more erratic, whiplashing between short periods of intense rainfall and more-frequent, extended, or severe droughts.  In addition, more precipitation will fall as rain rather than snow, shortening the Sierra snow season by weeks to months over the coming decades.  “In the extreme case, at the end of the century, that’s pretty much all of winter,” says Sean McKenna, executive director of hydrologic sciences at the Desert Research Institute, a research division of the Nevada System of Higher Education. That loss will undermine an essential function of the Sierra snowpack: reliably delivering water to farmers and cities when it’s most needed in the spring and summer, across both Nevada and California.  These shifting conditions will require the region to develop better ways to store, preserve, and recycle the water it does get, McKenna says. Northern Nevada’s cities, towns, and agencies will also need to carefully evaluate and plan for the collective impacts of continuing growth and development on the interconnected water system, particularly when it comes to water-hungry projects like data centers, he adds. “We can’t consider each of these as a one-off, without considering that there may be tens or dozens of these in the next 15 years,” McKenna says.Thirsty data centers Data centers suck up water in two main ways. As giant rooms of server racks process information and consume energy, they generate heat that must be shunted away to prevent malfunctions and damage to the equipment. The processing units optimized for training and running AI models often draw more electricity and, in turn, produce more heat. To keep things cool, more and more data centers have turned to liquid cooling systems that don’t need as much electricity as fan cooling or air-conditioning. These often rely on water to absorb heat and transfer it to outdoor cooling towers, where much of the moisture evaporates. Microsoft’s US data centers, for instance, could have directly evaporated nearly 185,000 gallons of “clean freshwater” in the course of training OpenAI’s GPT-3 large language model, according to a 2023 preprint study led by researchers at the University of California, Riverside. (The research has since been peer-reviewed and is awaiting publication.) What’s less appreciated, however, is that the larger data-center drain on water generally occurs indirectly, at the power plants generating extra electricity for the turbocharged AI sector. These facilities, in turn, require more water to cool down equipment, among other purposes. You have to add up both uses “to reflect the true water cost of data centers,” says Shaolei Ren, an associate professor of electrical and computer engineering at UC Riverside and coauthor of the study. Ren estimates that the 12 data-center projects listed in NV Energy’s report would directly consume between 860 million gallons and 5.7 billion gallons a year, based on the requested electricity capacity. (“Consumed” here means the water is evaporated, not merely withdrawn and returned to the engineered water system.) The indirect water drain associated with electricity generation for those operations could add up to 15.5 billion gallons, based on the average consumption of the regional grid. The exact water figures would depend on shifting climate conditions, the type of cooling systems each data center uses, and the mix of power sources that supply the facilities. Solar power, which provides roughly a quarter of Nevada’s power, requires relatively little water to operate, for instance. But natural-gas plants, which generate about 56%, withdraw 2,803 gallons per megawatt-hour on average, according to the Energy Information Administration.  Geothermal plants, which produce about 10% of the state’s electricity by cycling water through hot rocks, generally consume less water than fossil fuel plants do but often require more water than other renewables, according to some research.  But here too, the water usage varies depending on the type of geothermal plant in question. Google has lined up several deals to partially power its data centers through Fervo Energy, which has helped to commercialize an emerging approach that injects water under high pressure to fracture rock and form wells deep below the surface.  The company stresses that it doesn’t evaporate water for cooling and that it relies on brackish groundwater, not fresh water, to develop and run its plants. In a recent post, Fervo noted that its facilities consume significantly less water per megawatt-hour than coal, nuclear, or natural-gas plants do. Part of NV Energy’s proposed plan to meet growing electricity demands in Nevada includes developing several natural-gas peaking units, adding more than one gigawatt of solar power and installing another gigawatt of battery storage. It's also forging ahead with a more than $4 billion transmission project. But the company didn’t respond to questions concerning how it will supply all of the gigawatts of additional electricity requested by data centers, if the construction of those power plants will increase consumer rates, or how much water those facilities are expected to consume. NV Energy operates a transmission line, substation, and power plant in or around the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.EMILY NAJERA “NV Energy teams work diligently on our long-term planning to make investments in our infrastructure to serve new customers and the continued growth in the state without putting existing customers at risk,” the company said in a statement. An added challenge is that data centers need to run around the clock. That will often compel utilities to develop new electricity-generating sources that can run nonstop as well, as natural-gas, geothermal, or nuclear plants do, says Emily Grubert, an associate professor of sustainable energy policy at the University of Notre Dame, who has studied the relative water consumption of electricity sources.  “You end up with the water-intensive resources looking more important,” she adds. Even if NV Energy and the companies developing data centers do strive to power them through sources with relatively low water needs, “we only have so much ability to add six gigawatts to Nevada’s grid,” Grubert explains. “What you do will never be system-neutral, because it’s such a big number.” Securing supplies On a mid-February morning, I meet TRI’s Thompson and Don Gilman, Lance Gilman’s son, at the Storey County offices, located within the industrial center.  “I’m just a country boy who sells dirt,” Gilman, also a real estate broker, says by way of introduction.  We climb into his large SUV and drive to a reservoir in the heart of the industrial park, filled nearly to the lip.  Thompson explains that much of the water comes from an on-site treatment facility that filters waste fluids from companies in the park. In addition, tens of millions of gallons of treated effluent will also likely flow into the tank this year from the Truckee Meadows Water Authority Reclamation Facility, near the border of Reno and Sparks. That’s thanks to a 16-mile pipeline that the developers, the water authority, several tenants, and various local cities and agencies partnered to build, through a project that began in 2021. “Our general improvement district is furnishing that water to tech companies here in the park as we speak,” Thompson says. “That helps preserve the precious groundwater, so that is an environmental feather in the cap for these data centers. They are focused on environmental excellence.” The reservoir within the industrial business park provides water to data centers and other tenants.EMILY NAJERA But data centers often need drinking-quality water—not wastewater merely treated to irrigation standards—for evaporative cooling, “to avoid pipe clogs and/or bacterial growth,” the UC Riverside study notes. For instance, Google says its data centers withdrew about 7.7 billion gallons of water in 2023, and nearly 6 billion of those gallons were potable.  Tenants in the industrial park can potentially obtain access to water from the ground and the Truckee River, as well. From early on, the master developers worked hard to secure permits to water sources, since they are nearly as precious as development entitlements to companies hoping to build projects in the desert. Initially, the development company controlled a private business, the TRI Water and Sewer Company, that provided those services to the business park’s tenants, according to public documents. The company set up wells, a water tank, distribution lines, and a sewer disposal system.  But in 2000, the board of county commissioners established a general improvement district, a legal mechanism for providing municipal services in certain parts of the state, to manage electricity and then water within the center. It, in turn, hired TRI Water and Sewer as the operating company. As of its 2020 service plan, the general improvement district held permits for nearly 5,300 acre-feet of groundwater, “which can be pumped from well fields within the service area and used for new growth as it occurs.” The document lists another 2,000 acre-feet per year available from the on-site treatment facility, 1,000 from the Truckee River, and 4,000 more from the effluent pipeline.  Those figures haven’t budged much since, according to Shari Whalen, general manager of the TRI General Improvement District. All told, they add up to more than 4 billion gallons of water per year for all the needs of the industrial park and the tenants there, data centers and otherwise. Whalen says that the amount and quality of water required for any given data center depends on its design, and that those matters are worked out on a case-by-case basis.  When asked if the general improvement district is confident that it has adequate water resources to supply the needs of all the data centers under development, as well as other tenants at the industrial center, she says: “They can’t just show up and build unless they have water resources designated for their projects. We wouldn’t approve a project if it didn’t have those water resources.” Water As the region’s water sources have grown more constrained, lining up supplies has become an increasingly high-stakes and controversial business. More than a century ago, the US federal government filed a lawsuit against an assortment of parties pulling water from the Truckee River. The suit would eventually establish that the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe’s legal rights to water for irrigation superseded other claims. But the tribe has been fighting to protect those rights and increase flows from the river ever since, arguing that increasing strains on the watershed from upstream cities and businesses threaten to draw away water reserved for reservation farming, decrease lake levels, and harm native fish. The Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe considers the water body and its fish, including the endangered cui-ui and threatened Lahontan cutthroat trout, to be essential parts of its culture, identity, and way of life. The tribe was originally named Cui-ui Ticutta, which translates to cui-ui eaters. The lake continues to provide sustenance as well as business for the tribe and its members, a number of whom operate boat charters and fishing guide services. “It’s completely tied into us as a people,” says Steven Wadsworth, chairman of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe. “That is what has sustained us all this time,” he adds. “It’s just who we are. It’s part of our spiritual well-being.” Steven Wadsworth, chairman of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe, fears that data centers will divert water that would otherwise reach the tribe’s namesake lake.EMILY NAJERA In recent decades, the tribe has sued the Nevada State Engineer, Washoe County, the federal government, and others for overallocating water rights and endangering the lake’s fish. It also protested the TRI General Improvement District’s applications to draw thousands of additional acre‑feet of groundwater from a basin near the business park. In 2019, the State Engineer’s office rejected those requests, concluding that the basin was already fully appropriated.  More recently, the tribe took issue with the plan to build the pipeline and divert effluent that would have flown into the Truckee, securing an agreement that required the Truckee Meadows Water Authority and other parties to add back several thousand acre‑feet of water to the river.  Whalen says she’s sensitive to Wadsworth’s concerns. But she says that the pipeline promises to keep a growing amount of treated wastewater out of the river, where it could otherwise contribute to rising salt levels in the lake. “I think that the pipeline from [the Truckee Meadows Water Authority] to our system is good for water quality in the river,” she says. “I understand philosophically the concerns about data centers, but the general improvement district is dedicated to working with everyone on the river for regional water-resource planning—and the tribe is no exception.” Water efficiency  In an email, Thompson added that he has “great respect and admiration,” for the tribe and has visited the reservation several times in an effort to help bring industrial or commercial development there. He stressed that all of the business park’s groundwater was “validated by the State Water Engineer,” and that the rights to surface water and effluent were purchased “for fair market value.”During the earlier interview at the industrial center, he and Gilman had both expressed confidence that tenants in the park have adequate water supplies, and that the businesses won’t draw water away from other areas.  “We’re in our own aquifer, our own water basin here,” Thompson said. “You put a straw in the ground here, you’re not going to pull water from Fernley or from Reno or from Silver Springs.” Gilman also stressed that data-center companies have gotten more water efficient in recent years, echoing a point others made as well. “With the newer technology, it’s not much of a worry,” says Sutich, of the Northern Nevada Development Authority. “The technology has come a long way in the last 10 years, which is really giving these guys the opportunity to be good stewards of water usage.” An aerial view of the cooling tower fans at Google’s data center in the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.GOOGLE Indeed, Google’s existing Storey County facility is air-cooled, according to the company’s latest environmental report. The data center withdrew 1.9 million gallons in 2023 but only consumed 200,000 gallons. The rest cycles back into the water system. Google said all the data centers under construction on its campus will also “utilize air-cooling technology.” The company didn’t respond to a question about the scale of its planned expansion in the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, and referred a question about indirect water consumption to NV Energy. The search giant has stressed that it strives to be water efficient across all of its data centers, and decides whether to use air or liquid cooling based on local supply and projected demand, among other variables. Four years ago, the company set a goal of replenishing more water than it consumes by 2030. Locally, it also committed to provide half a million dollars to the National Forest Foundation to improve the Truckee River watershed and reduce wildfire risks.  Microsoft clearly suggested in earlier news reports that the Silver Springs land it purchased around the end of 2022 would be used for a data center. NAI Alliance’s market real estate report identifies that lot, as well as the parcel Microsoft purchased within the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center, as data center sites. But the company now declines to specify what it intends to build in the region.  “While the land purchase is public knowledge, we have not disclosed specific details [of] our plans for the land or potential development timelines,” wrote Donna Whitehead, a Microsoft spokesperson, in an email.  Workers have begun grading land inside a fenced off lot within the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.EMILY NAJERA Microsoft has also scaled down its global data-center ambitions, backing away from several projects in recent months amid shifting economic conditions, according to various reports. Whatever it ultimately does or doesn’t build, the company stresses that it has made strides to reduce water consumption in its facilities. Late last year, the company announced that it’s using “chip-level cooling solutions” in data centers, which continually circulate water between the servers and chillers through a closed loop that the company claims doesn’t lose any water to evaporation. It says the design requires only a “nominal increase” in energy compared to its data centers that rely on evaporative water cooling. Others seem to be taking a similar approach. EdgeCore also said its 900,000-square-foot data center at the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center will rely on an “air-cooled closed-loop chiller” that doesn’t require water evaporation for cooling.  But some of the companies seem to have taken steps to ensure access to significant amounts of water. Switch, for instance, took a lead role in developing the effluent pipeline. In addition, Tract, which develops campuses on which third-party data centers can build their own facilities, has said it lined up more than 1,100 acre-feet of water rights, the equivalent of nearly 360 million gallons a year.  Apple, Novva, Switch, Tract, and Vantage didn’t respond to inquiries from MIT Technology Review.  Coming conflicts  The suggestion that companies aren’t straining water supplies when they adopt air cooling is, in many cases, akin to saying they’re not responsible for the greenhouse gas produced through their power use simply because it occurs outside of their facilities. In fact, the additional water used at a power plant to meet the increased electricity needs of air cooling may exceed any gains at the data center, Ren, of UC Riverside, says. “That’s actually very likely, because it uses a lot more energy,” he adds. That means that some of the companies developing data centers in and around Storey County may simply hand off their water challenges to other parts of Nevada or neighboring states across the drying American West, depending on where and how the power is generated, Ren says.  Google has said its air-cooled facilities require about 10% more electricity, and its environmental report notes that the Storey County facility is one of its two least-energy-efficient data centers.  Pipes running along Google’s data center campus help the search company cool its servers.GOOGLE Some fear there’s also a growing mismatch between what Nevada’s water permits allow, what’s actually in the ground, and what nature will provide as climate conditions shift. Notably, the groundwater committed to all parties from the Tracy Segment basin—a long-fought-over resource that partially supplies the TRI General Improvement District—already exceeds the “perennial yield.” That refers to the maximum amount that can be drawn out every year without depleting the reservoir over the long term. “If pumping does ultimately exceed the available supply, that means there will be conflict among users,” Roerink, of the Great Basin Water Network, said in an email. “So I have to wonder: Who could be suing whom? Who could be buying out whom? How will the tribe’s rights be defended?”The Truckee Meadows Water Authority, the community-owned utility that manages the water system for Reno and Sparks, said it is planning carefully for the future and remains confident there will be “sufficient resources for decades to come,” at least within its territory east of the industrial center. Storey County, the Truckee-Carson Irrigation District, and the State Engineer’s office didn’t respond to questions or accept interview requests.  Open for business As data center proposals have begun shifting into Northern Nevada’s cities, more local residents and organizations have begun to take notice and express concerns. The regional division of the Sierra Club, for instance, recently sought to overturn the approval of Reno’s first data center, about 20 miles west of the Tahoe Reno Industrial Center.  Olivia Tanager, director of the Sierra Club’s Toiyabe Chapter, says the environmental organization was shocked by the projected electricity demands from data centers highlighted in NV Energy’s filings. Nevada’s wild horses are a common sight along USA Parkway, the highway cutting through the industrial business park. EMILY NAJERA “We have increasing interest in understanding the impact that data centers will have to our climate goals, to our grid as a whole, and certainly to our water resources,” she says. “The demands are extraordinary, and we don’t have that amount of water to toy around with.” During a city hall hearing in January that stretched late into the evening, she and a line of residents raised concerns about the water, energy, climate, and employment impacts of AI data centers. At the end, though, the city council upheld the planning department’s approval of the project, on a 5-2 vote. “Welcome to Reno,” Kathleen Taylor, Reno’s vice mayor, said before casting her vote. “We’re open for business.” Where the river ends In late March, I walk alongside Chairman Wadsworth, of the Pyramid Lake Paiute Tribe, on the shores of Pyramid Lake, watching a row of fly-fishers in waders cast their lines into the cold waters.  The lake is the largest remnant of Lake Lahontan, an Ice Age inland sea that once stretched across western Nevada and would have submerged present-day Reno. But as the climate warmed, the lapping waters retreated, etching erosional terraces into the mountainsides and exposing tufa deposits around the lake, large formations of porous rock made of calcium-carbonate. That includes the pyramid-shaped island on the eastern shore that inspired the lake’s name. A lone angler stands along the shores of Pyramid Lake. In the decades after the US Reclamation Service completed the Derby Dam in 1905, Pyramid Lake declined another 80 feet and nearby Winnemucca Lake dried up entirely. “We know what happens when water use goes unchecked,” says Wadsworth, gesturing eastward toward the range across the lake, where Winnemucca once filled the next basin over. “Because all we have to do is look over there and see a dry, barren lake bed that used to be full.”In an earlier interview, Wadsworth acknowledged that the world needs data centers. But he argued they should be spread out across the country, not densely clustered in the middle of the Nevada desert.Given the fierce competition for resources up to now, he can’t imagine how there could be enough water to meet the demands of data centers, expanding cities, and other growing businesses without straining the limited local supplies that should, by his accounting, flow to Pyramid Lake. He fears these growing pressures will force the tribe to wage new legal battles to protect their rights and preserve the lake, extending what he refers to as “a century of water wars.” “We have seen the devastating effects of what happens when you mess with Mother Nature,” Wadsworth says. “Part of our spirit has left us. And that’s why we fight so hard to hold on to what’s left.”
    0 Yorumlar 0 hisse senetleri 0 önizleme
  • Wikipedia picture of the day for May 19

    Chester Cathedral is a cathedral of the Church of England and the mother church of the Diocese of Chester. It is located in the city of Chester, Cheshire, England. The cathedral, formerly the abbey church of a Benedictine monastery dedicated to Saint Werburgh, is dedicated to Christ and the Blessed Virgin Mary. Since 1541, it has been the seat of the Bishop of Chester. This photograph shows the interior of the Lady Chapel at Chester Cathedral, built between 1265 and 1290 in the Early English Gothic style. It contains the Shrine of St Werburgh, dating from the 14th century, and also has a sedilia and a piscina. It is decorated with carved roof bosses representing the Trinity, the Madonna and Child, and the murder of Thomas Becket.

    Photograph credit: David Iliff

    Recently featured:
    El Tatio
    Short-beaked echidna
    Margaret Hamilton

    Archive
    More featured pictures
    #wikipedia #picture #day
    Wikipedia picture of the day for May 19
    Chester Cathedral is a cathedral of the Church of England and the mother church of the Diocese of Chester. It is located in the city of Chester, Cheshire, England. The cathedral, formerly the abbey church of a Benedictine monastery dedicated to Saint Werburgh, is dedicated to Christ and the Blessed Virgin Mary. Since 1541, it has been the seat of the Bishop of Chester. This photograph shows the interior of the Lady Chapel at Chester Cathedral, built between 1265 and 1290 in the Early English Gothic style. It contains the Shrine of St Werburgh, dating from the 14th century, and also has a sedilia and a piscina. It is decorated with carved roof bosses representing the Trinity, the Madonna and Child, and the murder of Thomas Becket. Photograph credit: David Iliff Recently featured: El Tatio Short-beaked echidna Margaret Hamilton Archive More featured pictures #wikipedia #picture #day
    EN.WIKIPEDIA.ORG
    Wikipedia picture of the day for May 19
    Chester Cathedral is a cathedral of the Church of England and the mother church of the Diocese of Chester. It is located in the city of Chester, Cheshire, England. The cathedral, formerly the abbey church of a Benedictine monastery dedicated to Saint Werburgh, is dedicated to Christ and the Blessed Virgin Mary. Since 1541, it has been the seat of the Bishop of Chester. This photograph shows the interior of the Lady Chapel at Chester Cathedral, built between 1265 and 1290 in the Early English Gothic style. It contains the Shrine of St Werburgh, dating from the 14th century, and also has a sedilia and a piscina. It is decorated with carved roof bosses representing the Trinity, the Madonna and Child, and the murder of Thomas Becket. Photograph credit: David Iliff Recently featured: El Tatio Short-beaked echidna Margaret Hamilton Archive More featured pictures
    0 Yorumlar 0 hisse senetleri 0 önizleme
  • Donna Maria Feghali’s Eshrin Collection Captures a Pivotal Year

    For many of us, 2020 was a year of upheaval and transformation. We all faced our own challenges, and for Lebanese designer Donna Maria Feghali, it marked a creative shift stemming from what she describes as a “really intense personal journey.” Feghali candidly shares: “Looking back, I realized it totally reflected in my creative work and in this collection, which is way different from anything I’ve ever done before.” That year, she established her Paris-based studio, and now, she introduces Eshrin, a furniture collection dedicated to that pivotal time. Named after the Arabic word for twenty, Eshrin is an exploration of contrasts – structured yet fluid, bold yet understated – bridging past experiences with a new creative vision.

    Eshrin is Feghali’s first collection produced in Egypt, created in collaboration with Cairo-based manufacturer Nineteen Furniture. The series includes a dining table, dining chair, coffee and side tables, a buffet, and two couches, each piece embodying her signature blend of sculptural presence and refined simplicity.

    The Eshrin Dining Table is the central piece of the collection, embodying a sculptural approach to furniture. Its base, comprising four arched Egyptian limestone cylinders in Golden Sinai and Grey Triesta, supports a Macedonian white marble tabletop, creating a striking contrast between solidity and lightness.

    Complementing the table, the Eshrin Dining Chair echoes its curvature of the base with a sleek silhouette and curved backrest. Crafted from acid-treated beech wood and upholstered in bouclé fabric, it blends structure with softness, offering a seat that is both comfortable and visually refined.

    Like the dining table, the Eshrin Buffet is also designed with a cylindrical base, balancing the solidity of its structure. The rounded edges extend beyond the frame of the storage, providing a natural grip to open doors that reveal ample storage.

    The Eshrin Side Table, sculptural in its own right, merges bold geometry with organic warmth. The solid beech wood base, finished with an acid treatment, anchors the piece, while the pitch pine burned wood top adds a tactile dimension.

    The Eshrin Coffee Tables have a resemblance to both the dining table and the side table. With their arched cylindrical bases and perfectly balanced table tops, they reinforce the collection’s play on form and weight.

    Rounding out the collection, the minimalist linear Eshrin Couch features subtle curves that soften its structured silhouette. Available in two variations – one featuring an acid-treated beech wood base with white bouclé upholstery, the other with a lacquered beech wood base and textured beige fabric – the couch is a soft landing spot for solo relaxation or open conversation.
    We all came away from 2020 changed in some way with our perspectives shifted and our priorities reshaped. That year marked the beginning of a new creative chapter for Feghali, one that led to Eshrin. Through this collection, she translates a deeply personal journey into form, material, and balance, proving that even in times of uncertainty, something new and meaningful can emerge.

    To learn more about Donna Maria Feghali’s Eshrin collection, visit donnamariafeghali.com.
    #donna #maria #feghalis #eshrin #collection
    Donna Maria Feghali’s Eshrin Collection Captures a Pivotal Year
    For many of us, 2020 was a year of upheaval and transformation. We all faced our own challenges, and for Lebanese designer Donna Maria Feghali, it marked a creative shift stemming from what she describes as a “really intense personal journey.” Feghali candidly shares: “Looking back, I realized it totally reflected in my creative work and in this collection, which is way different from anything I’ve ever done before.” That year, she established her Paris-based studio, and now, she introduces Eshrin, a furniture collection dedicated to that pivotal time. Named after the Arabic word for twenty, Eshrin is an exploration of contrasts – structured yet fluid, bold yet understated – bridging past experiences with a new creative vision. Eshrin is Feghali’s first collection produced in Egypt, created in collaboration with Cairo-based manufacturer Nineteen Furniture. The series includes a dining table, dining chair, coffee and side tables, a buffet, and two couches, each piece embodying her signature blend of sculptural presence and refined simplicity. The Eshrin Dining Table is the central piece of the collection, embodying a sculptural approach to furniture. Its base, comprising four arched Egyptian limestone cylinders in Golden Sinai and Grey Triesta, supports a Macedonian white marble tabletop, creating a striking contrast between solidity and lightness. Complementing the table, the Eshrin Dining Chair echoes its curvature of the base with a sleek silhouette and curved backrest. Crafted from acid-treated beech wood and upholstered in bouclé fabric, it blends structure with softness, offering a seat that is both comfortable and visually refined. Like the dining table, the Eshrin Buffet is also designed with a cylindrical base, balancing the solidity of its structure. The rounded edges extend beyond the frame of the storage, providing a natural grip to open doors that reveal ample storage. The Eshrin Side Table, sculptural in its own right, merges bold geometry with organic warmth. The solid beech wood base, finished with an acid treatment, anchors the piece, while the pitch pine burned wood top adds a tactile dimension. The Eshrin Coffee Tables have a resemblance to both the dining table and the side table. With their arched cylindrical bases and perfectly balanced table tops, they reinforce the collection’s play on form and weight. Rounding out the collection, the minimalist linear Eshrin Couch features subtle curves that soften its structured silhouette. Available in two variations – one featuring an acid-treated beech wood base with white bouclé upholstery, the other with a lacquered beech wood base and textured beige fabric – the couch is a soft landing spot for solo relaxation or open conversation. We all came away from 2020 changed in some way with our perspectives shifted and our priorities reshaped. That year marked the beginning of a new creative chapter for Feghali, one that led to Eshrin. Through this collection, she translates a deeply personal journey into form, material, and balance, proving that even in times of uncertainty, something new and meaningful can emerge. To learn more about Donna Maria Feghali’s Eshrin collection, visit donnamariafeghali.com. #donna #maria #feghalis #eshrin #collection
    DESIGN-MILK.COM
    Donna Maria Feghali’s Eshrin Collection Captures a Pivotal Year
    For many of us, 2020 was a year of upheaval and transformation. We all faced our own challenges, and for Lebanese designer Donna Maria Feghali, it marked a creative shift stemming from what she describes as a “really intense personal journey.” Feghali candidly shares: “Looking back, I realized it totally reflected in my creative work and in this collection, which is way different from anything I’ve ever done before.” That year, she established her Paris-based studio, and now, she introduces Eshrin, a furniture collection dedicated to that pivotal time. Named after the Arabic word for twenty, Eshrin is an exploration of contrasts – structured yet fluid, bold yet understated – bridging past experiences with a new creative vision. Eshrin is Feghali’s first collection produced in Egypt, created in collaboration with Cairo-based manufacturer Nineteen Furniture. The series includes a dining table, dining chair, coffee and side tables, a buffet, and two couches, each piece embodying her signature blend of sculptural presence and refined simplicity. The Eshrin Dining Table is the central piece of the collection, embodying a sculptural approach to furniture. Its base, comprising four arched Egyptian limestone cylinders in Golden Sinai and Grey Triesta, supports a Macedonian white marble tabletop, creating a striking contrast between solidity and lightness. Complementing the table, the Eshrin Dining Chair echoes its curvature of the base with a sleek silhouette and curved backrest. Crafted from acid-treated beech wood and upholstered in bouclé fabric, it blends structure with softness, offering a seat that is both comfortable and visually refined. Like the dining table, the Eshrin Buffet is also designed with a cylindrical base, balancing the solidity of its structure. The rounded edges extend beyond the frame of the storage, providing a natural grip to open doors that reveal ample storage. The Eshrin Side Table, sculptural in its own right, merges bold geometry with organic warmth. The solid beech wood base, finished with an acid treatment, anchors the piece, while the pitch pine burned wood top adds a tactile dimension. The Eshrin Coffee Tables have a resemblance to both the dining table and the side table. With their arched cylindrical bases and perfectly balanced table tops, they reinforce the collection’s play on form and weight. Rounding out the collection, the minimalist linear Eshrin Couch features subtle curves that soften its structured silhouette. Available in two variations – one featuring an acid-treated beech wood base with white bouclé upholstery, the other with a lacquered beech wood base and textured beige fabric – the couch is a soft landing spot for solo relaxation or open conversation. We all came away from 2020 changed in some way with our perspectives shifted and our priorities reshaped. That year marked the beginning of a new creative chapter for Feghali, one that led to Eshrin. Through this collection, she translates a deeply personal journey into form, material, and balance, proving that even in times of uncertainty, something new and meaningful can emerge. To learn more about Donna Maria Feghali’s Eshrin collection, visit donnamariafeghali.com.
    0 Yorumlar 0 hisse senetleri 0 önizleme
  • Dan Knowlton on how to make content audiences genuinely love

    In a world saturated with intrusive marketing, Dan Knowlton has pioneered a refreshing approach.
    As co-founder of video and social media marketing agency Knowlton, Dan has perfected the art of what he calls Advertainment—a creative methodology that's transforming how businesses connect with their audiences.
    "Advertainment is our unique approach that fuses advertising with entertainment," he explains.
    "Instead of pushing traditional, sales-heavy content that people tend to scroll past, we create content that audiences actually want to watch.
    It's about being so engaging that it's impossible to ignore while still weaving in strategic messaging that drives results."
    Intriguing, right? We caught up with Dan to learn more about his journey, how Advertainment is created in practice, the role that Adobe Express plays in his workflow, and his tips for crafting marketable content yourself.
    Origin story
    Knowlton was born of humble origins.
    In 2017, Dan and his brother Lloyd started their agency from their parents' spare room after becoming "sick of intrusive, over-salesy marketing." They began by producing funny videos to promote their company.
    Then, gradually, they realised the need to structure these videos strategically to drive business.
    "For our clients, this approach has been a game-changer," Dan reflects.
    "It's helped us generate millions in trackable revenue and secure major contracts.
    Because people are not just seeing the content: they're enjoying it, sharing it, and taking action because of it."
    Today, their client list includes Wahl, Sunny D, Boston Consulting Group, BBC Storyworks, and Channel 4.
    And the timing couldn't have been better.
    After all, the social media marketing landscape has undergone significant shifts in recent years, requiring businesses to adapt their strategies accordingly.
    "Social media marketing has become way more visual and fast-paced," Dan observes.
    "It's no longer about just pushing out long-form content or polished ads.
    People want something that feels more authentic and real.
    Video is massive, and short, engaging clips are what people are looking for."
    The right tools
    Behind every successful creative is a toolkit that enables rapid ideation and execution.
    For Dan and his team, Adobe Express—the quick and easy content creation app for designers and non-designers alike—has become an indispensable resource for developing their content.
    "Adobe Express is a really practical tool for us, especially when we're working fast and need high-quality visuals," Dan enthuses.
    "One specific way I use it is to make quick edits to pitches that our designers have created using other Adobe software.
    As I'm not a professional designer, it's super-handy because it makes the process straightforward without needing advanced design skills."
    The team will also use Adobe Express to create social media graphics, video thumbnails and visual elements for campaigns.
    "It's great for maintaining brand consistency while still being flexible enough to adapt to different campaign needs," says Dan.

    Standout features
    The crucial thing is to boost speed and efficiency without sacrificing quality.
    Dan highlights specific features in Adobe Express that help square that circle.
    "The huge library of Adobe-quality templates is a lifesaver when we need to create visuals fast," he notes.
    We can easily tweak them to fit our brand or the specific campaign."
    He particularly values the Brand Kit feature.
    "This keeps our branding consistent, especially when we're working on multiple projects at once," he explains.
    We can store logos, fonts, and colour schemes and apply them with just a few clicks."
    Adobe Express also excels at quick edits.
    "Things like background removal and resizing are just really easy to do without any hassle," Dan points out.
    Finally, he praises the software's collaborative tools.
    "Since the team often works on projects together, these make it simple to pick up where someone else left off," he explains.
    In summary, Dan explains that "Adobe Express is not about overcomplicating things—it's a really practical tool that makes us more efficient."
    Real-world results
    So, how does this all work in practice? Dan shares a specific example of how Adobe Express transformed a marketing campaign.
    "We were working on paid creative assets for a large SaaS business we supported during their UK relaunch," he recalls.
    "The client needed some tweaks to their existing designs to make them more engaging.
    We used Adobe Express to quickly adjust layouts, update messaging, and test a few different variations."
    The results speak for themselves.
    "The refreshed ads we created significantly outperformed the original assets they were using: higher click-through rates and way more engagement," Dan reveals.
    "It just shows how making a few quick design tweaks can make a massive difference, especially when you're working with a tight turnaround."
    No surprise, then, that Dan is now an Adobe Express Ambassador: you can find details of the programme, and how you can join it, here.
    Content tips for small businesses
    Dan has some valuable insights for small businesses aiming to create engaging video content using tools like Adobe Express.
    "Tell a story," he urges.
    "Make your videos about people, stories, or real experiences rather than just products.
    That's what makes them relatable.
    But make them short and sweet: People don't have time for long-winded content.
    Get to the point quickly and make it punchy."
    Feeling overwhelmed by the pressure to create content? Then, step back and take a deep breath.
    "Don't try to reinvent the wheel every time," Dan stresses.
    "Some of our best content ideas come from seeing what's already working for other creators, particularly on platforms like TikTok.
    If you see a format or trend that's performing well, put your own spin on it rather than starting from scratch.
    Also, you don't need to be everywhere at once.
    Pick one platform where your audience hangs out and master it before branching out."
    Furthermore, he emphasises consistency over perfection: "Use tools like Adobe Express to quickly repurpose content.
    For example, if you make a great video, turn it into a few shorter clips or add some graphics to create a new post."
    Finally, Dan encourages businesses to: "show your personality.
    Don't be afraid to be a bit quirky or real; that's what people connect with.
    But at the same time, stay on-brand.
    Use consistent colours, fonts and logos to make sure people know it's you."
    The power of humour
    The thing Dan's best known for, of course, is his use of humour.
    And there's no reason you can't follow him down that route, too.
    "Humour is a game-changer when it's done right," he asserts.
    "Too many brands play it safe, but being funny is a great way to stand out and make people remember you."
    For inspiration, Dan suggests looking to the professionals.
    "Draw inspiration from comedy creators like Imogen Andrews, Al Nash, Jack Joseph, or even shows like Peep Show and Aunty Donna," he urges.
    "These creators have a knack for making relatable, funny content that people can't help but engage with."
    When it comes to creating your own content, he adds, "Don't overthink it.
    Humour is about having fun, and if your content feels too forced, it won't resonate.
    Experiment, learn from what works, and lean into that."
    A mission to transform marketing
    What began as a rebellion against intrusive marketing has evolved into a successful agency with an in-house team of 15 and a pool of over 50 trusted freelancers.
    Dan's mission is clear: "To rid the world of crap marketing".
    Through the power of Advertainment and with tools like Adobe Express at his disposal, Knowlton is showing that marketing doesn't have to be an interruption—it can be content that audiences genuinely enjoy.
    As Dan puts it: "We make audiences enjoy the process of being convinced to buy your products and services." And in today's competitive landscape, that might just be the most valuable skill a marketer can offer.

    Source: https://www.creativeboom.com/insight/the-art-of-advertainment-dan-knowlton-on-transforming-your-marketing-through-humour/" style="color: #0066cc;">https://www.creativeboom.com/insight/the-art-of-advertainment-dan-knowlton-on-transforming-your-marketing-through-humour/
    #dan #knowlton #how #make #content #audiences #genuinely #love
    Dan Knowlton on how to make content audiences genuinely love
    In a world saturated with intrusive marketing, Dan Knowlton has pioneered a refreshing approach. As co-founder of video and social media marketing agency Knowlton, Dan has perfected the art of what he calls Advertainment—a creative methodology that's transforming how businesses connect with their audiences. "Advertainment is our unique approach that fuses advertising with entertainment," he explains. "Instead of pushing traditional, sales-heavy content that people tend to scroll past, we create content that audiences actually want to watch. It's about being so engaging that it's impossible to ignore while still weaving in strategic messaging that drives results." Intriguing, right? We caught up with Dan to learn more about his journey, how Advertainment is created in practice, the role that Adobe Express plays in his workflow, and his tips for crafting marketable content yourself. Origin story Knowlton was born of humble origins. In 2017, Dan and his brother Lloyd started their agency from their parents' spare room after becoming "sick of intrusive, over-salesy marketing." They began by producing funny videos to promote their company. Then, gradually, they realised the need to structure these videos strategically to drive business. "For our clients, this approach has been a game-changer," Dan reflects. "It's helped us generate millions in trackable revenue and secure major contracts. Because people are not just seeing the content: they're enjoying it, sharing it, and taking action because of it." Today, their client list includes Wahl, Sunny D, Boston Consulting Group, BBC Storyworks, and Channel 4. And the timing couldn't have been better. After all, the social media marketing landscape has undergone significant shifts in recent years, requiring businesses to adapt their strategies accordingly. "Social media marketing has become way more visual and fast-paced," Dan observes. "It's no longer about just pushing out long-form content or polished ads. People want something that feels more authentic and real. Video is massive, and short, engaging clips are what people are looking for." The right tools Behind every successful creative is a toolkit that enables rapid ideation and execution. For Dan and his team, Adobe Express—the quick and easy content creation app for designers and non-designers alike—has become an indispensable resource for developing their content. "Adobe Express is a really practical tool for us, especially when we're working fast and need high-quality visuals," Dan enthuses. "One specific way I use it is to make quick edits to pitches that our designers have created using other Adobe software. As I'm not a professional designer, it's super-handy because it makes the process straightforward without needing advanced design skills." The team will also use Adobe Express to create social media graphics, video thumbnails and visual elements for campaigns. "It's great for maintaining brand consistency while still being flexible enough to adapt to different campaign needs," says Dan. Standout features The crucial thing is to boost speed and efficiency without sacrificing quality. Dan highlights specific features in Adobe Express that help square that circle. "The huge library of Adobe-quality templates is a lifesaver when we need to create visuals fast," he notes. We can easily tweak them to fit our brand or the specific campaign." He particularly values the Brand Kit feature. "This keeps our branding consistent, especially when we're working on multiple projects at once," he explains. We can store logos, fonts, and colour schemes and apply them with just a few clicks." Adobe Express also excels at quick edits. "Things like background removal and resizing are just really easy to do without any hassle," Dan points out. Finally, he praises the software's collaborative tools. "Since the team often works on projects together, these make it simple to pick up where someone else left off," he explains. In summary, Dan explains that "Adobe Express is not about overcomplicating things—it's a really practical tool that makes us more efficient." Real-world results So, how does this all work in practice? Dan shares a specific example of how Adobe Express transformed a marketing campaign. "We were working on paid creative assets for a large SaaS business we supported during their UK relaunch," he recalls. "The client needed some tweaks to their existing designs to make them more engaging. We used Adobe Express to quickly adjust layouts, update messaging, and test a few different variations." The results speak for themselves. "The refreshed ads we created significantly outperformed the original assets they were using: higher click-through rates and way more engagement," Dan reveals. "It just shows how making a few quick design tweaks can make a massive difference, especially when you're working with a tight turnaround." No surprise, then, that Dan is now an Adobe Express Ambassador: you can find details of the programme, and how you can join it, here. Content tips for small businesses Dan has some valuable insights for small businesses aiming to create engaging video content using tools like Adobe Express. "Tell a story," he urges. "Make your videos about people, stories, or real experiences rather than just products. That's what makes them relatable. But make them short and sweet: People don't have time for long-winded content. Get to the point quickly and make it punchy." Feeling overwhelmed by the pressure to create content? Then, step back and take a deep breath. "Don't try to reinvent the wheel every time," Dan stresses. "Some of our best content ideas come from seeing what's already working for other creators, particularly on platforms like TikTok. If you see a format or trend that's performing well, put your own spin on it rather than starting from scratch. Also, you don't need to be everywhere at once. Pick one platform where your audience hangs out and master it before branching out." Furthermore, he emphasises consistency over perfection: "Use tools like Adobe Express to quickly repurpose content. For example, if you make a great video, turn it into a few shorter clips or add some graphics to create a new post." Finally, Dan encourages businesses to: "show your personality. Don't be afraid to be a bit quirky or real; that's what people connect with. But at the same time, stay on-brand. Use consistent colours, fonts and logos to make sure people know it's you." The power of humour The thing Dan's best known for, of course, is his use of humour. And there's no reason you can't follow him down that route, too. "Humour is a game-changer when it's done right," he asserts. "Too many brands play it safe, but being funny is a great way to stand out and make people remember you." For inspiration, Dan suggests looking to the professionals. "Draw inspiration from comedy creators like Imogen Andrews, Al Nash, Jack Joseph, or even shows like Peep Show and Aunty Donna," he urges. "These creators have a knack for making relatable, funny content that people can't help but engage with." When it comes to creating your own content, he adds, "Don't overthink it. Humour is about having fun, and if your content feels too forced, it won't resonate. Experiment, learn from what works, and lean into that." A mission to transform marketing What began as a rebellion against intrusive marketing has evolved into a successful agency with an in-house team of 15 and a pool of over 50 trusted freelancers. Dan's mission is clear: "To rid the world of crap marketing". Through the power of Advertainment and with tools like Adobe Express at his disposal, Knowlton is showing that marketing doesn't have to be an interruption—it can be content that audiences genuinely enjoy. As Dan puts it: "We make audiences enjoy the process of being convinced to buy your products and services." And in today's competitive landscape, that might just be the most valuable skill a marketer can offer. Source: https://www.creativeboom.com/insight/the-art-of-advertainment-dan-knowlton-on-transforming-your-marketing-through-humour/ #dan #knowlton #how #make #content #audiences #genuinely #love
    Dan Knowlton on how to make content audiences genuinely love
    In a world saturated with intrusive marketing, Dan Knowlton has pioneered a refreshing approach. As co-founder of video and social media marketing agency Knowlton, Dan has perfected the art of what he calls Advertainment—a creative methodology that's transforming how businesses connect with their audiences. "Advertainment is our unique approach that fuses advertising with entertainment," he explains. "Instead of pushing traditional, sales-heavy content that people tend to scroll past, we create content that audiences actually want to watch. It's about being so engaging that it's impossible to ignore while still weaving in strategic messaging that drives results." Intriguing, right? We caught up with Dan to learn more about his journey, how Advertainment is created in practice, the role that Adobe Express plays in his workflow, and his tips for crafting marketable content yourself. Origin story Knowlton was born of humble origins. In 2017, Dan and his brother Lloyd started their agency from their parents' spare room after becoming "sick of intrusive, over-salesy marketing." They began by producing funny videos to promote their company. Then, gradually, they realised the need to structure these videos strategically to drive business. "For our clients, this approach has been a game-changer," Dan reflects. "It's helped us generate millions in trackable revenue and secure major contracts. Because people are not just seeing the content: they're enjoying it, sharing it, and taking action because of it." Today, their client list includes Wahl, Sunny D, Boston Consulting Group, BBC Storyworks, and Channel 4. And the timing couldn't have been better. After all, the social media marketing landscape has undergone significant shifts in recent years, requiring businesses to adapt their strategies accordingly. "Social media marketing has become way more visual and fast-paced," Dan observes. "It's no longer about just pushing out long-form content or polished ads. People want something that feels more authentic and real. Video is massive, and short, engaging clips are what people are looking for." The right tools Behind every successful creative is a toolkit that enables rapid ideation and execution. For Dan and his team, Adobe Express—the quick and easy content creation app for designers and non-designers alike—has become an indispensable resource for developing their content. "Adobe Express is a really practical tool for us, especially when we're working fast and need high-quality visuals," Dan enthuses. "One specific way I use it is to make quick edits to pitches that our designers have created using other Adobe software. As I'm not a professional designer, it's super-handy because it makes the process straightforward without needing advanced design skills." The team will also use Adobe Express to create social media graphics, video thumbnails and visual elements for campaigns. "It's great for maintaining brand consistency while still being flexible enough to adapt to different campaign needs," says Dan. Standout features The crucial thing is to boost speed and efficiency without sacrificing quality. Dan highlights specific features in Adobe Express that help square that circle. "The huge library of Adobe-quality templates is a lifesaver when we need to create visuals fast," he notes. We can easily tweak them to fit our brand or the specific campaign." He particularly values the Brand Kit feature. "This keeps our branding consistent, especially when we're working on multiple projects at once," he explains. We can store logos, fonts, and colour schemes and apply them with just a few clicks." Adobe Express also excels at quick edits. "Things like background removal and resizing are just really easy to do without any hassle," Dan points out. Finally, he praises the software's collaborative tools. "Since the team often works on projects together, these make it simple to pick up where someone else left off," he explains. In summary, Dan explains that "Adobe Express is not about overcomplicating things—it's a really practical tool that makes us more efficient." Real-world results So, how does this all work in practice? Dan shares a specific example of how Adobe Express transformed a marketing campaign. "We were working on paid creative assets for a large SaaS business we supported during their UK relaunch," he recalls. "The client needed some tweaks to their existing designs to make them more engaging. We used Adobe Express to quickly adjust layouts, update messaging, and test a few different variations." The results speak for themselves. "The refreshed ads we created significantly outperformed the original assets they were using: higher click-through rates and way more engagement," Dan reveals. "It just shows how making a few quick design tweaks can make a massive difference, especially when you're working with a tight turnaround." No surprise, then, that Dan is now an Adobe Express Ambassador: you can find details of the programme, and how you can join it, here. Content tips for small businesses Dan has some valuable insights for small businesses aiming to create engaging video content using tools like Adobe Express. "Tell a story," he urges. "Make your videos about people, stories, or real experiences rather than just products. That's what makes them relatable. But make them short and sweet: People don't have time for long-winded content. Get to the point quickly and make it punchy." Feeling overwhelmed by the pressure to create content? Then, step back and take a deep breath. "Don't try to reinvent the wheel every time," Dan stresses. "Some of our best content ideas come from seeing what's already working for other creators, particularly on platforms like TikTok. If you see a format or trend that's performing well, put your own spin on it rather than starting from scratch. Also, you don't need to be everywhere at once. Pick one platform where your audience hangs out and master it before branching out." Furthermore, he emphasises consistency over perfection: "Use tools like Adobe Express to quickly repurpose content. For example, if you make a great video, turn it into a few shorter clips or add some graphics to create a new post." Finally, Dan encourages businesses to: "show your personality. Don't be afraid to be a bit quirky or real; that's what people connect with. But at the same time, stay on-brand. Use consistent colours, fonts and logos to make sure people know it's you." The power of humour The thing Dan's best known for, of course, is his use of humour. And there's no reason you can't follow him down that route, too. "Humour is a game-changer when it's done right," he asserts. "Too many brands play it safe, but being funny is a great way to stand out and make people remember you." For inspiration, Dan suggests looking to the professionals. "Draw inspiration from comedy creators like Imogen Andrews, Al Nash, Jack Joseph, or even shows like Peep Show and Aunty Donna," he urges. "These creators have a knack for making relatable, funny content that people can't help but engage with." When it comes to creating your own content, he adds, "Don't overthink it. Humour is about having fun, and if your content feels too forced, it won't resonate. Experiment, learn from what works, and lean into that." A mission to transform marketing What began as a rebellion against intrusive marketing has evolved into a successful agency with an in-house team of 15 and a pool of over 50 trusted freelancers. Dan's mission is clear: "To rid the world of crap marketing". Through the power of Advertainment and with tools like Adobe Express at his disposal, Knowlton is showing that marketing doesn't have to be an interruption—it can be content that audiences genuinely enjoy. As Dan puts it: "We make audiences enjoy the process of being convinced to buy your products and services." And in today's competitive landscape, that might just be the most valuable skill a marketer can offer.
    0 Yorumlar 0 hisse senetleri 0 önizleme
  • 9 Patio Trends Changing Today’s Backyards
    The COVID-19 pandemic changed homeowners’ priorities for their outdoor spaces; they’ve since envisioned them as flexible extensions of their residences’ interiors.
    “It was during the pandemic that we noticed the huge upswing in demand for terraces, balconies, and patios, and that has not abated,” notes mono-monikered New York–based designer Clodagh.
    “It’s that need we have to know that we can escape from a confined space: the need for air, sky, and vista.”According to the National Association of Realtors, 64% of homeowners seek to create multifunctional outdoor spaces, which aligns with the boom in the outdoor living market—this market segment is projected to hit $26.8 billion by 2027.
    But in a sea of new furnishings and materials, what patio trends are here to stay? AD PRO tapped industry experts to share the patio designs shaping today’s outdoor spaces.A poolside shade structure at a Los Angeles home by DISC Interiors is designed as an outdoor living room.
    Photo: Sam FrostKeep it seamless“Clients that are looking for their outdoor spaces to be designed similarly to their indoors, so there’s a seamless transition between the two,” explains New York–based interior designer Tina Ramchandani.
    “Clients are excited about feeling like they are in their living rooms—just outside! This involves carrying the same flooring or same color/finish of flooring, similar furniture and fabric styles, and the same color palette over to the exterior area.”Landscape architect Robert Bell is seeing more use of color outdoors, as clients and manufacturers move away from a monotone look inside too.
    “While adding pops of color via cushions or pillows has long been a design trick, clients are committing to unique tile and furniture colors like blue, coral or yellow,” he says, noting that he recently designed a flamingo pink garden gate for a home in South Florida.Join NowAD PRO members enjoy exclusive benefits.
    Get a year of unlimited access for $25 $20 per month.ArrowExtending the color palette beyond the interiors is a budget-friendly and effective way to synergize indoor and outdoor spaces, says Jessica Shaw, director of interior design at The Turett Collaborative.
    Taking it a step further, and matching styles is even better.
    “We design our outdoor spaces the same way we tackle our interiors.
    We look for comfort, luxury, and timelessness,” explains Jose Achi, senior director of design development at Clodagh Design.
    “Our exterior experiences not only include the usual outdoor living room arrangements, but we truly believe in people’s primal connection to the outdoors—we even provide beds to be able to sleep under a starry sky to complete the outdoor living experience.”Providing the same level of comfort in both interior and exterior spaces is important too.
    For example, installing a flush heater over an outdoor dining table or outdoor living room helps smooth the transition from inside to outside the home without the shock of a temperature change, says Southern California–based designer Dustin Morris, principal of AD PRO Directory firm Eyoh Design.“Often placed near the large sliding doors, the warm air creates a barrier that even helps regulate the indoor temperature so that you can have those doors opened up and the cold air doesn’t seem to get in,” Morris explains.
    “Homeowners love them because you are always able to use that outdoor space.”Meanwhile, a pass-through window to the patio can set up a physical link to ground outdoor design.
    “Many of our homes set up fold-away servery windows with bar seating looking back into the kitchen,” Morris says.
    “This allows the kitchen to be connected to the outdoor space and for the people seated outdoors to be connected to the people in the kitchen.” While this window is a very social feature, it also satisfies a functional need, as food from the indoor kitchen can be served through it to the outdoor kitchen or dining space.The veranda at this Tucson, Arizona, home by landscape architect Elizabeth Przygoda overflows with cozy desert personality.
    Courtesy of Elizabeth PrzygodaGo plush—or super sleek“In the last few years, we’ve been incorporating more furniture that has the feel and the look of indoor furniture,” says AD PRO Directory designer Tom Stringer.To put a finer point on it, says San Francisco–based interior and product designer Jiun Ho, “Out is the dull, square-edged, traditional, utilitarian teak furniture that screams ‘Grandma’s house.’” Instead, pros are embracing sculptural, weather-resilient furnishings that can hold their own—and play as well outside as they potentially could indoors.
    Noting that most conventional teak outdoor furniture has stayed the same for over 50 years, Ho has taken to designing pieces to function well wherever good design is needed.
    For example, his Furu outdoor dining furniture melds teak and stainless steel for a sexy aesthetic.Jiun Ho’s creations, like the teak Kiyomizu Dining Table, buck cliché conventions of traditional outdoor furniture.
    Courtesy of Jiun HoLindsey Jamison, lead designer and partner at Rumor Designs, loves a curved sofa on a patio.
    “In an open space like a patio, it can function in the center of the space which makes everything feel more playful seeing the curves,” she notes.
    “[Organic shapes] immediately make a patio feel cozy and warm.
    A neutral fabric curved sofa will add a sense of serene, calm—everything you want to relax in an outdoor space.”LA-based interior designer Kishani Perera says clients are gravitating toward “softer, less-structured furniture in favor of cozier pieces more in line with indoor pieces than outdoor—whether it’s for a more cushy sofa, a fab weather-resistant rug, or a rounded occasional table.” Genevieve Lake, owner of Florida-based design firm Love Lake Studio, points out that advances in performance fabrics can also lend a helping hand.
    “Gone are the days of crunchy, cardboard-feeling outdoor furniture,” she says; today, it’s all about velvets, weaves, and bouclés.Lauren Lerner, CEO and founder of Living with Lolo in Scottsdale, Arizona, goes so far as adding accouterments beyond just furniture.
    “We enjoy crafting outdoor living spaces furnished with rugs and even outdoor TVs,” she says.
    “Our designs [use] natural materials like stone, wood, and plants to create an organic, inviting ambiance.” And don’t forget to create shade where it may not exist naturally, says Indiana-based designer Susan Yeley: “Big sturdy umbrellas add architectural interest and make outdoor gatherings on sunny days more pleasant.”Landscape architect Elizabeth Przygoda, founder of Boxhill, is noticing the rise of custom ramadas and shade structures.
    “These aren’t just to block the sun, they’re fully outfitted spaces with lighting, fans, and lounge setups,” she explains.
    “In the past month alone, we’ve installed five of them.
    They’re definitely an investment, but they completely transform the usability of a yard.
    It’s astonishing how quickly they transform a space.”No need for overly coordinated patio sets, says Inner Gardens’ Stephen Block: A mix of vintage and modern is just as compelling for an outdoor space as it is for an indoor one.
    Courtesy of Inner GardensMix materials, eras, and price pointsStephen Block of the store Inner Gardens, with locations in Malibu and Culver City, California, cautions against going matchy-matchy through old standbys like coordinating deck sets.
    He prefers to invest in “an eclectic mix”—wood, wicker, metal, and concrete—to carve out a more creative, personalized vibe.
    And designers shouldn’t feel too hemmed-in by sticking to a particular era of furnishings, he adds: “Mixing vintage with modern pieces creates a timeless aesthetic that feels fresh while adding character and depth to the space.”Przygoda says she appreciates the trend of mixing old and new—like sourcing vintage captain’s chairs for the ends of a contemporary dining table—and is seeing a lot more mixing of highs and lows.
    “Someone might put an IKEA rug under a $12,000 outdoor table—and it works,” she says.
    “That’s one of the things I love most about landscape and outdoor design: It’s much more forgiving than interior design.”She adds, “Layering these highs and lows and olds and news gives spaces ‘legs’ to stand on, and they don't feel so staged and catalogue-ish.”LA-based interior designer Alex Yeske has noticed an influx of European inspirations in patio trends.
    “I am personally a huge fan of European outdoor spaces and like to achieve that vibe from a mix of materials—rattan, iron, stone, wood—and mixing and matching new pieces with vintage finds,” she says.
    “There have been many fun iron and powder-coated steel furniture lines introduced for outdoor use, as well as more options beyond stripes for patterned outdoor fabrics.”To achieve a curated look, Shaw mixes brands and textures.
    “While there is something appealing about the clean and minimal approach of finding a furniture line you love and purchasing a full set, there is a richness and greater sense of personality and originality that comes from mixing things up,” she says.
    “It ultimately allows our clients to have a greater feeling of satisfaction and connection to their outdoor living spaces.”This Texas home by architects Calvin Chen and Thomas Bercy has a large patio between its pool pavilion and main house, which both use reclaimed Douglas fir and Glulam beams; landscape by Ciel Design for Gardens.
    Photo: Douglas Friedman / Styling: Jenny O'ConnorSource eco-friendly findsAesthetics and functionality are not the only concerns for patio designs; increasingly, homeowners and designers weigh environmental impact when furnishing an open-air room.
    “Clients are asking for products made of more natural materials instead of plastic.
    Outdoor furniture made from rope, teak, and naturally sourced wood is not only better for the environment, but also much better to the touch than plastic,” Stringer notes.Similarly, Joseph Carline, partner at Kligerman Architecture & Design in New York, says his firm’s recent focus for patio design has been to “use local materials that not only exude timeless beauty but are sustainable and ethically sourced.” Local reclaimed or FSC-certified hardwoods and natural stone are top choices for patio furniture, as they tend to have a smaller carbon footprint.
    “We also often use US-made brick products as patio pavers, which are endlessly versatile, durable, and just look stunning,” he continues, naming materials like limestone and sandstone as options that “offer a range of textures and colors to suit various aesthetic preferences while maintaining sustainability.”Bell also sees increased focus on recycled or reused paving materials.
    “Reclaimed Chicago brick pavers are a perennial favorite but now mixed with tabby materials like recycled shell or glass pavers,” he says.
    “Bricks and concrete pavers are often made locally or regionally and may be a greener (and tariff-free) choice compared to European or Indian stones shipped long distances.
    We've had lots of simulated limestone paving made in the Palm Beach area.”To further reduce a garden’s environmental impact, Carline says his firm “embraces water-saving landscaping techniques, such as native plantings and permeable hardscaping surfaces to help conserve water and promote biodiversity.
    These elements not only enhance the beauty of the patio but also contribute to a healthier ecosystem.”Carline also says his firm “embraces water-saving landscaping techniques, such as native plantings and permeable hardscaping surfaces to help conserve water and promote biodiversity.
    These elements not only enhance the beauty of the patio but also contribute to a healthier ecosystem.”A small private patio in the citrus grove at Paseo La Cresta II, designed by KAA
    © Roger Davies/OTTOAdopt native and edible plantsWhat’s an outdoor living space without proper plantings? Trees, shrubs, plants, and flowers not only add aesthetic appeal but also ground a patio design in its site-specific locale.
    “Biophilia in design is magic to all of us,” Clodagh offers.
    “We like to turn terraces and patios, large and small, into greenery-filled gardens as much as we can, all for a huge mental health boost.
    They make wonderful spaces to sneak out and connect with nature and disconnect from devices.
    All the senses become more alert outdoors and you can listen to the sounds of life in your garden.”Nashville-based designer Brad Ramsey notices a trend toward using native species in patio planting, as they tend to require less maintenance.
    “Many people also opt for native evergreen plants and perennials for year-round green and annual color without having to purchase and replant every spring,” he says.“Using trees and shrubs that are native to your region contributes to a healthy ecosystem and attracts highly desirable visitors to the garden such as birds and butterflies,” explain Damien and Jacqueline Harrison, principals at landscape firm Harrison Green in New York.
    “We like to ensure that at least two thirds of our gardens are made up of native plants.”The design duo also favors edible plants, which are both beautiful and functional, and likes to use espaliers to train fruiting trees to grow in a flat plane along a wall.
    They say they’ve had great success with using espaliers for apple and pear trees in small patio spaces in New York City, as they take up less space.
    “They’re a nice alternative to a vine for coverage on a wall and will immediately elevate the look of any garden,” they add.LA-based senior landscape architect Michael McGowan of AD PRO Directory firm KAA Design loves the idea of smaller, more intimate patio spaces that integrate biodiverse gardens—think plants, flowers, and veggies.
    He even created a mini fruit tree grove into one client project.
    “The divine scent of spring citrus blossoms and comfy furniture entice residents to spend time enjoying the serenity of the space,” notes McGowan.A robust dining setup, sculptural outdoor lighting, bar cart, and a fireside lounge help make Donna Mondi’s design for this alfresco space especially inviting.
    Photo: David PattersonFire it upAn outdoor fire feature can be the pièce de résistance of a patio design.
    “We rarely design homes without an outdoor living room, complete with a fireplace,” says Bruce Bockus, architect and chairman at Bockus Payne.
    From actual wood-burning fireplaces to gas-powered devices that can turn on via smartphone or remote control, these amenities can help extend the season of a patio into the cooler months.
    “We like to hook up firepits directly to a gas line for easy-peasy ambiance and heat,” says Yeley in Indiana.“Horizontal gas fireplaces are a trending design feature right now.
    You can place them low and position a television above it at an easily viewable height,” adds Bockus, noting the need to offer clients a few options.
    “A firepit is the least expensive way,” he says, but it needs to be placed in the open.
    “If you like the feeling of being under the stars, it might be the perfect choice for you.”But beyond including just any old fire source, Stafford of Rumor Designs says that firepits are trending away from sleek, modern forms and leaning into structures that exude more character.
    “Lately, we’ve found how important it is to make the most simple things interesting,” she says.
    “For so long we’ve whittled elements down to such a modern, clean skeleton with no [personality], and we’re ready to add thoughtful details back into design elements.”Przygoda adds, “With all the recent wildfires on the West Coast, we’re seeing more focus on safety.
    Clients are opting for firepits that use hidden propane tanks, which can be easily shut off, contained, and controlled.
    They’re beautiful but practical, which is exactly what outdoor living should be.”A multi-level garden in San Francisco for architectural designer Abigail Turin features a small pool and seamless indoor-outdoor access.
    Landscape design by Ken Mendonça.
    Photo: Sang An / Styling: Rod HipskindTake the plungeAlthough there was a time when grand backyard swimming pools were all the rage, today’s homeowners are thinking smaller—much smaller—and leaning into more niche spa amenities like cold plunges.
    Often this is because clients “want to build their own private sanctuary to decompress after a stressful work day or lounge on the weekend,” notes Jennifer Nawada Evans, owner and designer at Nawada Landscape Design.“We love the growing emphasis on wellness in design and that more people are putting in saunas and pools,” says North Carolina–based interior designer Carrie Moore.
    “The design of these elements is getting more sophisticated.
    Tiny plunge pools are being put in smaller urban backyards, and while they are [compact], they still have a very calming impact on our senses.”Taking the plunge, so to speak, also leaves more space to enjoy the rest of the garden.
    Plus they’re easier to install, says Nawada Evans.
    “They take up less space, water, and energy than a standard-size swimming pool, and they require fewer chemicals.”Blu Dot Longday Bar CartTerrace Solid Wood Bar CartBring on the bar carts“Designers love a good bar cart moment, and outdoor patios are no exception,” says Denver-based designer Donna Mondi, who recently added Holly Hunt’s Omura bar cart to her own patio.
    “It’s been used for tequila tasting, a backup bar, and champagne service for events at our home,” she notes.
    “It’s stylish, strong enough to withstand the elements, and mobile so we can wheel it where we need it.Dan Mazzarini, principal and creative director at BHDM Design, also thinks that bar carts add a lavish aesthetic to patio designs for all seasons.
    “Bar carts can do much more than just hold liquor,” he explains.
    “From accommodating dim sum to buffets, these pieces are both form and function and go from poolside chic to dinner party elegant as the sun sets.” There are plenty of bar-cart styles that combine the warmth of wood with cool aluminum to meld well with other patio furniture and decor.North Carolina–based Carrie Moore decked out this alfresco kitchen with plenty of pendant lighting and cozy cushions.
    Lissa Gotwals Photography / Courtesy of Carrie Moore Interior DesignLight it rightCoastal Living Chic Coastal Beehive Outdoor PendantThe pros we spoke to emphasized that lighting design must be integrated into a design scheme from the inception of a project, not as an afterthought.
    “I’ll always encourage clients to have fun with outdoor lighting,” notes Perera, “from a beautiful chandelier…to an unexpected fixture to add a touch of whimsy to the space.”Eyoh’s Morris is noticing many outdoor spaces that don't have permanent overhead lighting structures opt for café lights instead.
    “Café lights over outdoor spaces lend a very ephemeral and romantic feeling to the space in the evening, as the string of soft lights offers the coziness of an overhead ceiling while being completely open to the stars,” he explains.To create an appealing atmosphere outside, “We accent trees, light pathways, and string party lights to make our patios just as inviting,” Ramsey says.
    “And now we have all kinds of options for rechargeable lamps to provide even more charm and warmth to our thoughtfully designed outdoor rooms.”Similarly, Washington, DC–based AD PRO Directory designer Zoë Feldman favors solar-powered string lights.
    “They’re effortless, energy-efficient, and add just the right amount of magic to any outdoor space,” she says.
    “No plugs, no fuss, just instant ambiance.”APPLY NOWGrow your business with the AD PRO DirectoryArrow
    Source: https://www.architecturaldigest.com/story/patio-trends-changing-todays-backyards" style="color: #0066cc;">https://www.architecturaldigest.com/story/patio-trends-changing-todays-backyards
    #patio #trends #changing #todays #backyards
    9 Patio Trends Changing Today’s Backyards
    The COVID-19 pandemic changed homeowners’ priorities for their outdoor spaces; they’ve since envisioned them as flexible extensions of their residences’ interiors. “It was during the pandemic that we noticed the huge upswing in demand for terraces, balconies, and patios, and that has not abated,” notes mono-monikered New York–based designer Clodagh. “It’s that need we have to know that we can escape from a confined space: the need for air, sky, and vista.”According to the National Association of Realtors, 64% of homeowners seek to create multifunctional outdoor spaces, which aligns with the boom in the outdoor living market—this market segment is projected to hit $26.8 billion by 2027. But in a sea of new furnishings and materials, what patio trends are here to stay? AD PRO tapped industry experts to share the patio designs shaping today’s outdoor spaces.A poolside shade structure at a Los Angeles home by DISC Interiors is designed as an outdoor living room. Photo: Sam FrostKeep it seamless“Clients that are looking for their outdoor spaces to be designed similarly to their indoors, so there’s a seamless transition between the two,” explains New York–based interior designer Tina Ramchandani. “Clients are excited about feeling like they are in their living rooms—just outside! This involves carrying the same flooring or same color/finish of flooring, similar furniture and fabric styles, and the same color palette over to the exterior area.”Landscape architect Robert Bell is seeing more use of color outdoors, as clients and manufacturers move away from a monotone look inside too. “While adding pops of color via cushions or pillows has long been a design trick, clients are committing to unique tile and furniture colors like blue, coral or yellow,” he says, noting that he recently designed a flamingo pink garden gate for a home in South Florida.Join NowAD PRO members enjoy exclusive benefits. Get a year of unlimited access for $25 $20 per month.ArrowExtending the color palette beyond the interiors is a budget-friendly and effective way to synergize indoor and outdoor spaces, says Jessica Shaw, director of interior design at The Turett Collaborative. Taking it a step further, and matching styles is even better. “We design our outdoor spaces the same way we tackle our interiors. We look for comfort, luxury, and timelessness,” explains Jose Achi, senior director of design development at Clodagh Design. “Our exterior experiences not only include the usual outdoor living room arrangements, but we truly believe in people’s primal connection to the outdoors—we even provide beds to be able to sleep under a starry sky to complete the outdoor living experience.”Providing the same level of comfort in both interior and exterior spaces is important too. For example, installing a flush heater over an outdoor dining table or outdoor living room helps smooth the transition from inside to outside the home without the shock of a temperature change, says Southern California–based designer Dustin Morris, principal of AD PRO Directory firm Eyoh Design.“Often placed near the large sliding doors, the warm air creates a barrier that even helps regulate the indoor temperature so that you can have those doors opened up and the cold air doesn’t seem to get in,” Morris explains. “Homeowners love them because you are always able to use that outdoor space.”Meanwhile, a pass-through window to the patio can set up a physical link to ground outdoor design. “Many of our homes set up fold-away servery windows with bar seating looking back into the kitchen,” Morris says. “This allows the kitchen to be connected to the outdoor space and for the people seated outdoors to be connected to the people in the kitchen.” While this window is a very social feature, it also satisfies a functional need, as food from the indoor kitchen can be served through it to the outdoor kitchen or dining space.The veranda at this Tucson, Arizona, home by landscape architect Elizabeth Przygoda overflows with cozy desert personality. Courtesy of Elizabeth PrzygodaGo plush—or super sleek“In the last few years, we’ve been incorporating more furniture that has the feel and the look of indoor furniture,” says AD PRO Directory designer Tom Stringer.To put a finer point on it, says San Francisco–based interior and product designer Jiun Ho, “Out is the dull, square-edged, traditional, utilitarian teak furniture that screams ‘Grandma’s house.’” Instead, pros are embracing sculptural, weather-resilient furnishings that can hold their own—and play as well outside as they potentially could indoors. Noting that most conventional teak outdoor furniture has stayed the same for over 50 years, Ho has taken to designing pieces to function well wherever good design is needed. For example, his Furu outdoor dining furniture melds teak and stainless steel for a sexy aesthetic.Jiun Ho’s creations, like the teak Kiyomizu Dining Table, buck cliché conventions of traditional outdoor furniture. Courtesy of Jiun HoLindsey Jamison, lead designer and partner at Rumor Designs, loves a curved sofa on a patio. “In an open space like a patio, it can function in the center of the space which makes everything feel more playful seeing the curves,” she notes. “[Organic shapes] immediately make a patio feel cozy and warm. A neutral fabric curved sofa will add a sense of serene, calm—everything you want to relax in an outdoor space.”LA-based interior designer Kishani Perera says clients are gravitating toward “softer, less-structured furniture in favor of cozier pieces more in line with indoor pieces than outdoor—whether it’s for a more cushy sofa, a fab weather-resistant rug, or a rounded occasional table.” Genevieve Lake, owner of Florida-based design firm Love Lake Studio, points out that advances in performance fabrics can also lend a helping hand. “Gone are the days of crunchy, cardboard-feeling outdoor furniture,” she says; today, it’s all about velvets, weaves, and bouclés.Lauren Lerner, CEO and founder of Living with Lolo in Scottsdale, Arizona, goes so far as adding accouterments beyond just furniture. “We enjoy crafting outdoor living spaces furnished with rugs and even outdoor TVs,” she says. “Our designs [use] natural materials like stone, wood, and plants to create an organic, inviting ambiance.” And don’t forget to create shade where it may not exist naturally, says Indiana-based designer Susan Yeley: “Big sturdy umbrellas add architectural interest and make outdoor gatherings on sunny days more pleasant.”Landscape architect Elizabeth Przygoda, founder of Boxhill, is noticing the rise of custom ramadas and shade structures. “These aren’t just to block the sun, they’re fully outfitted spaces with lighting, fans, and lounge setups,” she explains. “In the past month alone, we’ve installed five of them. They’re definitely an investment, but they completely transform the usability of a yard. It’s astonishing how quickly they transform a space.”No need for overly coordinated patio sets, says Inner Gardens’ Stephen Block: A mix of vintage and modern is just as compelling for an outdoor space as it is for an indoor one. Courtesy of Inner GardensMix materials, eras, and price pointsStephen Block of the store Inner Gardens, with locations in Malibu and Culver City, California, cautions against going matchy-matchy through old standbys like coordinating deck sets. He prefers to invest in “an eclectic mix”—wood, wicker, metal, and concrete—to carve out a more creative, personalized vibe. And designers shouldn’t feel too hemmed-in by sticking to a particular era of furnishings, he adds: “Mixing vintage with modern pieces creates a timeless aesthetic that feels fresh while adding character and depth to the space.”Przygoda says she appreciates the trend of mixing old and new—like sourcing vintage captain’s chairs for the ends of a contemporary dining table—and is seeing a lot more mixing of highs and lows. “Someone might put an IKEA rug under a $12,000 outdoor table—and it works,” she says. “That’s one of the things I love most about landscape and outdoor design: It’s much more forgiving than interior design.”She adds, “Layering these highs and lows and olds and news gives spaces ‘legs’ to stand on, and they don't feel so staged and catalogue-ish.”LA-based interior designer Alex Yeske has noticed an influx of European inspirations in patio trends. “I am personally a huge fan of European outdoor spaces and like to achieve that vibe from a mix of materials—rattan, iron, stone, wood—and mixing and matching new pieces with vintage finds,” she says. “There have been many fun iron and powder-coated steel furniture lines introduced for outdoor use, as well as more options beyond stripes for patterned outdoor fabrics.”To achieve a curated look, Shaw mixes brands and textures. “While there is something appealing about the clean and minimal approach of finding a furniture line you love and purchasing a full set, there is a richness and greater sense of personality and originality that comes from mixing things up,” she says. “It ultimately allows our clients to have a greater feeling of satisfaction and connection to their outdoor living spaces.”This Texas home by architects Calvin Chen and Thomas Bercy has a large patio between its pool pavilion and main house, which both use reclaimed Douglas fir and Glulam beams; landscape by Ciel Design for Gardens. Photo: Douglas Friedman / Styling: Jenny O'ConnorSource eco-friendly findsAesthetics and functionality are not the only concerns for patio designs; increasingly, homeowners and designers weigh environmental impact when furnishing an open-air room. “Clients are asking for products made of more natural materials instead of plastic. Outdoor furniture made from rope, teak, and naturally sourced wood is not only better for the environment, but also much better to the touch than plastic,” Stringer notes.Similarly, Joseph Carline, partner at Kligerman Architecture & Design in New York, says his firm’s recent focus for patio design has been to “use local materials that not only exude timeless beauty but are sustainable and ethically sourced.” Local reclaimed or FSC-certified hardwoods and natural stone are top choices for patio furniture, as they tend to have a smaller carbon footprint. “We also often use US-made brick products as patio pavers, which are endlessly versatile, durable, and just look stunning,” he continues, naming materials like limestone and sandstone as options that “offer a range of textures and colors to suit various aesthetic preferences while maintaining sustainability.”Bell also sees increased focus on recycled or reused paving materials. “Reclaimed Chicago brick pavers are a perennial favorite but now mixed with tabby materials like recycled shell or glass pavers,” he says. “Bricks and concrete pavers are often made locally or regionally and may be a greener (and tariff-free) choice compared to European or Indian stones shipped long distances. We've had lots of simulated limestone paving made in the Palm Beach area.”To further reduce a garden’s environmental impact, Carline says his firm “embraces water-saving landscaping techniques, such as native plantings and permeable hardscaping surfaces to help conserve water and promote biodiversity. These elements not only enhance the beauty of the patio but also contribute to a healthier ecosystem.”Carline also says his firm “embraces water-saving landscaping techniques, such as native plantings and permeable hardscaping surfaces to help conserve water and promote biodiversity. These elements not only enhance the beauty of the patio but also contribute to a healthier ecosystem.”A small private patio in the citrus grove at Paseo La Cresta II, designed by KAA © Roger Davies/OTTOAdopt native and edible plantsWhat’s an outdoor living space without proper plantings? Trees, shrubs, plants, and flowers not only add aesthetic appeal but also ground a patio design in its site-specific locale. “Biophilia in design is magic to all of us,” Clodagh offers. “We like to turn terraces and patios, large and small, into greenery-filled gardens as much as we can, all for a huge mental health boost. They make wonderful spaces to sneak out and connect with nature and disconnect from devices. All the senses become more alert outdoors and you can listen to the sounds of life in your garden.”Nashville-based designer Brad Ramsey notices a trend toward using native species in patio planting, as they tend to require less maintenance. “Many people also opt for native evergreen plants and perennials for year-round green and annual color without having to purchase and replant every spring,” he says.“Using trees and shrubs that are native to your region contributes to a healthy ecosystem and attracts highly desirable visitors to the garden such as birds and butterflies,” explain Damien and Jacqueline Harrison, principals at landscape firm Harrison Green in New York. “We like to ensure that at least two thirds of our gardens are made up of native plants.”The design duo also favors edible plants, which are both beautiful and functional, and likes to use espaliers to train fruiting trees to grow in a flat plane along a wall. They say they’ve had great success with using espaliers for apple and pear trees in small patio spaces in New York City, as they take up less space. “They’re a nice alternative to a vine for coverage on a wall and will immediately elevate the look of any garden,” they add.LA-based senior landscape architect Michael McGowan of AD PRO Directory firm KAA Design loves the idea of smaller, more intimate patio spaces that integrate biodiverse gardens—think plants, flowers, and veggies. He even created a mini fruit tree grove into one client project. “The divine scent of spring citrus blossoms and comfy furniture entice residents to spend time enjoying the serenity of the space,” notes McGowan.A robust dining setup, sculptural outdoor lighting, bar cart, and a fireside lounge help make Donna Mondi’s design for this alfresco space especially inviting. Photo: David PattersonFire it upAn outdoor fire feature can be the pièce de résistance of a patio design. “We rarely design homes without an outdoor living room, complete with a fireplace,” says Bruce Bockus, architect and chairman at Bockus Payne. From actual wood-burning fireplaces to gas-powered devices that can turn on via smartphone or remote control, these amenities can help extend the season of a patio into the cooler months. “We like to hook up firepits directly to a gas line for easy-peasy ambiance and heat,” says Yeley in Indiana.“Horizontal gas fireplaces are a trending design feature right now. You can place them low and position a television above it at an easily viewable height,” adds Bockus, noting the need to offer clients a few options. “A firepit is the least expensive way,” he says, but it needs to be placed in the open. “If you like the feeling of being under the stars, it might be the perfect choice for you.”But beyond including just any old fire source, Stafford of Rumor Designs says that firepits are trending away from sleek, modern forms and leaning into structures that exude more character. “Lately, we’ve found how important it is to make the most simple things interesting,” she says. “For so long we’ve whittled elements down to such a modern, clean skeleton with no [personality], and we’re ready to add thoughtful details back into design elements.”Przygoda adds, “With all the recent wildfires on the West Coast, we’re seeing more focus on safety. Clients are opting for firepits that use hidden propane tanks, which can be easily shut off, contained, and controlled. They’re beautiful but practical, which is exactly what outdoor living should be.”A multi-level garden in San Francisco for architectural designer Abigail Turin features a small pool and seamless indoor-outdoor access. Landscape design by Ken Mendonça. Photo: Sang An / Styling: Rod HipskindTake the plungeAlthough there was a time when grand backyard swimming pools were all the rage, today’s homeowners are thinking smaller—much smaller—and leaning into more niche spa amenities like cold plunges. Often this is because clients “want to build their own private sanctuary to decompress after a stressful work day or lounge on the weekend,” notes Jennifer Nawada Evans, owner and designer at Nawada Landscape Design.“We love the growing emphasis on wellness in design and that more people are putting in saunas and pools,” says North Carolina–based interior designer Carrie Moore. “The design of these elements is getting more sophisticated. Tiny plunge pools are being put in smaller urban backyards, and while they are [compact], they still have a very calming impact on our senses.”Taking the plunge, so to speak, also leaves more space to enjoy the rest of the garden. Plus they’re easier to install, says Nawada Evans. “They take up less space, water, and energy than a standard-size swimming pool, and they require fewer chemicals.”Blu Dot Longday Bar CartTerrace Solid Wood Bar CartBring on the bar carts“Designers love a good bar cart moment, and outdoor patios are no exception,” says Denver-based designer Donna Mondi, who recently added Holly Hunt’s Omura bar cart to her own patio. “It’s been used for tequila tasting, a backup bar, and champagne service for events at our home,” she notes. “It’s stylish, strong enough to withstand the elements, and mobile so we can wheel it where we need it.Dan Mazzarini, principal and creative director at BHDM Design, also thinks that bar carts add a lavish aesthetic to patio designs for all seasons. “Bar carts can do much more than just hold liquor,” he explains. “From accommodating dim sum to buffets, these pieces are both form and function and go from poolside chic to dinner party elegant as the sun sets.” There are plenty of bar-cart styles that combine the warmth of wood with cool aluminum to meld well with other patio furniture and decor.North Carolina–based Carrie Moore decked out this alfresco kitchen with plenty of pendant lighting and cozy cushions. Lissa Gotwals Photography / Courtesy of Carrie Moore Interior DesignLight it rightCoastal Living Chic Coastal Beehive Outdoor PendantThe pros we spoke to emphasized that lighting design must be integrated into a design scheme from the inception of a project, not as an afterthought. “I’ll always encourage clients to have fun with outdoor lighting,” notes Perera, “from a beautiful chandelier…to an unexpected fixture to add a touch of whimsy to the space.”Eyoh’s Morris is noticing many outdoor spaces that don't have permanent overhead lighting structures opt for café lights instead. “Café lights over outdoor spaces lend a very ephemeral and romantic feeling to the space in the evening, as the string of soft lights offers the coziness of an overhead ceiling while being completely open to the stars,” he explains.To create an appealing atmosphere outside, “We accent trees, light pathways, and string party lights to make our patios just as inviting,” Ramsey says. “And now we have all kinds of options for rechargeable lamps to provide even more charm and warmth to our thoughtfully designed outdoor rooms.”Similarly, Washington, DC–based AD PRO Directory designer Zoë Feldman favors solar-powered string lights. “They’re effortless, energy-efficient, and add just the right amount of magic to any outdoor space,” she says. “No plugs, no fuss, just instant ambiance.”APPLY NOWGrow your business with the AD PRO DirectoryArrow Source: https://www.architecturaldigest.com/story/patio-trends-changing-todays-backyards #patio #trends #changing #todays #backyards
    WWW.ARCHITECTURALDIGEST.COM
    9 Patio Trends Changing Today’s Backyards
    The COVID-19 pandemic changed homeowners’ priorities for their outdoor spaces; they’ve since envisioned them as flexible extensions of their residences’ interiors. “It was during the pandemic that we noticed the huge upswing in demand for terraces, balconies, and patios, and that has not abated,” notes mono-monikered New York–based designer Clodagh. “It’s that need we have to know that we can escape from a confined space: the need for air, sky, and vista.”According to the National Association of Realtors, 64% of homeowners seek to create multifunctional outdoor spaces, which aligns with the boom in the outdoor living market—this market segment is projected to hit $26.8 billion by 2027. But in a sea of new furnishings and materials, what patio trends are here to stay? AD PRO tapped industry experts to share the patio designs shaping today’s outdoor spaces.A poolside shade structure at a Los Angeles home by DISC Interiors is designed as an outdoor living room. Photo: Sam FrostKeep it seamless“Clients that are looking for their outdoor spaces to be designed similarly to their indoors, so there’s a seamless transition between the two,” explains New York–based interior designer Tina Ramchandani. “Clients are excited about feeling like they are in their living rooms—just outside! This involves carrying the same flooring or same color/finish of flooring, similar furniture and fabric styles, and the same color palette over to the exterior area.”Landscape architect Robert Bell is seeing more use of color outdoors, as clients and manufacturers move away from a monotone look inside too. “While adding pops of color via cushions or pillows has long been a design trick, clients are committing to unique tile and furniture colors like blue, coral or yellow,” he says, noting that he recently designed a flamingo pink garden gate for a home in South Florida.Join NowAD PRO members enjoy exclusive benefits. Get a year of unlimited access for $25 $20 per month.ArrowExtending the color palette beyond the interiors is a budget-friendly and effective way to synergize indoor and outdoor spaces, says Jessica Shaw, director of interior design at The Turett Collaborative. Taking it a step further, and matching styles is even better. “We design our outdoor spaces the same way we tackle our interiors. We look for comfort, luxury, and timelessness,” explains Jose Achi, senior director of design development at Clodagh Design. “Our exterior experiences not only include the usual outdoor living room arrangements, but we truly believe in people’s primal connection to the outdoors—we even provide beds to be able to sleep under a starry sky to complete the outdoor living experience.”Providing the same level of comfort in both interior and exterior spaces is important too. For example, installing a flush heater over an outdoor dining table or outdoor living room helps smooth the transition from inside to outside the home without the shock of a temperature change, says Southern California–based designer Dustin Morris, principal of AD PRO Directory firm Eyoh Design.“Often placed near the large sliding doors, the warm air creates a barrier that even helps regulate the indoor temperature so that you can have those doors opened up and the cold air doesn’t seem to get in,” Morris explains. “Homeowners love them because you are always able to use that outdoor space.”Meanwhile, a pass-through window to the patio can set up a physical link to ground outdoor design. “Many of our homes set up fold-away servery windows with bar seating looking back into the kitchen,” Morris says. “This allows the kitchen to be connected to the outdoor space and for the people seated outdoors to be connected to the people in the kitchen.” While this window is a very social feature, it also satisfies a functional need, as food from the indoor kitchen can be served through it to the outdoor kitchen or dining space.The veranda at this Tucson, Arizona, home by landscape architect Elizabeth Przygoda overflows with cozy desert personality. Courtesy of Elizabeth PrzygodaGo plush—or super sleek“In the last few years, we’ve been incorporating more furniture that has the feel and the look of indoor furniture,” says AD PRO Directory designer Tom Stringer.To put a finer point on it, says San Francisco–based interior and product designer Jiun Ho, “Out is the dull, square-edged, traditional, utilitarian teak furniture that screams ‘Grandma’s house.’” Instead, pros are embracing sculptural, weather-resilient furnishings that can hold their own—and play as well outside as they potentially could indoors. Noting that most conventional teak outdoor furniture has stayed the same for over 50 years, Ho has taken to designing pieces to function well wherever good design is needed. For example, his Furu outdoor dining furniture melds teak and stainless steel for a sexy aesthetic.Jiun Ho’s creations, like the teak Kiyomizu Dining Table, buck cliché conventions of traditional outdoor furniture. Courtesy of Jiun HoLindsey Jamison, lead designer and partner at Rumor Designs, loves a curved sofa on a patio. “In an open space like a patio, it can function in the center of the space which makes everything feel more playful seeing the curves,” she notes. “[Organic shapes] immediately make a patio feel cozy and warm. A neutral fabric curved sofa will add a sense of serene, calm—everything you want to relax in an outdoor space.”LA-based interior designer Kishani Perera says clients are gravitating toward “softer, less-structured furniture in favor of cozier pieces more in line with indoor pieces than outdoor—whether it’s for a more cushy sofa, a fab weather-resistant rug, or a rounded occasional table.” Genevieve Lake, owner of Florida-based design firm Love Lake Studio, points out that advances in performance fabrics can also lend a helping hand. “Gone are the days of crunchy, cardboard-feeling outdoor furniture,” she says; today, it’s all about velvets, weaves, and bouclés.Lauren Lerner, CEO and founder of Living with Lolo in Scottsdale, Arizona, goes so far as adding accouterments beyond just furniture. “We enjoy crafting outdoor living spaces furnished with rugs and even outdoor TVs,” she says. “Our designs [use] natural materials like stone, wood, and plants to create an organic, inviting ambiance.” And don’t forget to create shade where it may not exist naturally, says Indiana-based designer Susan Yeley: “Big sturdy umbrellas add architectural interest and make outdoor gatherings on sunny days more pleasant.”Landscape architect Elizabeth Przygoda, founder of Boxhill, is noticing the rise of custom ramadas and shade structures. “These aren’t just to block the sun, they’re fully outfitted spaces with lighting, fans, and lounge setups,” she explains. “In the past month alone, we’ve installed five of them. They’re definitely an investment, but they completely transform the usability of a yard. It’s astonishing how quickly they transform a space.”No need for overly coordinated patio sets, says Inner Gardens’ Stephen Block: A mix of vintage and modern is just as compelling for an outdoor space as it is for an indoor one. Courtesy of Inner GardensMix materials, eras, and price pointsStephen Block of the store Inner Gardens, with locations in Malibu and Culver City, California, cautions against going matchy-matchy through old standbys like coordinating deck sets. He prefers to invest in “an eclectic mix”—wood, wicker, metal, and concrete—to carve out a more creative, personalized vibe. And designers shouldn’t feel too hemmed-in by sticking to a particular era of furnishings, he adds: “Mixing vintage with modern pieces creates a timeless aesthetic that feels fresh while adding character and depth to the space.”Przygoda says she appreciates the trend of mixing old and new—like sourcing vintage captain’s chairs for the ends of a contemporary dining table—and is seeing a lot more mixing of highs and lows. “Someone might put an IKEA rug under a $12,000 outdoor table—and it works,” she says. “That’s one of the things I love most about landscape and outdoor design: It’s much more forgiving than interior design.”She adds, “Layering these highs and lows and olds and news gives spaces ‘legs’ to stand on, and they don't feel so staged and catalogue-ish.”LA-based interior designer Alex Yeske has noticed an influx of European inspirations in patio trends. “I am personally a huge fan of European outdoor spaces and like to achieve that vibe from a mix of materials—rattan, iron, stone, wood—and mixing and matching new pieces with vintage finds,” she says. “There have been many fun iron and powder-coated steel furniture lines introduced for outdoor use, as well as more options beyond stripes for patterned outdoor fabrics.”To achieve a curated look, Shaw mixes brands and textures. “While there is something appealing about the clean and minimal approach of finding a furniture line you love and purchasing a full set, there is a richness and greater sense of personality and originality that comes from mixing things up,” she says. “It ultimately allows our clients to have a greater feeling of satisfaction and connection to their outdoor living spaces.”This Texas home by architects Calvin Chen and Thomas Bercy has a large patio between its pool pavilion and main house, which both use reclaimed Douglas fir and Glulam beams; landscape by Ciel Design for Gardens. Photo: Douglas Friedman / Styling: Jenny O'ConnorSource eco-friendly findsAesthetics and functionality are not the only concerns for patio designs; increasingly, homeowners and designers weigh environmental impact when furnishing an open-air room. “Clients are asking for products made of more natural materials instead of plastic. Outdoor furniture made from rope, teak, and naturally sourced wood is not only better for the environment, but also much better to the touch than plastic,” Stringer notes.Similarly, Joseph Carline, partner at Kligerman Architecture & Design in New York, says his firm’s recent focus for patio design has been to “use local materials that not only exude timeless beauty but are sustainable and ethically sourced.” Local reclaimed or FSC-certified hardwoods and natural stone are top choices for patio furniture, as they tend to have a smaller carbon footprint. “We also often use US-made brick products as patio pavers, which are endlessly versatile, durable, and just look stunning,” he continues, naming materials like limestone and sandstone as options that “offer a range of textures and colors to suit various aesthetic preferences while maintaining sustainability.”Bell also sees increased focus on recycled or reused paving materials. “Reclaimed Chicago brick pavers are a perennial favorite but now mixed with tabby materials like recycled shell or glass pavers,” he says. “Bricks and concrete pavers are often made locally or regionally and may be a greener (and tariff-free) choice compared to European or Indian stones shipped long distances. We've had lots of simulated limestone paving made in the Palm Beach area.”To further reduce a garden’s environmental impact, Carline says his firm “embraces water-saving landscaping techniques, such as native plantings and permeable hardscaping surfaces to help conserve water and promote biodiversity. These elements not only enhance the beauty of the patio but also contribute to a healthier ecosystem.”Carline also says his firm “embraces water-saving landscaping techniques, such as native plantings and permeable hardscaping surfaces to help conserve water and promote biodiversity. These elements not only enhance the beauty of the patio but also contribute to a healthier ecosystem.”A small private patio in the citrus grove at Paseo La Cresta II, designed by KAA © Roger Davies/OTTOAdopt native and edible plantsWhat’s an outdoor living space without proper plantings? Trees, shrubs, plants, and flowers not only add aesthetic appeal but also ground a patio design in its site-specific locale. “Biophilia in design is magic to all of us,” Clodagh offers. “We like to turn terraces and patios, large and small, into greenery-filled gardens as much as we can, all for a huge mental health boost. They make wonderful spaces to sneak out and connect with nature and disconnect from devices. All the senses become more alert outdoors and you can listen to the sounds of life in your garden.”Nashville-based designer Brad Ramsey notices a trend toward using native species in patio planting, as they tend to require less maintenance. “Many people also opt for native evergreen plants and perennials for year-round green and annual color without having to purchase and replant every spring,” he says.“Using trees and shrubs that are native to your region contributes to a healthy ecosystem and attracts highly desirable visitors to the garden such as birds and butterflies,” explain Damien and Jacqueline Harrison, principals at landscape firm Harrison Green in New York. “We like to ensure that at least two thirds of our gardens are made up of native plants.”The design duo also favors edible plants, which are both beautiful and functional, and likes to use espaliers to train fruiting trees to grow in a flat plane along a wall. They say they’ve had great success with using espaliers for apple and pear trees in small patio spaces in New York City, as they take up less space. “They’re a nice alternative to a vine for coverage on a wall and will immediately elevate the look of any garden,” they add.LA-based senior landscape architect Michael McGowan of AD PRO Directory firm KAA Design loves the idea of smaller, more intimate patio spaces that integrate biodiverse gardens—think plants, flowers, and veggies. He even created a mini fruit tree grove into one client project. “The divine scent of spring citrus blossoms and comfy furniture entice residents to spend time enjoying the serenity of the space,” notes McGowan.A robust dining setup, sculptural outdoor lighting, bar cart, and a fireside lounge help make Donna Mondi’s design for this alfresco space especially inviting. Photo: David PattersonFire it upAn outdoor fire feature can be the pièce de résistance of a patio design. “We rarely design homes without an outdoor living room, complete with a fireplace,” says Bruce Bockus, architect and chairman at Bockus Payne. From actual wood-burning fireplaces to gas-powered devices that can turn on via smartphone or remote control, these amenities can help extend the season of a patio into the cooler months. “We like to hook up firepits directly to a gas line for easy-peasy ambiance and heat,” says Yeley in Indiana.“Horizontal gas fireplaces are a trending design feature right now. You can place them low and position a television above it at an easily viewable height,” adds Bockus, noting the need to offer clients a few options. “A firepit is the least expensive way,” he says, but it needs to be placed in the open. “If you like the feeling of being under the stars, it might be the perfect choice for you.”But beyond including just any old fire source, Stafford of Rumor Designs says that firepits are trending away from sleek, modern forms and leaning into structures that exude more character. “Lately, we’ve found how important it is to make the most simple things interesting,” she says. “For so long we’ve whittled elements down to such a modern, clean skeleton with no [personality], and we’re ready to add thoughtful details back into design elements.”Przygoda adds, “With all the recent wildfires on the West Coast, we’re seeing more focus on safety. Clients are opting for firepits that use hidden propane tanks, which can be easily shut off, contained, and controlled. They’re beautiful but practical, which is exactly what outdoor living should be.”A multi-level garden in San Francisco for architectural designer Abigail Turin features a small pool and seamless indoor-outdoor access. Landscape design by Ken Mendonça. Photo: Sang An / Styling: Rod HipskindTake the plungeAlthough there was a time when grand backyard swimming pools were all the rage, today’s homeowners are thinking smaller—much smaller—and leaning into more niche spa amenities like cold plunges. Often this is because clients “want to build their own private sanctuary to decompress after a stressful work day or lounge on the weekend,” notes Jennifer Nawada Evans, owner and designer at Nawada Landscape Design.“We love the growing emphasis on wellness in design and that more people are putting in saunas and pools,” says North Carolina–based interior designer Carrie Moore. “The design of these elements is getting more sophisticated. Tiny plunge pools are being put in smaller urban backyards, and while they are [compact], they still have a very calming impact on our senses.”Taking the plunge, so to speak, also leaves more space to enjoy the rest of the garden. Plus they’re easier to install, says Nawada Evans. “They take up less space, water, and energy than a standard-size swimming pool, and they require fewer chemicals.”Blu Dot Longday Bar CartTerrace Solid Wood Bar CartBring on the bar carts“Designers love a good bar cart moment, and outdoor patios are no exception,” says Denver-based designer Donna Mondi, who recently added Holly Hunt’s Omura bar cart to her own patio. “It’s been used for tequila tasting, a backup bar, and champagne service for events at our home,” she notes. “It’s stylish, strong enough to withstand the elements, and mobile so we can wheel it where we need it.Dan Mazzarini, principal and creative director at BHDM Design, also thinks that bar carts add a lavish aesthetic to patio designs for all seasons. “Bar carts can do much more than just hold liquor,” he explains. “From accommodating dim sum to buffets, these pieces are both form and function and go from poolside chic to dinner party elegant as the sun sets.” There are plenty of bar-cart styles that combine the warmth of wood with cool aluminum to meld well with other patio furniture and decor.North Carolina–based Carrie Moore decked out this alfresco kitchen with plenty of pendant lighting and cozy cushions. Lissa Gotwals Photography / Courtesy of Carrie Moore Interior DesignLight it rightCoastal Living Chic Coastal Beehive Outdoor PendantThe pros we spoke to emphasized that lighting design must be integrated into a design scheme from the inception of a project, not as an afterthought. “I’ll always encourage clients to have fun with outdoor lighting,” notes Perera, “from a beautiful chandelier…to an unexpected fixture to add a touch of whimsy to the space.”Eyoh’s Morris is noticing many outdoor spaces that don't have permanent overhead lighting structures opt for café lights instead. “Café lights over outdoor spaces lend a very ephemeral and romantic feeling to the space in the evening, as the string of soft lights offers the coziness of an overhead ceiling while being completely open to the stars,” he explains.To create an appealing atmosphere outside, “We accent trees, light pathways, and string party lights to make our patios just as inviting,” Ramsey says. “And now we have all kinds of options for rechargeable lamps to provide even more charm and warmth to our thoughtfully designed outdoor rooms.”Similarly, Washington, DC–based AD PRO Directory designer Zoë Feldman favors solar-powered string lights. “They’re effortless, energy-efficient, and add just the right amount of magic to any outdoor space,” she says. “No plugs, no fuss, just instant ambiance.”APPLY NOWGrow your business with the AD PRO DirectoryArrow
    0 Yorumlar 0 hisse senetleri 0 önizleme
Arama Sonuçları
CGShares https://cgshares.com